Professional Documents
Culture Documents
3252ci/3552ci
4052ci/5052ci
6052ci
PF-7100/7110/7120
DP-7100/7110/7120
DF-7100/7110/7120
AK-7100/MT-730(B)/BF-730/
JS-7100/PH-7A/PH-7C
PH-7100/PH-7120
FAX System 12
Printing System 15
SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in August 2017
842ND114
2NDSM064
Rev.4
CAUTION
It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your local solid waste
officials for details in your area for proper disposal.
ATTENTION
Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les fonctionnaires
municipaux de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides et une mise au rebut appropriée.
For the purpose of this service manual, products are identified by print speed.
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect com-
pliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is
shown inside the symbol.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required. Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that
it is adequate for the rated current. .....................................................................................................
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, light-
ning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper
authorities. ..........................................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .........
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. .................
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This
may cause fire. ...................................................................................................................................
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ............
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. .................................................
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause
the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ..............................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally
ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately.
If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical atten-
tion. .....................................................................................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook. .........................................................................................................................
2. Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ................
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. ..........................................................................................................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. ........................................................................................................................
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure
when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious acci-
dent. ...................................................................................................................................................
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ..................................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ...............
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. .................................................................
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...............................................................................................................................
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ...............................................................................................................
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely
secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ......................................................................
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ..........
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat rollers (heat belt) and press rollers are clean. Dirt on
them can cause abnormally high temperatures.
...........................................................................................................
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ......................
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ........................................................................................................
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ................................................................................................
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ..........
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ......................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector,
trapped wire and missing screws. .......................................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. .......................................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ......................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. ...........................................................................................................................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immedi-
ately. ...................................................................................................................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the
specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ........................................................................................
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock
might occur. ........................................................................................................................................
This page is intentionally left blank.
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
CONTENTS
1 Specifications
1-1 Detail Specifications ................................................................................................................. 1-1
(1) Common function ................................................................................................................ 1-1
(2) Copy Functions.................................................................................................................... 1-5
(3) Printer Functions ................................................................................................................. 1-7
(4) Scanner Functions............................................................................................................... 1-8
(5) Option .................................................................................................................................. 1-9
(5-1) Document Processor.................................................................................................. 1-9
(5-2) Paper Feeder (500-sheet × 2) .................................................................................... 1-9
(5-3) Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet × 2) ................................................................ 1-10
(5-4) Side Feeder (3000-sheet) ........................................................................................ 1-10
(5-5) Inner Finisher ........................................................................................................... 1-11
(5-6) Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) ................................................................................ 1-11
(5-7) 1000-sheet Finisher.................................................................................................. 1-12
(5-8) 4000-sheet Finisher.................................................................................................. 1-13
(5-9) Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher) ................................................ 1-13
(5-10) Mailbox (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher).......................................................................... 1-13
(5-11) Folding Unit (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher) ................................................................... 1-14
(5-12) Job Separator (JS) Tray ........................................................................................... 1-14
(5-13) Banner Tray.............................................................................................................. 1-15
(5-14) FAX System ............................................................................................................. 1-15
1-2 Part Names............................................................................................................................. 1-17
(1) Machine ............................................................................................................................. 1-17
(1-1) Exterior ..................................................................................................................... 1-17
(1-2) Connectors/Interior................................................................................................... 1-19
(1-3) With Optional Equipment Attached .......................................................................... 1-20
(1-4) FAX System ............................................................................................................. 1-21
(1-5) Operation Panel Keys .............................................................................................. 1-22
1-3 Option configuration ............................................................................................................... 1-23
(1) Option ................................................................................................................................ 1-25
(1-1) DP-7110 "Document Processor (Dual Scan)"
DP-7100 "Document Processor (Dual Reverse Scan)
DP-7120 "Document Processor (Dual Reverse Scan) (Option for Low-end model)
PLATEN COVER TYPE E "Original Cover" ............................................................. 1-25
(1-2) MT-730(B) "Mailbox" ................................................................................................ 1-25
(1-3) DF-7110 "4,000-Sheet Finisher" .............................................................................. 1-25
(1-4) DF-7120 "1,000-Sheet Finisher" .............................................................................. 1-25
(1-5) BF-730 "Folding Unit ".............................................................................................. 1-25
(1-6) PF-7100 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2)" .................................................................. 1-25
(1-7) PF-7110 "Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2)" ................................................. 1-25
(1-8) PF-7120 "Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)" ...................................................................... 1-25
(1-9) Banner Guide 10 "Banner Tray” ............................................................................... 1-25
(1-10) DF-7100 "Inner Finisher".......................................................................................... 1-25
(1-11) PH-7100,PH-7110, PH-7120, PH-7130 "Punch Unit" .............................................. 1-26
(1-12) PH-7A, PH-7C, PH-7D "Punch Unit" ........................................................................ 1-26
(1-13) JS-7100 "Job Separator".......................................................................................... 1-26
(1-14) NK-7100, NK-7110 "Optional Numeric Keypad" ...................................................... 1-26
(1-15) DT-730 (B) "Document Table".................................................................................. 1-26
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
2 Installation
2-1 Environment ............................................................................................................................. 2-1
2-2 Installing the main unit .............................................................................................................. 2-2
(1) Unpacking and checking bundled items .............................................................................. 2-3
(1-1) Main unit..................................................................................................................... 2-3
(2) Unpacking and checking bundled items(Enhancement devices) ........................................ 2-4
(2-1) Paper Feeder (PF-7100) ............................................................................................ 2-4
(2-2) Large Capacity Feeder (PF-7110).............................................................................. 2-5
(2-3) Side Feeder (PF-7120)............................................................................................... 2-6
(2-4) Document Processor (DP-7100) ................................................................................ 2-7
(2-5) Document Processor (DP-7110) ................................................................................ 2-8
(2-6) Document Processor (DP-7120): Low-end model only .............................................. 2-9
(2-7) Inner Finisher (DF-7100) .......................................................................................... 2-10
(2-8) 1000-sheet Finisher (DF-7120) ................................................................................ 2-11
(2-9) 4,000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110) ............................................................................... 2-12
(2-10) Mailbox (MT-730(B)) ................................................................................................ 2-13
(2-11) Folding unit (BF-730)................................................................................................ 2-14
(2-12) Punch unit (PH-7B) .................................................................................................. 2-15
(2-13) Punch Unit (PH-7110) .............................................................................................. 2-16
(3) Notes on main unit transportation...................................................................................... 2-17
(4) Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame.................................................................... 2-18
(5) Release of lift plate stopper ............................................................................................... 2-19
(6) Attaching the sub tray........................................................................................................ 2-20
(7) Affixing the operation panel sheet (220-240V models only) .............................................. 2-20
(8) Optional unit installation .................................................................................................... 2-21
(9) Connecting the Interface Cable ......................................................................................... 2-22
(10) Connecting the FAX cable (FAX installation only)............................................................. 2-24
(11) Loading Paper ................................................................................................................... 2-26
(11-1) Precaution for Loading Paper................................................................................... 2-26
(11-2) Set paper in the cassette.......................................................................................... 2-27
(11-3) Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes................................................... 2-31
(11-4) Set paper in the large capacity feeder...................................................................... 2-34
(11-5) Set paper in the side feeder ..................................................................................... 2-36
(12) Connecting the Power Cord .............................................................................................. 2-38
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
3 Machine Design
3-1 Mechanical Configuration ......................................................................................................... 3-1
(1) Cross-section view (Low-end model) .................................................................................. 3-1
(2) Cross-section view (High-end model).................................................................................. 3-2
3-2 Extension device construction (option) ..................................................................................... 3-3
(1) Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-7100) ........................................................................ 3-3
(2) Large capacity feeder cross-section view (PF-7110) .......................................................... 3-3
(3) Side feeder cross-section view (PF-7120)........................................................................... 3-4
(4) Document processor cross-section view (DP-7100) .......................................................... 3-5
(5) Document processor cross-section view (DP-7110) .......................................................... 3-5
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
(6) Document processor cross-section view (DP-7120) : Low-end model only ........................ 3-6
(7) Attachment kit cross-section view (AK-7100) ...................................................................... 3-6
(8) Inner Finisher cross-section view (DF-7100)....................................................................... 3-7
(9) 4,000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-7120) ............................................................ 3-8
(10) 1000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-7120) ............................................................ 3-9
(11) Mailbox cross-section view (MT-730(B)) ........................................................................... 3-10
(12) Folding unit cross-section view (BF-730) .......................................................................... 3-11
(13) Job separator cross-section view (JS-7100) ..................................................................... 3-12
3-3 Paper conveying and Paper detection.................................................................................... 3-13
(1) Main unit (low-end model)+DP-7120+PF-7100+DF-7100+PH-7110................................ 3-13
(2) Main unit (high-end model)+DP-7110+PF-7110+PF-7120+AK-7100+
DF-7110+MT-730(B)+BF-730+PH-7 ................................................................................. 3-14
(3) Main unit (high-end model)+DP-7100+PF-7110+AK-7100+DF-7120+PH-7 ..................... 3-15
3-4 Electric parts (Low-end model) .............................................................................................. 3-16
(1) Wire connection................................................................................................................. 3-16
(1-1) (Machine rear side) .................................................................................................. 3-16
(1-2) Backside of the shield box........................................................................................ 3-17
(2) Descriptions about the major PWBs.................................................................................. 3-18
(2-1) Main PWB ................................................................................................................ 3-18
(2-2) Engine PWB ............................................................................................................. 3-18
(2-3) Main high-voltage PWB............................................................................................ 3-19
(2-4) Transfer high-voltage PWB ...................................................................................... 3-19
(2-5) Low power voltage PEB ........................................................................................... 3-19
(2-6) IH PWB..................................................................................................................... 3-20
(2-7) Operation panel main PWB...................................................................................... 3-20
(2-8) Fuser high voltage PWB........................................................................................... 3-20
(3) Electric parts layout ........................................................................................................... 3-21
(3-1) PWBs ....................................................................................................................... 3-21
(3-2) Part name table (PWB) ............................................................................................ 3-23
(3-3) Sensors and Switches.............................................................................................. 3-25
(3-4) Part name table (Sensors and Switches) ................................................................. 3-28
(3-5) Motors ...................................................................................................................... 3-30
(3-6) Part name table (motor) ........................................................................................... 3-32
(3-7) Others....................................................................................................................... 3-34
(3-8) Part name table (other) ............................................................................................ 3-36
3-5 Electric parts (High-end model) .............................................................................................. 3-37
(1) Wire connection................................................................................................................. 3-37
(1-1) (Machine rear side) .................................................................................................. 3-37
(1-2) Backside of the shield box........................................................................................ 3-38
(2) Descriptions about the major PWBs.................................................................................. 3-39
(2-1) Main PWB ................................................................................................................ 3-39
(2-2) Engine PWB ............................................................................................................. 3-39
(2-3) Main high-voltage PWB............................................................................................ 3-40
(2-4) Transfer high-voltage PWB ...................................................................................... 3-40
(2-5) Low power voltage PEB ........................................................................................... 3-40
(2-6) IH PWB..................................................................................................................... 3-41
(2-7) Operation panel main PWB...................................................................................... 3-41
(2-8) Fuser high voltage PWB........................................................................................... 3-41
(3) Electric parts layout ........................................................................................................... 3-42
(3-1) PWBs ....................................................................................................................... 3-42
(3-2) Part name table (PWB) ............................................................................................ 3-44
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
4 Maintenance
4-1 Precautions for the maintenance .............................................................................................. 4-1
(1) Precautions.......................................................................................................................... 4-1
(2) Storage and handling of the drum ....................................................................................... 4-1
(3) Storage of the toner container ............................................................................................. 4-1
4-2 Maintenance parts .................................................................................................................... 4-2
(1) Maintenance kits (For main unit) ......................................................................................... 4-2
(1-1) Low-end model........................................................................................................... 4-2
(1-2) High-end model .......................................................................................................... 4-4
(2) Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit ............................... 4-5
4-3 Maintenance parts replacement procedures ............................................................................ 4-8
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
5 Firmware
5-1 Firmware update....................................................................................................................... 5-1
6 Maintenance mode
6-1 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................... 6-1
(1) Executing method of the maintenance mode ...................................................................... 6-1
(2) Maintenance modes list ...................................................................................................... 6-2
(2-1) Content of the maintenance mode ............................................................................. 6-9
7 Troubleshooting
7-1 Image formation problems ........................................................................................................ 7-1
(1) Isolate the place of image failure......................................................................................... 7-1
(2) Scanner Factors (When scanning the front side through DP,
or scanning the back side through the mechanically reversed DP)..................................... 7-2
(2-1) Abnormal image ......................................................................................................... 7-6
(2-2) Colored background ................................................................................................... 7-7
(2-3) Black or color spots .................................................................................................... 7-9
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
(1-1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing
the host name or the security software settings ..................................................... 7-507
(1-2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear ................................................................. 7-507
(1-3) The scanning data from the contact glass is automatically sent ............................ 7-507
(2) Sending Errors (Error Codes).......................................................................................... 7-509
(2-1) Scan to E-mail Error Codes.................................................................................... 7-509
(2-2) Scan to FTP Error Codes ....................................................................................... 7-515
(2-3) Scan to SMB Error Codes ...................................................................................... 7-521
7-6 Print Errors ........................................................................................................................... 7-524
(1) The paper loading message appears .............................................................................. 7-525
(2) The data is output with color from Excel even if the monochrome mode is set............... 7-526
(3) Color tone differs with the printed photo.......................................................................... 7-527
(4) The paper direction is incorrect ....................................................................................... 7-528
(5) Paper is fed from the MP tray.......................................................................................... 7-529
(6) Garbled characters .......................................................................................................... 7-529
(7) Data is output with monochrome ..................................................................................... 7-530
(8) Paper is not fed from the MP tray.................................................................................... 7-530
(9) The same data is repeatedly printed out ......................................................................... 7-530
(10) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or [Printer unavailable]
is indicated on the printer properties ............................................................................... 7-531
(11) Processing and Memory lamps are lit while the printer standby message
is indicated....................................................................................................................... 7-531
(12) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main unit startup
error Processing/Memory lamp is turned on.................................................................... 7-531
(13) Print stops after printing several pages and locks up Processing and
Memory lamps on operation panel are lit ........................................................................ 7-532
(14) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (1) ................................................. 7-533
(15) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (2) ................................................. 7-533
(16) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (3) ................................................. 7-534
(17) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (4) ................................................. 7-534
(18) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (5) ................................................. 7-535
(19) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (6) ................................................. 7-536
(20) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (7) ................................................. 7-537
(21) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (1) .............................................. 7-537
(22) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (2) .............................................. 7-538
(23) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (3) .............................................. 7-538
(24) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (4) .............................................. 7-538
(25) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (5) .............................................. 7-539
(26) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (6) .............................................. 7-539
(27) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (7) .............................................. 7-539
(28) The printed image is partly missing ................................................................................. 7-540
(29) "Paper Mismatch Error" appears ..................................................................................... 7-540
7-7 Error Messages .................................................................................................................... 7-541
(1) "Check the document processor" appears ...................................................................... 7-541
(2) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 1, 2)
even after removing/inserting the cassette and checking/removing paper
remaining in the main unit ............................................................................................... 7-542
(3) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 3, 4)
even after removing/inserting the cassette and checking/removing
paper remaining in the main unit ..................................................................................... 7-543
(4) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover...................................... 7-544
(5) The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or
the maintenance front cover ............................................................................................ 7-544
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
(6) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray .................. 7-545
(7) The message [Waste toner box is full] is wrongly displayed ........................................... 7-545
(8) When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor]
is wrongly displayed ........................................................................................................ 7-546
(9) When DP is used, document no-feed occurs and [Replace all originals.] is displayed ... 7-547
(10) When turning on the power, the display [Network device is running]
does not disappear .......................................................................................................... 7-547
7-8 Abnormal Noise .................................................................................................................... 7-548
(1) Abnormal noise (Basic support) ...................................................................................... 7-549
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section....................................................... 7-549
(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section ................................................................... 7-550
(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor............................................................... 7-550
(5) Abnormal sound from the eject section ........................................................................... 7-551
(6) Fan rotating sounds are noisy ......................................................................................... 7-552
(7) Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed section..................................................... 7-552
(8) Abnormal sound from the machine front side.................................................................. 7-553
(9) Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser eject section ................................... 7-553
(10) Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser eject section ...................................... 7-553
(11) Abnormal sound from the fuser section........................................................................... 7-554
(12) Abnormal sound from inside the machine ....................................................................... 7-555
(13) Abnormal sound from inside the machine ....................................................................... 7-555
(14) Abnormal sound from inside the machine ....................................................................... 7-556
(15) Abnormal sound from inside the machine (jumping sounds)........................................... 7-556
(16) The drive sounds are noisy during printing...................................................................... 7-557
(17) The metallic sound from the PF horizontal conveying section (Squeak sound) .............. 7-557
(18) Abnormal sound when driving the transfer belt (Tooth jumping sounds) ........................ 7-558
(19) Abnormal sound from rear side of the main unit.............................................................. 7-558
7-9 Malfunction ........................................................................................................................... 7-559
(1) The size of paper set in the cassette is misdetected or not displayed ............................ 7-559
(2) The MP tray paper size is misdetected .......................................................................... 7-561
(3) The controller fan motor does not rotate ......................................................................... 7-562
(4) The developer fan motor does not rotate ........................................................................ 7-562
(5) The main unit malfunctions even if turning on the power switch ..................................... 7-563
(6) Toner falls over the paper conveying section .................................................................. 7-564
(7) No display in the operation panel .................................................................................... 7-565
(8) The operation panel remains displaying "WELCOME" and does not change ................. 7-566
(9) The operation panel remains displaying [Network device is starting].............................. 7-566
(10) The operation panel remains displaying [There is no waste toner box]. ......................... 7-567
(11) The operation panel remains displaying [Close the waste toner box cover]. .................. 7-567
7-10 Connector troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 7-569
7-11 Printing System Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 7-581
(1) List of Error Code ............................................................................................................ 7-581
7-12 Others ................................................................................................................................... 7-585
(1) Adjusting the center position for the punch unit and the paper width guides .................. 7-585
(1-1) Adjusting the center position for the punch unit ..................................................... 7-585
(1-2) Adjusting the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray)............. 7-586
(1-3) Adjusting the center line at U034 ........................................................................... 7-587
(2) Alignment for affixing PARTS SHEET DECK FEED SP (For PF-7110) .......................... 7-588
8 PWBs
8-1 PWB description (High-end model) .......................................................................................... 8-1
(1) Main PWB (High-end model)............................................................................................... 8-1
(1-1) Connector position ..................................................................................................... 8-1
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
9 Appendixes
9-1 Repetitive defects gauge .......................................................................................................... 9-1
9-2 Environmental command .......................................................................................................... 9-2
9-3 Image adjustment procedure chart ......................................................................................... 9-11
9-4 Wiring diagram (High model) .................................................................................................. 9-15
(1) Engine PWB / Drive PWB.................................................................................................. 9-15
(2) Laser Scanner / Image Scanner and Document processor connection ............................ 9-16
(3) Feed image PWB (Front side) ........................................................................................... 9-17
(4) Feed image PWB (Rear side)............................................................................................ 9-18
(5) Feed drive PWB ................................................................................................................ 9-19
(6) Drum/Developer relay PWB .............................................................................................. 9-20
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
1 Specifications
1-1 Detail Specifications
(1) Common function
Items Specifications
Product name 25 ppm model / 32 ppm model / 35 ppm model / 40 ppm model / 50 ppm model /
60 ppm model
Type Desktop
Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser
Paper Weight Cassette Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m²
Multi Pur- Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m²
pose Tray
Media type Cassette Plain, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched,
Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom (Duplex: Same as Simplex)
Multi Pur- Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond,
pose Tray Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Coated,
Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 to 8
Paper Size Cassette 1 A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K, ISO
B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 to 297 × 356 mm)
Cassette 2 A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216 × 340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Statement, Executive, 12 × 18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Custom 1 to 4 (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)
Multi Pur- A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216 × 340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
pose Tray Statement, Executive, 12 × 18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Custom 1 to 4 (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm), 1 sheet (Banner sheet
(210 × 470.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm / 8.26" × 18.5" to 12" × 48")
Printable Area Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4 mm
1-1
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Items Specifications
Warm-up Time Power on 25 ppm model: 16 seconds or less
(23°C/73.4°F, 32 ppm model: 16 seconds or less
60%) 35 ppm model: 17 seconds or less
40 ppm model: 17 seconds or less
50 ppm model: 17 seconds or less
60 ppm model: 17 seconds or less
Low Power 25 ppm model: 10 seconds or less
32 ppm model: 10 seconds or less
35 ppm model: 15 seconds or less
40 ppm model: 15 seconds or less
50 ppm model: 15 seconds or less
60 ppm model: 15 seconds or less
Sleep 25 ppm model: 16 seconds or less
32 ppm model: 16 seconds or less
35 ppm model: 17 seconds or less
40 ppm model: 17 seconds or less
50 ppm model: 17 seconds or less
60 ppm model: 17 seconds or less
Paper Capacity Cassette 550 sheets (64g/m²)*1
500 sheets (80 g/m²)*1
Multi Pur- 165 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller)(64 g/m²)
pose Tray 150 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller)(80 g/m²)
55 sheets (Larger size than A4/Letter, 64 g/m²)
50 sheets (Larger size than A4/Letter, 80 g/m²)
1 sheet (Banner sheet (210 × 470.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm / 8.26" × 18.5" to 12" ×
48"))(136 to 163 g/m²)
1-2
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Items Specifications
Transfer system Primary: Transfer belt method
Secondary: Transfer roller method
Separation system Small diameter curvature separation and discharge needle (Impressing DC volt-
age)
Cleaning system Drum 25 ppm model: Counter blade
32 ppm model: Counter blade
35 ppm model: Counter blade + cleaning roller
40 ppm model: Counter blade + cleaning roller
50 ppm model: Counter blade + cleaning roller
60 ppm model: Counter blade + cleaning roller
Primary Fur brush cleaning + Pre-brush system
transfer
Charge erasing system Exposure by cleaning lamp (LED)
Fusing system Sliding IH fuser system
Heat source: IH
Temperature excess increase protection devices: thermostat
Memory 4.0 GB
Large capacity storage 25 ppm model: SSD 32 GB (SSD 8 GB / Hard Disk 320 GB*4)
32 ppm model: SSD 32 GB (SSD 8 GB / Hard Disk 320 GB*4)
35 ppm model: SSD 8 GB / Hard Disk 320 GB
40 ppm model: SSD 8 GB / Hard Disk 320 GB
50 ppm model: SSD 8 GB / Hard Disk 320 GB
60 ppm model: SSD 8 GB / Hard Disk 320 GB
Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1
(1000 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4, IPSec), 802.3az supported)
Hi-Speed USB: 4 (USB Flash memory slot)
1-3
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
1-4
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
1-5
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Items Specifications
Copy Speed 50 ppm Black and White Copy Full Color Copy
model A4/Letter 50 sheets/min 50 sheets/min
A4-R/Letter-R 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min
A3/Ledger 25 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
B4 30 sheets/min 30 sheets/min
Legal 30 sheets/min 30 sheets/min
B5 50 sheets/min 50 sheets/min
B5-R 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min
A5-R 25 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
A6-R 25 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
60 ppm Black and White Copy Full Color Copy
model A4/Letter 60 sheets/min 55 sheets/min
A4-R/Letter-R 42 sheets/min 38 sheets/min
A3/Ledger 30 sheets/min 27 sheets/min
B4 36 sheets/min 33 sheets/min
Legal 36 sheets/min 33 sheets/min
B5 60 sheets/min 55 sheets/min
B5-R 42 sheets/min 38 sheets/min
A5-R 30 sheets/min 27 sheets/min
A6-R 30 sheets/min 27 sheets/min
1-6
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
First Print Time Black and 25 ppm model: 7.0 seconds or less
(A4) White 32 ppm model: 5.9 seconds or less
35 ppm model: 5.1 seconds or less
40 ppm model: 5.1 seconds or less
50 ppm model: 4.3 seconds or less
60 ppm model: 3.8 seconds or less
Color 25 ppm model: 9.2 seconds or less
32 ppm model: 7.7 seconds or less
35 ppm model: 6.5 seconds or less
40 ppm model: 6.5 seconds or less
50 ppm model: 5.4 seconds or less
60 ppm model: 5.1 seconds or less
Resolution 4800 dpi equivalent × 1200 dpi
Operating System Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1,
Windows 10, Windows Server 2008/R2, Windows Server 2012/R2, Mac OS X
v10.5 or later
Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1
(1000 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4, IPSec), 802.3az supported)
Optional Interface (Option): 2 (For IB-50/IB-51 mounting)
Wireless LAN (Option): 1 (For IB-35 mounting)
1-7
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
*1 When using the document processor (Dual Scan DP) (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
*2 Supported Operating Systems: Windows Vista/ Windows Server 2003/ Windows Server 2008/ Windows Server 2008
R2/ Windows 7/ Windows 8/ Windows 8.1/ Windows 10/ Windows Server 2012 /Windows Server 2012 R2
*3 Supported Operating Systems: Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows
8/Windows 8.1/
1-8
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5) Option
(5-1) Document Processor
Items Specifications
Dual Reverse Scan Dual Scan
Type DP-7100 DP-7120 DP-7110
Document feed method Automatic feed
Supported Original Types Sheet originals
Original size Maximum: A3/Ledger (297 × 432 mm) (Long-sized: 297 × 1,900 mm)
Dimensions (W × D × H) 593 × 531 × 138.5 mm / 600 × 502 × 128 mm / 600 × 513 × 170 mm /
23.35" × 20.91" × 5.46" 23.63" × 19.77" × 5.04" 23.63" × 20.20" × 6.70"
Weight Approx. 9 kg / Approx. Approx. 7.5 kg / Approx. Approx. 14.5 kg / Approx.
19.9 lbs. 16.5 lbs. 32.0 lbs.
Paper Size A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216 × 340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Statement, Executive, 12 × 18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2,
Custom 1 to 4 (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)
Supported Paper Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m²
Media types: Plain, Recycled, Material
1-9
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
1-10
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Dimension (W × D × H) 694.8 × 533.1 × 220.5 mm / 27.36" × 20.99" × 8.69" (When pulling the tray)
1-11
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Media type Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Coated,
High Quality, Custom
1-12
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Tray B A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter-
R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K,
ISO B5, Cardstock, Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,Youkei 2: 200 sheets
Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m² or less
Stapling Number of A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Legal, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m²)
sheets to 12×18", Oficio II, 16K-R, 8K 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m²)
limit
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K 70 sheets (52 to 74 g/m²)
65 sheets (75 to 90 g/m²)
55 sheets (91 to 105 g/m²)
2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m²)
Media type Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Prepunched, Thick, Coated,
Custom
1-13
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Folding Bi-Fold A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
possible size
Saddle Stitch A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
Tri-folding A4-R, Letter-R
Media type Bi-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Custom
Saddle Stitch Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Custom
1-14
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1-15
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1-16
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 1-1
1-17
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 1-2
1-18
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(1-2) Connectors/Interior
Figure 1-3
1-19
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 1-4
1-20
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 1-5
1-21
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 1-6
1-22
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
07%
3/$7(1&29(5
7<3((
3+$3+& 3+3+
3+' 3+
')
') %DQQHU*XLGH
-6 3)
')
Figure 1-7
*: If the following option is installed, fall prevention kit must be installed: PF-7100, PF-7110, PF-7120
1-23
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3ULQWLQJ6\VWHP
.H\ERDUG+ROGHU
,%
,%
6RIWZDUHRSWLRQ
,QWHUQHW)$;.LW$
'DWD6HFXULW\.LW(
8* ,%
8*
+'
6FDQ([WHQVLRQ.LW$
86%.H\ERDUG
Figure 1-8
1-24
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(1) Option
(1-1) DP-7110 "Document Processor (Dual Scan)"
DP-7100 "Document Processor (Dual Reverse Scan)
DP-7120 "Document Processor (Dual Reverse Scan) (Option for Low-end model)
PLATEN COVER TYPE E "Original Cover"
Device that scan the originals automatically. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying.
When the document processor is not installed, please use the PLATEN COVER TYPE E.
1-25
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
(1-17) Printing System 15 "Fiery Controller" (Option for 32ppm/ 35ppm/ 40ppm/ 50ppm/
60ppm model)
When the Fiery Controller is installed, the regular print function of a machine can be replaced with the print function of
the Fiery Controller. The Fiery Controller print functions enable a variety of printing features that are not possible on a
regular machine, such as advanced color management that reproduces the true color of the image by reading each
machine's color display method and characteristics at the time of printing.
1-26
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1-27
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Specifications
Module
25 ppm model 32 ppm model 35 ppm model 40 ppm model 50 ppm model 60 ppm model
Cassette 1 CT-8550 (302ND9301_)
Legal paper supportive cassette as maximum size (common)
Cassette 2 CT-8560 (302ND9302_)
SRA3 paper supportive cassette as maximum size (common)
Primary feed PARTS PRIMARY FEED ASSY SP (302ND9421_)
Pickup/feed roller + retard roller system (common)
Conveying, PARTS RIGHT COVER ASSY SP (302ND94740_)
Duplex
Non-stack paper conveying path (common)
Primary transfer TR-8550 (302ND9315_)
Transfer belt + fur brush cleaning system (common)
Secondary PARTS ROLLER SECONDRY TRANSFER ASSY SP (302ND9418_)
transfer
Transfer roller method (common)
Drum DK-8350 (302L793050) DK-8550 (302ND9307_)
OPC drum (diameter 30 mm) a-Si drum (diameter 30 mm)
Developing 100V 100V
DV-8350K(J) (302L79J01_) DV-8550K(J) (302ND9J03_)
DV-8350M(J) (302ND9J02_) DV-8550M(J) (302ND9J04_)
DV-8350C(J) (302L79J03_) DV-8550C(J) (302ND9J05_)
DV-8350Y(J) (302ND9J04_) DV-8550Y(J) (302ND9J06_)
120/220-240V 120/220-240V
DV-8350K (302L79301_) DV-8550K (302ND9303_)
DV-8350M (302ND9302_) DV-8550M (302ND9304_)
DV-8350C (302L79303_) DV-8550C (302ND9305_)
DV-8350Y (302ND9304_) DV-8550Y (302ND9306_)
Dual-component developing Touch down developing
LSU LK-8350 (302L79311_) LK-8550 (302ND9313_)
One polygon motor + 2 beam One polygon motor + +4 beam
Fuser FK-8350 (302L79306_) FK-8550 (302ND9308_)
FK-8585IH (302L79307_):220- FK-8595IH (302ND9309_):220-230V
230V FK-8590IH (302ND9310_):100/120V
FK-8580IH (302L79308_):100/
120V
Sliding IH fuser pressures sys- Sliding IH fuser pressures system (diameter 35 mm)
tem (diameter 30 mm)
1-28
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
1-29
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1-30
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
2 Installation
2-1 Environment
Installation environment
1. Temperature: 50 to 90.5°F (10 to 32.5°C) (But humidity should be 70% or less when the temperature is 90.5°F
(32.5°C).)
2. Humidity: 10 to 80%(But the temperature should be 86°F (30°C) or less when humidity is 80%.)
3. Power Source: AC100V50/60Hz15A or more
AC110V60Hz15A or more
AC120V60Hz12A or more
AC220 to 240V50Hz7.2A or more
Installation location
The operative environmental conditions are as follows:
It might be difficult to maintain the image quality depending on surrounding environmental conditions such as outside air.
Therefore, the following conditions are recommended to operate the machines as follows: Humidity: 36 to 65% Temper-
ature: 60.8 to 80.6°F or less (16 to 27°C).
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight
Avoid locations with vibrations
Avoid locations with rapid temperature/humidity fluctuations
Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air
Avoid poorly ventilated locations
In the case of flooring materials where the installation site is susceptible to damage, there might be the possibility to
damage the flooring materials when installing / moving this product.
While this product is in use, there are some ozone generation and chemical substance emission, however, the amount is
a level that does not affect the human body.
If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely
large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is
suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
Installation space
400 mm
(15-3/4")
2-1
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
*: Initial setting time: approx. 2 minutes for high-end model, approx. 6 minutes for low-end model
Also, do not execute the maintenance mode during the initial setting.
2-2
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1
10
8
12
5 7
2 3
6
11
13
4 4
4
14 15
4 17 15 17
16
17 17
Figure 2-2
2-3
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
12
9 10
14
11
8
15
13
15
15
1
16
7
5 6
3 4
2
Figure 2-3
1. Main unit 7. Main unit cover 13. Front right upper pad
2. Outer case 8. Size label 14. Rear right upper pad
3. Left bottom pad 9. Screw 15. Support plate
4. Right bottom pad 10. Pins 16. Screw
5. Front of the inner frame 11. Front left upper pad
6. Rear of the inner frame 12. Rear left upper pad
2-4
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
12
9 10
14
11
8
15 13
15
15 1
16
7
5 6
3 4
2
Figure 2-4
1. Main unit 7. Main unit cover 13. Front right upper pad
2. Outer case 8. Size label 14. Rear right upper pad
3. Left bottom pad 9. Screw 15. Support plate
4. Right bottom pad 10. Pins 16. Screw
5. Front of the inner frame 11. Front left upper pad
6. Rear of the inner frame 12. Rear left upper pad
2-5
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
16
17
18
13
11
19
10
20
9 21
22
8 15 23
14 24 6
5
9
4
3 12
Figure 2-5
2-6
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
16
17
18
7
12 13 14 15 9
11
8
6 10
5
4
Figure 2-6
1. Outer case 8. Rear left upper pad 15. Hinge cover right
2. Rear bottom pad 9. Rear right upper pad 16. Label
3. Front bottom pad 10. Front left upper pad 17. Screw
4. Document Processor 11. Front right upper pad 18. Screw
5. Vinyl sheet 12. DP cable cover front
6. Original mat holder 13. DP cable cover rear
7. Original mat 14. Hinge cover left
2-7
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
10 10
16
10 10 17
11
18
12
19 20 21 15 13
14
8 4 3
7
Figure 2-7
2-8
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7 15
12 13 14 9
11
8
6 10
5
4
Figure 2-8
1. Outer case 6. Original mat holder 11. Front right upper pad
2. Rear bottom pad 7. Original mat 12. DP cable cover front
3. Front bottom pad 8. Rear left upper pad 13. DP cable cover rear
4. Document Processor 9. Rear right upper pad 14. Hinge cover
5. Vinyl sheet 10. Front left upper pad 15. Label
2-9
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
11
7
10
6
5
4
3
2
1
Figure 2-9
2-10
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
4
6 18
19
16 17 15
14
5
20 11
20 20 13
1 12
3
20
20 2 20
Figure 2-10
2-11
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
4
20 21
14
16 17 18 19
12
15
13
22 9
22 22
11
10
1 3
22
22 2 22
Figure 2-11
2-12
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
10
12
8
9
7
4 5
5 4
Figure 2-12
2-13
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
11
20
10
21
9 16
22 8 15
19 18 7
6
5
14
17 13
Figure 2-13
2-14
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-14
2-15
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
10
5 4
3 1
Figure 2-15
2-16
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-16
*: When carrying the paper feeder (PF-7100/7110), please hold the specified position with two persons.
Figure 2-17
2-17
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 a
2 b c
Figure 2-18
2-18
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1. Pull cassette 1 and 2 out. Remove the lift plate stopper from each cassette and attach it to the storage location.
*: When moving the machine, attach the lift plate stopper in original position.
Cassette 1
Figure 2-19
Cassette 2
Figure 2-20
2-19
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Slide the sub tray (a) and insert two protrusions (b) into two apertures (c) on the inner tray.
2. Insert the rib (d) into the aperture (e) of the inner tray and push it in until it locks.
*: Lift up the sub tray (a) to check it does not come off.
b c
a
d e
Figure 2-21
Figure 2-22
2-20
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
*: In case if the optional paper feeder is not installed, attach the bundled right lower cover as shown below.
Procedures
1. Insert two protrusions (b) of the right lower cover (a) into the holes at the machine front side.
2. Insert the hook (c) to fix it.
c
a
b
Figure 2-23
2-21
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
+8%
Figure 2-24
2-22
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-25
1. Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector located on the rear side of the main unit.
+8%
Figure 2-26
2-23
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a. Modular jack
a
+8%
Figure 2-27
ADSL
Connect a cord between the LINE connector of the main unit and the PHONE port of the splitter.
a. Modular jack d
b. ADSL modem
c. Splitter (PHONE port)
d. PC b
a c +8%
Figure 2-28
ISDN
Connect a cord between the LINE connector of the main unit and the analog port of the terminal adapter.
a. Modular jack
c
b. Terminal adapter
(Analog port)
c. PC
a
b +8%
Figure 2-29
2-24
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a. Modular jack d
b. Modular jack (Phone)
c. Commercially available telephone
d. Modular jack (line2) *1
a
*1 when two FAX kits are installed
b
c
Figure 2-30
2-25
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(11)Loading Paper
(11-1) Precaution for Loading Paper
Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it in the procedures below.
Figure 2-31
Fan the paper and align the edges at the flat place.
In addition, note the following points.
• Such paper may cause a jam.
• If paper is left under high temperature and high humidity after taking it out of the package, it may cause trouble with
paper absorbing moisture. After setting paper in the cassette, seal the rest of the paper in the paper storage bag.
Also, seal the paper remaining on the MP tray in the paper storage bag.
• If paper is left in the cassette for a long period, heat from the cassette heater may discolor it.
• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cas-
settes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
IMPORTANT
If you reuse paper already used for printing, remove staples or clips. Do not use paper with a staple or clip. This may
cause poor image quality or malfunctions.
2-26
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-32
NOTE
Please do not pull out multiple cassettes at same time.
Figure 2-33
2-27
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
NOTE
Please move the paper length guide to the left edge and then push it down in case to use Legal paper in Cassette 1
and 12x18" paper in Cassette 2.
Figure 2-34
Figure 2-35
NOTE
Adjust the paper size guide in case if using SRA3, A3 or Leger paper in Cassette 2.
Figure 2-36
2-28
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4. Load paper.
Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to align the edges.
Load the paper in the cassette after aligning its edges.
Figure 2-37
Note
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it. (Refer to 2-26)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Such paper may cause paper jams.
• Make sure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see the illustration above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guides to the paper size to use, the
paper may skew or become jammed.
5. Check the paper length guide and paper width guide are securely aligned to the paper.
Re-align the paper length guide or paper width guide if gaps are observed.
Figure 2-38
2-29
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6. Gently insert the cassette all the way into the main unit.
Figure 2-39
Figure 2-40
2-30
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 2-41
Figure 2-42
3. In case to use the Envelope over the size of Envelope C5 (Width: 162mm), expand the lever of the envelope feed
guide.
Figure 2-43
2-31
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-44
Figure 2-45
Figure 2-46
2-32
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 2-47
8. Check the paper length guide and paper width guide are securely aligned to the paper.
*: Re-align the paper length guide or paper width guide if gaps are observed.
Figure 2-48
9. Gently insert the cassette all the way into the main unit.
Figure 2-49
2-33
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-50
2. Load paper.
Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to align the edges.
Load the paper in the cassette after aligning its edges.
Figure 2-51
Note
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it. (Refer to 2-26)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Such paper may cause paper jams.
• Make sure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see the illustration above).
2-34
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-52
Figure 2-53
2-35
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-54
2. Load paper.
1.Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to align the edges.
2.Load the paper in the cassette after aligning its edges.
Figure 2-55
Note
• Load the paper with the print side face down.
• Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it. (Refer to 2-26)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Such paper may cause paper jams.
• Make sure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see the illustration above).
2-36
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-56
Figure 2-57
2-37
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 2-58
ON
a b
Figure 2-59
2-38
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Set up 4 color toner containers of C, M, Y, and K. The procedures are same for all colors.
The following procedure is an example for Yellow toner container.
Figure 2-60
Figure 2-61
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the part of dotted line by hands.
Figure 2-62
2-39
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5~ 5~
Figure 2-63
5~ 5~
5~
Figure 2-64
CLICK!
Figure 2-65
Figure 2-66
2-40
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-67
2-41
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(15)Default Setting
The Machine Setup Wizard is launched when the main unit is turned on for the first time after the installation and pos-
sible to set necessary items. Also, it is possible to set from System Menu as shown below.
Items Description
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from
the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for
summer time.
Date/Time Set the date and time of the installation location. If you perform Send as E-
mail, the date and time set in the main unit will be displayed on the header of
the mail.
Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23),
Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in
A.D. (20XX)
Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day
2-42
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Setting procedures
1. Select [System Menu/Counter] key or [System
Menu] key > [System/Network] > [Network] >
[TCP/IP Setting] > [Wired Network Settings] >
[TCP/IP Setting].
2. Select [IPv4] for setting.
3. Restart the network from System Menu, or turn off the power, wait at least 5 seconds and turn on the power SW.
*: The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
2-43
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(16)Installing Software
Install appropriate software in your PC from the bundled DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of
this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC. (See the Operation
Guide supplied with the main unit)
Select maintenance mode U952 > [Execute] > [HIGH ALTITUDE] to execute the procedures below
Low-end model
Procedures
1. maintenance mode U140 > [Altitude Adjustment]
Select the altitude range of [1001 to 2000m], [2001 to 3000m] or [3001 to 3500m].
High-end model
Procedures
1. maintenance mode U140 > [Altitude Adjustment]
Select the altitude range of [1001 to 2000m], [2001 to 3000m] or [3001 to 3500m].
2-44
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(18)Image adjustment
Execute the image adjustment in maintenance mode U952 (Maintenance mode workflow)
1. Input "10871087" using the numeric keys to enter the maintenance mode.
2. Input "952" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
3. Select [Execute].
4. Select [Setup] to adjust the main unit and [EH Setup] to adjust the optional units.
5. Select the displayed maintenance modes from the top and press the [Start] key to enter the maintenance mode.
6. After transition, execute the following setting steps in the maintenance mode.
7. After executing, press the [Stop] key to go back to the original flow.
8. Repeat step 5, 6 and 7 and terminate the workflow.
*: When not executing U952, enter the maintenance modes with the numeric keys in the following order to execute
each setting.
Figure 2-69
4.Press the [Start] key.
* :The 1st auto adjustment is executed.
2-45
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-70
2-46
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-71
IMPORTANT
After turning off the power switch, do not turn on the power switch again immediately. Wait 5 seconds or more, and
then turn on the power switch.
2-47
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b c
a
b
Figure 2-72
4. Install an SD/SDHC memory card (a) in the memory card slot (b).
SW
b
a
Figure 2-73
5. Reattach the covers.
2-48
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Figure 2-74
IMPORTANT
Check two gaskets (b) are affixed to the hard disk mounting plate (a) before installing it.
Figure 2-75
2-49
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3. Connect two connectors (a) of the cables to the hard disk (e).
4. Latch two hooks (b) on the aperture (c) and attach the hard disk (e) with four screws (d)(M3x8).
c
b b
a
d
d
d
e
d
Figure 2-76
2-50
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5. Connect two connectors (a) of the hard disk to two connectors (b) of the main PWB.
6. Fix the wire (c) with two wire saddle (d) and four wire stopper (d).
b
a
b
a
d
e
c
d
Figure 2-77
*: When an optional HDD is installed into the main unit for the first time, it must be formatted before use.
Formatting will delete all existing data on the HDD.
2-51
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Turn off the main unit and disconnect the power cord and all interface cables.
2. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and then remove the option slot cover (b).
Figure 2-78
3. Insert the PWB unit (b) straight into the option slot (c).
4. Secure the PWB unit (b) with two screws (a) (M3x8) once removed.
a
a
b
Figure 2-79
2-52
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Figure 2-80
Procedures
1. Turn off the main unit and disconnect the power cord and all interface cables.
2. Remove a screw (a)(M3x10) and then remove the rear upper cover (b) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-81
2-53
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-82
6. Insert the FPC (b) of the PWB unit (a) into the aperture (c) of the shield box.
7. Connect the connector (d) to the connector (f) of the main PWB (e).
d
f
Figure 2-83
2-54
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Figure 2-84
9. Reattach the DP rear cover (b) with two screws (a) (M3x8).
Figure 2-85
2-55
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
10. Latch seven hooks (b) and attach the upper rear cover (a) with the screw (c)(M3x10).
Figure 2-86
2-56
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-87
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Remove the right cover (a).
3. Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).
4. Detach the right upper cover (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
Figure 2-88
5. Insert two nuts in the back side of the right upper cover (a).
6. Attach the tray stay (d) to the right upper cover (a) with two screws (c)(M4×14).
b b
a
b
c
a
Figure 2-89
2-57
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7. Reattach the right upper cover to the original position in the main unit.
Figure 2-90
8. Insert the mounting plate (a) into the tray stay (B) and secure it with two screws (C) (M4×8).
c
a
c b
Figure 2-91
2-58
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9. Attach the tray cover (b) to the tray stay (c) with four screws (a)(M4×8).
a
c
Figure 2-92
B B
A
B B
b
b
Figure 2-93
2-59
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
12. Affix the two sheet (b) on the document table (a).
b
A
A
B
B A
B
B
Figure 2-94
2-60
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-95
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Remove the screw (b)(M3x8) from the operation unit (a).
3. Release two hooks (c), and then remove the operation unit lid (d) in the direction of the arrow.
a c d
Figure 2-96
4. Connect the connector (b) of the numeric keypad (a) to the connector (c) of the operation unit.
b
a
Figure 2-97
2-61
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5. Latch two hooks (b) on the cut-out (c) of the operation unit, and then attach the numeric keypad (a) with two screws
(d) (M3x8).
a
c
a d
d
Figure 2-98
6. Slid the cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and latch two hooks (b), and secure the screw (c)(M3x8) once
removed in step 2.
b a c
Figure 2-99
7. Affix the label (b) on the numeric keypad (a). (Except 120v model)
Figure 2-100
2-62
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 2-101
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Pull up the operation unit (a).
3. Insert a finger into the aperture (c) of the ISU front right cover (b) to pull it toward you and remove four lower hooks
(d). Unlatch six upper hooks (e) in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
2
a
d
Figure 2-102
2-63
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
c a
b
d
c
Figure 2-103
7. Affix two Hook-and-loop fastener to the ID card reader (a) and the holder part of the main unit (b).
*: The mounting procedure differs depending type of ID card readers.
Type A
Thicker and in the same size as its holder:
Figure 2-104
2-64
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Type B
Thicker but smaller than its holder:
b
Figure 2-105
Type C
Thinner and in the same size as its holder:
b
Figure 2-106
2-65
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Approx. 30mm
c
a 5㹼10mm
d
c
b
Figure 2-107
2-66
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8. Connect the USB connector (b) to the USB interface slot (c).
9. Bundle the surplus length of the cable (d) and hook it on the hook (e) of the main unit.
c
e b
d
a
Figure 2-108
10. Insert the exit upper cover (b) from the back side of the machine and secure it in the original position with the screw
(a) (M3X8).
*: Align the upper exit cover (b) to the machine front side and secure the screw.
b
2
Figure 2-109
11. Affix a label (c) on the ISU front right cover (b) aligning it with the positioning mark (a).
b
a
c
Figure 2-110
2-67
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
12. Attach the ID card reader cover. Latch six upper hooks (b) and rotate it and four latch lower hooks (e), and reattach
the ISU front right cover in the original position.
Figure 2-111
2-68
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Fix the upper keyboard mounting bracket onto the lower keyboard mounting bracket with the four screws
(a)(M3x8).
*: Attach it according to the position of the engraved mark B.
a
a
a
a
c
Figure 2-113
2-69
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
Figure 2-114
d c
d
Figure 2-115
2-70
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
2
a
d
Figure 2-116
2-71
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c a
b
d
c
Figure 2-117
13. Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).
14. Release the hook (c) with a flat-blade screwdriver (b), and then remove the keyboard cover (d) by sliding it.
a
d
Figure 2-118
2-72
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
15. Pass the arm of attaching keyboard mounting bracket (a) through the machine aperture (b) and latch the hook (c)
to the aperture (d). Secure the keyboard mounting bracket (a) with two screws (e)(M4×8).
e e
a
c
b d
Figure 2-119
16. Secure the lower keyboard mounting bracket (a) with two screws (b)(M4x8).
b
b
a
Figure 2-120
2-73
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
17. Latch the hook (b) of the lower lid (a) in the hole (c) of the lower keyboard mounting plate and secure it with the
screw (d) (M3x8, black).
*: Attach it while the hooks come to the punch mark B.
b c b
a
d
Figure 2-121
18. Insert two positioning pins (b) of lower keyboard cover (a) into the holes (d) of the upper keyboard mounting plate
(c) and slide it to the rear.
19. Insert the lower keyboard cover (a) into three hooks (e) on the keyboard mounting plate (a) and two cutouts (f).
f
e
a
c d
b
Figure 2-122
2-74
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
20. Fix the lower keyboard mounting bracket (b) onto the upper keyboard mounting bracket (c) with two screws
(a)(M3x8 P-tite).
c
b
Figure 2-123
21. Insert the upper keyboard cover (a) into the upper keyboard mounting plate (b) to attach it.
Figure 2-124
2-75
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
22. Fix the Upper lid (b) to the lower keyboard mounting bracket (C) with the screw (a)(M3x8 Black).
b a
c
Figure 2-125
23. Affix a pair of hook-and-loop fasteners (c) to the concave (b) of the upper keyboard cover (a).
Figure 2-126
24. Place the keyboard (a) on the hook-and-loop fastener(b) and press it to fix.
2-76
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
25. Connect the USB cable (c) with the USB connector (d) on the main unit.
d
c
a b
Figure 2-127
26. Bundle the surplus length of the cable (a) and hook it on the hook (b) of the main unit.
b
Figure 2-128
2-77
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Note
In case the card reader (a) is already installed, remove the USB wire (b) of the card reader from the hook (c) of the main
unit. Bundle two of the excess USB wires and hook them on the hook (c) of the main unit again.
c
b
Figure 2-129
27. Push the USB cable (a) to between the ribs of main unit and secure it.
b a
b
Figure 2-130
2-78
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
28. Insert the upper exit cover (b) in the direction of the arrow and secure it in the original position with the screw
(a)(M3×8).
*: Align the cover to the machine front side and secure the screw.
b
2
Figure 2-131
29. Latch six upper hooks (b) and rotate it and four latch lower hooks (e), and reattach the ISU front right cover in the
original position.
Figure 2-132
30. Lift up the left side of ISU rear cover (a) and secure the left ISU cover (c) in original position with two screws
(d)(M3×8).
2-79
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
31. Reattach the screw (b)(M3×8) of the ISU rear cover (a).
d c
d
Figure 2-133
32. Latch two hooks (c) and reattach the left rear cover (b) in the original position with two screws (a) (M3x8).
b
c
Figure 2-134
2-80
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 2-135
Bundled parts of Document table DT-730(B) (1902LC0UN2_)
• Tray stay1 pc
• Tray mounting plate1 pc
• Tray cover1 pc
• Tray lower cover1 pc
• Tray fixing plate1 pc
• Sheet*12 pc
• Pin2 pc
• Nut M42 pc
• Screw (M4x8 screw with the binding head)7 pc
• Screw (M4x14 screw with the binding head)2 pc
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Remove the right cover (a).
3. Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).
4. Detach the right upper cover (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
Figure 2-136
2-81
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5. Insert two nuts in the back side of the right upper cover (a).
6. Attach the tray stay (d) to the right upper cover (a) with two screws (c)(M4×14).
b b
a
b
c
a
Figure 2-137
7. Reattach the right upper cover to the original position in the main unit.
Figure 2-138
2-82
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8. Insert the mounting plate (a) into the tray stay (B) and secure it with two screws (C) (M4×8).
c
a
c b
Figure 2-139
9. Attach the tray cover (b) to the tray stay (c) with four screws (a)(M4×8).
a
Figure 2-140
2-83
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
10. Remove two pins (b) and two nuts (c) from the handset mounting plate (a).
11. Secure the original tray (d) with two pins and two nuts once removed.
b
b
A
A
B
A A
a B
A
B
c
d
c
Figure 2-141
12. Put two catches (c) at the backside of the handset holder (b) into two pins (a) and slide it toward you to fix it on the
document tray (d).
B
A
b A
A
B
A B
A
B
a B
Figure 2-142
2-84
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
13. Cut the separator cover (b) of the tray lower cover (a) with nippers (C), etc.
a
Figure 2-143
A A
B B
A A
B B
b
b
Figure 2-144
16. Affix the sheet (b) on the left side of document table (a).
a
b
A
A
B
B A
A
B
B
Figure 2-145
2-85
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
17. Connect the telephone wire (a) to the handset (b) and handset holder (c).
B
A
Figure 2-146
18. Connect the modular cord (a) to the handset holder (b).
Figure 2-147
19. Connect one end of the connector (b) of the modular cord (a) to the machine right side (c).
a b
c
Figure 2-148
2-86
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(11)Cassette heater
(11-1) In the case of main unit cassette
Figure 2-149
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3. Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
c
a
Figure 2-150
4. Turn over the lower cassette (a).
5. Secure the heater cover (c) included in the cassette heater set package at the bottom of the cassette with five
screws (b)(M3×8 P tight).
b
b
b
b
b
c a
Figure 2-151
2-87
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
6. Insert the cassette heater (a) and put two protrusions (b) in two apertures (c) of the rear side plate.
7. Attach it with the screw (e) (M3×8) to the base (d).
b
e
b
d
Figure 2-152
8. Connect the heater connector (a) to the main unit side connector (b).
9. Put the cable (c) into the rib of the heater holder (d) and fix it.
b
ac
d
Figure 2-153
IMPORTANT
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this case, exe-
cute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .
2-88
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-154
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3. Pull out the lower cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-155
2-89
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
4. Secure the cassette heater (a) to the base with two screws (b) (M3x8).
5. Connect the heater connector (c) to the main unit side connector and secure the wire with four wire saddles (d).
*: Make sure the wire does not float.
c b
d b
Figure 2-156
Figure 2-157
IMPORTANT
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this case, exe-
cute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .
2-90
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-158
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (e) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3. Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the main unit (e) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
4. Pull out the right paper deck (c) and left paper deck (d) from the paper feeder (f).
a e
b
G
c f
Figure 2-159
2-91
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
5. Secure the cassette heater (a) to the base with two screws (b) (M3x8).
6. Connect the heater connector (c) to the main unit side connector and secure the wire with four wire saddles (d).
7. Make sure the wire does not float.
b
c
b
Figure 2-160
8. Affix the caution label (a) on the groove of the base.
Figure 2-161
IMPORTANT
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this case, exe-
cute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .
2-92
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-162
Procedures
(Side Paper Feeder side)
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Remove the connector of the paper feeder at the main unit side.
3. Remove four screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the rear cover (b).
a
a
a
Figure 2-163
4. Pull out the cassette (a),
a
Figure 2-164
2-93
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5. Release four bosses (a) and remove the right cover (b) while sliding it in the direction of the arrow.
b a
a
a
Figure 2-165
de
a
d
e
b
f
c
Figure 2-166
2-94
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8. Connect the connector (b) of cassette heater wire (a) to the connector (c) of the inlet cable.
9. Attach two wire saddles (d) and the edge saddles (e) and secure the wire.
10. Attach the right cover and the rear cover.
e
c
a
d
Figure 2-167
11. Remove two screws (a)(M3×8) and remove the cover plate (c) from the main unit side paper feeder (b).
a
c
Figure 2-168
2-95
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
12. Connect the connector (b) of the heater outlet set (a) to the paper feeder side connector (c).
13. Attach to the heater outlet set (a) with two screws (d)(M3×8).
d
a
Figure 2-169
14. Connect the side feeder (a) to the main unit side paper feeder (b) with the AC cord (c) and the connector wire (d).
a b
Figure 2-170
15. Reattach the parts in the original position.
16. Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U327 (Cassette heater On/Off) to [Mode1].
IMPORTANT
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this case, exe-
cute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .
2-96
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Attach the vender base (b) to coin vender (c) with four screws (a)(M4x6).
c
b
a
Figure 2-171
a
b a
Figure 2-172
2-97
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
e
a
b
c
Figure 2-173
9. Secure the vendor relay cable (b) at a cable stopper (a) which was removed.
Figure 2-174
10. Remove the screw (a) and attach the ground terminal (b) of the vendor cable.
a
a
Figure 2-175
2-98
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 2-176
13. Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U206 (Coin vendor setting: On/Off Config) to [ON].
2-99
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Attach the vender base (b) to coin vender (c) with four screws (a)(M4x6).
c
b
a
Figure 2-177
3. Remove a screw (a)(M3x10) and then remove the rear upper cover (b) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-178
2-100
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
d 3
Figure 2-179
c
Figure 2-180
2-101
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
d
e
d d
b
b
Figure 2-181
2-102
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
13. Lift up three hooks (c) and release them. Then remove the lower left cover (b).
c
b
c c c
a
a
b
a
Figure 2-182
14. Remove two screws (a) and remove the concealing lid (b).
a
b a
Figure 2-183
15. Pass the vendor wire (a) through the aperture (b).
2-103
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
16. Secure the vendor cable (a) with two screws (c) once removed in step 5.
a
b
c
Figure 2-184
17. Remove one screw (a) and attach to the earth terminal (b) of the vendor wire.
a
a
Figure 2-185
2-104
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
18. Connect the connector (b) of the vendor relay wire (a) to the connector (d) (YC21) of the engine PWB (c).
a b
d
YC1 YC29
YC36
YC16 YS1 YC38
YC43
YC6
YC35
YC42
YC31
YC40
YC39 YC23
YC33
Figure 2-186
19. Pass the vendor relay wire (a) through the wire saddle (b) and the edge saddle (c).
Figure 2-187
2-105
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
20. Remove four wire stoppers (a) and then fix the vendor relay wire (b).
21. Connect the connector (c) of the vendor relay wire to the vendor wire (d).
c a
Figure 2-188
22. Remove wire stopper (a) and then fix the vendor relay wire (b).
Figure 2-189
2-106
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
28. Connect the signal wire (a) of the coin vendor to the connector (b) of the vendor wire.
Figure 2-190
29. Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U206 (Coin vendor setting: On/Off Config) to [ON].
2-107
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(13)Banner Tray
Figure 2-191
Procedures
1. Attach the paper guide A (b), the paper guide B (c) and the paper guide C (d) to the tray base (a).
d
b
c
Figure 2-192
a
Figure 2-193
2-108
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-194
4. Put the banner tray (a) on the MP tray (b) and attach sliding in the direction of the arrow till locking.
b
Figure 2-195
2-109
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Procedures
1. Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x8).
2. After removing front side rib (c) and then remove the upper right cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-196
3. Remove a screw (a)(M3x10) and then remove the rear upper cover (b) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-197
2-110
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
c
b
Figure 2-198
7. Cut the split cover (b) of the upper right cover (a) with the nipper (c) etc.
b
a
Figure 2-199
2-111
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 2-200
9. Pass the key counter wire (c) from the opening (b) of the right upper cover (a).
b a
Figure 2-201
2-112
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
10. Pass the key counter wire (a) through the wire guide (b) and reattach the right upper cover (c) to the original posi-
tion.
11. Pull out the key counter wire (a) without slack, and fix it at the wire saddle (d) in 5 positions.
b a
c
Figure 2-202
12. Pass the key counter wire (a) through the opening (b) of the shield box and fix it at the wire saddle (c) in 4 posi-
tions.
2-113
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
13. Connect the connector of the key counter wire (a) to the connector (f) (YC22) of the engine PWB (e).
c
f
d
a
YC1 YC29
YC36
YC16 YS1 YC38
YC43
YC6
YC35
YC42
YC31
YC40
YC39 YC23
YC33
Figure 2-203
14. Reattach the parts in the original position.
2-114
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
application
Data Security Kit Internet FAX kit
*: Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the
application.
*: If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. Login
with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Items
Function
License
Trial Counts
Date of Trial
Status
2-115
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7. After completing installation, execute communication test to check if FAX normally operates.
IMPORTANT
Note the following points when installing the FAX system in the line via ISDN or PBX.
Check if the line to connect supports the V.34 (Super G3) FAX communication.
Especially, when communicating between extensions in PBX (private line via TDM), only 14400bps or 9600bps of
FAX communication speed is guaranteed and communication errors or TX/RX image failure may occur at V.34 com-
munication in such a line.
Corrective Measures
Set the following maintenance mode if the communication speed guaranteed on the line is 14400bps.
(Refer toP.6-267) U633 [Enables or disables the V.34 communication]: Off
(Refer toP.6-262) U630 [Setting TX speed and RX speed]
2-116
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3 Machine Design
3-1 Mechanical Configuration
(1) Cross-section view (Low-end model)
11
7 6 8
10
12
5 3
2
Figure 3-1
3-1
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
11
7 6 8
10
12
5 3
2
Figure 3-2
3-2
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Paper path 2
Figure 3-3
2 3 1
Paper path
Figure 3-4
3-3
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Paper path
Figure 3-5
3-4
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Original path
Figure 3-6
2 1
Original path
Figure 3-7
3-5
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Original path
Figure 3-8
Paper path
Figure 3-9
3-6
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Paper path
Figure 3-10
3-7
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4 2 1
Paper path
Figure 3-11
3-8
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Paper path
Figure 3-12
3-9
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Paper path
Figure 3-13
3-10
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4 3 2
Paper path
Figure 3-14
3-11
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Paper path
Figure 3-15
3-12
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
U
L
T
A
H
I
C
Figure 3-16
3-13
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
M
K
Q
J 66xx J
O
O O U
P
H
O
T F
A
H
B
R
I
E C
Figure 3-17
3-14
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
N N
N U
N
H
T
A H
I
E C
Figure 3-18
3-15
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-19
3-16
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-20
3-17
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-21
Figure 3-22
3-18
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-23
Figure 3-24
Figure 3-25
3-19
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
(2-6) IH PWB
Controlling IH
Figure 3-26
Figure 3-27
Figure 3-28
3-20
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9
19
18
17
16
12
Drum unit Laser scanner unit 13
24 14 28 15 1
23 26
22 8 2
21 Main unit
30
Fuser unit
IH unit
27 3
10
11 29
25 7
4
20 31
Figure 3-29
3-21
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1. Main PWB ............................................. Controlling the entire software to control the interface to the PC
and network and image data process, etc. Controlling the entire
hardware to control operation section.
2. Engine PWB.......................................... Controlling the hardware such as electric parts drive, high volt-
age, bias output, image scanner unit, paper conveying, fuser tem-
perature, etc.
3. Feed image PWB.................................. Consisting of the engine PWB and wiring relay circuit for drum
units, developer units, fuser drive section and exit drive section.
4. Feed drive PWB.................................... Consisting of the engine PWB, and relay circuit for the paper feed
drive section and paper conveying drive section.
5. Main high-voltage PWB ........................ Generating the main charger bias and the developer bias.
6. Low voltage PWB.................................. Rectifying the AC power input to the full-wave and converting it to
DC.
7. Transfer connect PWB .......................... Consisting of the feed image PWB and wiring relay circuit for the
transfer PWB.
8. Transfer high-voltage PWB ................... Generating the transfer bias, separation bias and transfer clean-
ing bias.
9. Transfer PWB........................................ Storing the drum unique data in an EEPROM. Wiring connection
PWB for the belt cleaning motor, belt thermistor and feed image
PWB.
10. Operation panel main PWB .................. It consists of the main PWB and wiring relay circuit for the opera-
tion panel sub PWB and the LCD.
11. Operation panel sub PWB .................... Consisting of the LED indicator and the key switches.
12. APC PWB ............................................. Emitting and controlling the laser beam.
13. PD PWB................................................ Controlling the synchronous lateral laser beam.
14. LED PWB.............................................. Controlling the LED.
15. CCD PWB ............................................. Scanning the original image.
16. Developer PWB K ................................. Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
17. Developer PWB M ................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
18. Developer PWB C................................. Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
19. Developer PWB Y ................................. Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
20. Drum/Developer relay PWB.................. Consisting of the feed image PWB, the drum and wiring relay cir-
cuit with developer unit.
21. Drum PWB K......................................... Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
22. Drum PWB M ........................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
23. Drum PWB C ........................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
24. Drum PWB Y......................................... Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
25. Fuser PWB............................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit. Storing the
drum unique data in an EEPROM.
26. IH PWB ................................................. Controlling IH
27. NFC PWB ............................................. Antenna circuit for wireless communication.
28. RFID PWB ............................................ Reading the toner container information.
29. USB hub PWB ...................................... USB slot distribution.
30. KUIO relay PWB ................................... Consisting of the main PWB and wiring relay circuit for FAX PWB.
31. Fuser high voltage PWB ....................... Discharging the fuser heater belt.
3-22
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-23
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
31 PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE FUSER
Fuser high voltage PWB 302ND9469_
SP
3-24
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Developer unit 26 25 24 23
Primary transfer unit
31
41
Drum unit Laser scanner unit
Fuser unit 29 30 69 68 15 67 66 14
IH unit
34
46
47
48
55
Main unit
53
45
59
60 27 11
33 44 43 49 52
51 28 32
58 50
35 62 40 16
7 9
54 4
64 21
17 56
38
65 1
8 3
42 12
61
Figure 3-30
3-25
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-26
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
52. Upper exit full sensor ............................ Detecting the paper-full on the inner tray.
53. JS sensor .............................................. Detecting the paper-full on the job separator or attachment kit.
54. Front cover sensor ................................ Detecting opening/closing of the front cover.
55. Original size timing sensor.................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
56. PF switch .............................................. Detecting the paper feeder.
57. Main Power Switch ............................... Main Power Switch
58. Power switch......................................... Turning on and off the main/engine PWB, the engine relay PWB
and the operation panel PWB, etc.
59. Conveying open/close sensor............... Detecting opening/closing of the conveying section.
60. Waste toner full sensor ......................... Detecting the waste toner box full.
61. Right cover switch................................. Blocking the 24 V power line when the right cover is open and
reset interlock switch.
62. Temperature/humidity sensor................ Detecting the temperature and humidity outside the main unit.
63. MP position sensor ............................... Detecting the MP lift plate position
64. Cassette sensor 1 ................................. Detecting the cassette 1.
65. Cassette sensor 2 ................................. Detecting the cassette 2.
66. Toner motor rotation sensor K............... Detecting toner motor K rotation
67. Toner motor rotation sensor M .............. Detecting toner motor M rotation
68. Toner motor rotation sensor C .............. Detecting toner motor C rotation
69. Toner motor rotation sensor Y............... Detecting toner motor Y rotation
3-27
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-28
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
36 PARTS PWB RETARD SENSOR ASSY
Retard sensor 1 302ND9432_
SP
37 PARTS PWB RETARD SENSOR ASSY
Retard sensor 2 302ND9432_
SP
38 Lift upper limit sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
39 Lift upper limit sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
40 Registration sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9404_
41 LSU thermistor LK-8350 302L79311_
42 Weight sensor PARTS WTB UNIT SP 302ND9422_
43 Fuser sensor FK-8350 302L79306_
44 Fuser pressure release sensor FK-8350 302L79306_
45 FK-8585IH 302L79307_
IH position sensor
FK-8580IH 302L79308_
46 Fuser thermistor 1 (middle) FK-8350 302L79306_
47 Fuser thermistor 2 (center) FK-8350 302L79306_
48 Fuser thermistor 3 (edge) FK-8350 302L79306_
49 Fuser thermistor 4 (press) FK-8350 302L79306_
50 Exit reversing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
51 Lower exit full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
52 Upper exit full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
53 JS sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
54 Front cover sensor SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
55 Original size timing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
56 PF switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716_
57 Main Power Switch SW.SEESAW 7SC020403+++H01
58 Power switch PWB SWITCH ASSY 302NG0110_
59 Conveying open/close sensor SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
60 Waste toner full sensor DR-8350 302L79312_
61 Right cover switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716_
62 Temperature/humidity sensor PARTS PWB ASSY THERMISTOR SP 302M29413_
63 MP position sensor SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
64 Cassette sensor 1 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
65 Cassette sensor 2 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
66 Toner motor rotation sensor K PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP 302L79407_
67 Toner motor rotation sensor M PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP 302L79407_
68 Toner motor rotation sensor C PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP 302L79407_
69 Toner motor rotation sensor Y PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP 302L79407_
3-29
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
(3-5) Motors
22 21
Developer unit 23 Primary transfer unit
24
3
11 12
10 8
9 19
Fuser unit 29
IH unit Main unit 47
1
2
48 42
14 25
40 46 31
39 6
28 26
27 18
38 13
43 41
44 17
45
35 34 33 32 37 7 30 20 16 15 36
Figure 3-31
3-30
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-31
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-32
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
32 Developer fan motor K FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401_
33 Developer fan motor M FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401_
34 Developer fan motor C FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401_
35 Developer fan motor Y FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401_
36 PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 ASSY
Fuser edge fan motor 302ND9458_
SP
37 Power source fan motor PARTS FAN MOTOR SP 302K09430_
38 Exit/IH front fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459_
39 Exit/IH middle fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459_
40 Exit/IH rear fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459_
41 Container right fan motor FAN LSU 60-25 302GR4408_
42 Exit fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 15 SP 302ND9460_
43 Vibration motor K PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP 302L79407_
44 Vibration motor M PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP 302L79407_
45 Vibration motor C PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP 302L79407_
46 Vibration motor Y PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP 302L79407_
47 Rear exit motor PARTS MOTOR SWITCHBACK SP 302ND9449_
48 Container left fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302LC9438_
3-33
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(3-7) Others
Developer unit Primary transfer unit
Drum unit 22 21 20 19
Laser scanner unit
18,25 15 16 24 17
Fuser unit
IH unit
Main unit
23 14 7
13
12 9
11 1
29
28 2
27 3
26
10
Figure 3-32
3-34
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-35
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-36
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-33
3-37
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-34
3-38
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-35
Figure 3-36
3-39
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-37
Figure 3-38
Figure 3-39
3-40
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
(2-6) IH PWB
Controlling IH
Figure 3-40
Figure 3-41
Figure 3-42
3-41
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9
19
18
17
16
12
Drum unit Laser scanner unit 13
24 14 28 15 1
23 26
22 8 2
21 Main unit
30
Fuser unit
IH unit
27 3
10
11 29
25 7
4
20 31
Figure 3-43
3-42
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1. Main PWB ............................................. Controlling the entire software to control the interface to the PC
and network and image data process, etc. Controlling the entire
hardware to control operation section.
2. Engine PWB.......................................... Controlling the hardware such as electric parts drive, high volt-
age, bias output, image scanner unit, paper conveying, fuser tem-
perature, etc.
3. Feed image PWB.................................. Consisting of the engine PWB and wiring relay circuit for drum
units, developer units, fuser drive section and exit drive section.
4. Feed drive PWB.................................... Consisting of the engine PWB, and relay circuit for the paper feed
drive section and paper conveying drive section.
5. Main high-voltage PWB ........................ Generating the main charger bias and the developer bias.
6. Low voltage PWB.................................. Rectifying the AC power input to the full-wave and converting it to
DC.
7. Transfer connect PWB .......................... Consisting of the feed image PWB and wiring relay circuit for the
transfer PWB.
8. Transfer high-voltage PWB ................... Generating the transfer bias, separation bias and transfer clean-
ing bias.
9. Transfer PWB........................................ Storing the drum unique data in an EEPROM. Wiring connection
PWB for the belt cleaning motor, belt thermistor and feed image
PWB.
10. Operation panel main PWB .................. It consists of the main PWB and wiring relay circuit for the opera-
tion panel sub PWB and the LCD.
11. Operation panel sub PWB .................... Consisting of the LED indicator and the key switches.
12. APC PWB ............................................. Emitting and controlling the laser beam.
13. PD PWB................................................ Controlling the synchronous lateral laser beam.
14. LED PWB.............................................. Controlling the LED.
15. CCD PWB ............................................. Scanning the original image.
16. Developer PWB K ................................. Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
17. Developer PWB M ................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
18. Developer PWB C................................. Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
19. Developer PWB Y ................................. Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
20. Drum/Developer relay PWB.................. Consisting of the feed image PWB, the drum and wiring relay cir-
cuit with developer unit.
21. Drum PWB K......................................... Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
22. Drum PWB M ........................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
23. Drum PWB C ........................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
24. Drum PWB Y......................................... Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
25. Fuser PWB............................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit. Storing the
drum unique data in an EEPROM.
26. IH PWB ................................................. Controlling IH
27. NFC PWB ............................................. Antenna circuit for wireless communication.
28. RFID PWB ............................................ Reading the toner container information.
29. USB hub PWB ...................................... USB slot distribution.
30. KUIO relay PWB ................................... Consisting of the main PWB and wiring relay circuit for FAX PWB.
31. Fuser high voltage PWB ....................... Discharging the fuser heater belt.
3-43
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-44
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Developer unit 26 25 24 23
Primary transfer unit
31
41
Drum unit Laser scanner unit
Fuser unit 29 30 69 68 15 67 66 14
IH unit
34
46
47
48
55
Main unit
53
45
59
60 27 11
33 44 43 49 52
51 28 32
58 50
35 62 40 16
7 9
54 4
64 21
17 56
38
65 1
8 3
42 12
61
Figure 3-44
3-45
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-46
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
52. Upper exit full sensor ............................ Detecting the paper-full on the inner tray.
53. JS sensor .............................................. Detecting the paper-full on the job separator or attachment kit.
54. Front cover sensor ................................ Detecting opening/closing of the front cover.
55. Original size timing sensor.................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
56. PF switch .............................................. Detecting the paper feeder.
57. Main Power Switch ............................... Main Power Switch
58. Power switch......................................... Turning on and off the main/engine PWB, the engine relay PWB
and the operation panel PWB, etc.
59. Conveying open/close sensor............... Detecting opening/closing of the conveying section.
60. Waste toner full sensor ......................... Detecting the waste toner box full.
61. Right cover switch................................. Blocking the 24 V power line when the right cover is open and
reset interlock switch.
62. Temperature/humidity sensor................ Detecting the temperature and humidity outside the main unit.
63. MP position sensor ............................... Detecting the MP lift plate position
64. Cassette sensor 1 ................................. Detecting the cassette 1.
65. Cassette sensor 2 ................................. Detecting the cassette 2.
66. Toner motor rotation sensor K............... Detecting toner motor K rotation
67. Toner motor rotation sensor M .............. Detecting toner motor M rotation
68. Toner motor rotation sensor C .............. Detecting toner motor C rotation
69. Toner motor rotation sensor Y............... Detecting toner motor Y rotation
3-47
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-48
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
36 PARTS PWB RETARD SENSOR ASSY
Retard sensor 1 302ND9432_
SP
37 PARTS PWB RETARD SENSOR ASSY
Retard sensor 2 302ND9432_
SP
38 Lift upper limit sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
39 Lift upper limit sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
40 Registration sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9404_
41 LSU thermistor LK-8550 302ND9313_
42 Weight sensor PARTS WTB UNIT SP 302ND9422_
43 Fuser sensor FK-8550 302ND9308_
44 Fuser pressure release sensor FK-8550 302ND9308_
45 FK-8595IH 302ND9309_
IH position sensor
FK-8590IH 302ND9310_
46 Fuser thermistor 1 (middle) FK-8550 302ND9308_
47 Fuser thermistor 2 (center) FK-8550 302ND9308_
48 Fuser thermistor 3 (edge) FK-8550 302ND9308_
49 Fuser thermistor 4 (press) FK-8550 302ND9308_
50 Exit reversing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
51 Lower exit full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
52 Upper exit full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
53 JS sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
54 Front cover sensor SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
55 Original size timing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
56 PF switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716_
57 Main Power Switch SW.SEESAW 7SC020403+++H01
58 Power Switch PWB SWITCH ASSY 302NG0110_
59 Conveying open/close sensor SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
60 Waste toner full sensor DR-8550 302ND9314_
61 Right cover switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716_
62 Temperature/humidity sensor PARTS PWB ASSY THERMISTOR SP 302M29413_
63 MP position sensor SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
64 Cassette sensor 1 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
65 Cassette sensor 2 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
66 Toner motor rotation sensor K PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP 302ND9419_
67 Toner motor rotation sensor M PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP 302ND9419_
68 Toner motor rotation sensor C PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP 302ND9419_
69 Toner motor rotation sensor Y PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP 302ND9419_
3-49
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
(3-5) Motors
22 21
Developer unit 23 Primary transfer unit
24
3
11 12
10 8
9 19
Fuser unit 29
IH unit Main unit 47
1
2
48 42
14 25
40 46 31
39 6
28 26
27 18
38 13
43 41
44 17
45
35 34 33 32 37 7 30 20 16 15 36
Figure 3-45
3-50
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-51
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-52
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
30 Toner absorption fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302K99436_
31 Controller fan motor FAN BOX COOLING 302FZ4404_
32 Developer fan motor K FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401_
33 Developer fan motor M FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401_
34 Developer fan motor C FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401_
35 Developer fan motor Y FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401_
36 PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 ASSY
Fuser edge fan motor 302ND9458_
SP
37 Power source fan motor PARTS FAN MOTOR SP 302K09430_
38 Exit/IH front fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459_
39 Exit/IH middle fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459_
40 Exit/IH rear fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459_
41 Container right fan motor FAN LSU 60-25 302GR4408_
42 Exit fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 15 SP 302ND9460_
43 Vibration motor K PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP 302ND9419_
44 Vibration motor M PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP 302ND9419_
45 Vibration motor C PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP 302ND9419_
46 Vibration motor Y PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP 302ND9419_
47 Rear exit motor PARTS MOTOR SWITCHBACK SP 302ND9449_
48 Container left fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302LC9438_
3-53
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(3-7) Others
Drum unit 22 21 20 19
Laser scanner unit
18,25 15 16 24 17
Fuser unit
IH unit
Main unit
23 14 7
13
12 9
11 1
29
28 2
27 3
26
10
Figure 3-46
3-54
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-55
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-56
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
17 2
13
16 19
15
1
8 7
9 11
4
3 12
14 6
10
18
Front side of main unit / inside of main unit / back side of main unit
Figure 3-47
1. DP PWB................................................ Consisting of the engine PWB and relay circuit for the DP electri-
cal components.
2. DP top cover switch .............................. Shutting off the 24V power supply line when the top cover is
opened.
3. DP open/close sensor........................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
4. DP original sensor................................. Detecting the presence of the original in the document processor.
5. DP original width sensor ....................... Detecting the size of the original width in the document processor.
6. DP original length sensor...................... Detecting the size of the original length in the document proces-
sor.
7. DP feed sensor ..................................... Detecting the primary feed timing of the original in the document
processor.
8. DP registration sensor .......................... Detects the primary feed timing of the document processor.
9. DP timing sensor................................... Detecting the timing to scan the original in the document proces-
sor.
10. DP feedshift sensor............................... Detecting the position of the feedshift guide in the document pro-
cessor.
11. DP exit sensor....................................... Detecting paper output to the document processor.
12. DP lift upper limit sensor ....................... Detecting the upper limit when lifting the original bottom plate
inside the document processor.
3-57
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
13. DP lift lower limit sensor........................ Detecting the lower limit when lifting the original bottom plate
inside the document processor.
14. DPLED PWB......................................... Document processor original set indication or original jam indica-
tion.
15. DP lift motor .......................................... Drive the original paper feed lift plate of the document processor.
16. DP feed motor....................................... Drive the original feed section in the document processor.
17. DP conveying motor.............................. Drive the original conveying section in the document processor
18. DP feedshift motor ................................ Drive the original feedshift section in the document processor.
19. DP reversing motor ............................... Drive the original reversing section in the document processor.
3-58
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9
12 16
15 20
14 7 19
11 1
8
22
4 5
13 6
3
10
Front side of main unit / inside of main unit / back side of main unit
Figure 3-48
1. DP PWB................................................ Consisting of the engine PWB and relay circuit for the DP electri-
cal components.
2. DP top cover switch .............................. Shutting off the 24V power supply line when the top cover is
opened.
3. DP open/close sensor........................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
4. DP original sensor................................. Detecting the presence of the original in the document processor.
5. DP original width sensor ....................... Detecting the size of the original width in the document processor.
6. DP original length sensor...................... Detecting the size of the original length in the document proces-
sor.
7. DP feed sensor ..................................... Detecting the primary feed timing of the original in the document
processor.
8. DP timing sensor................................... Detecting the timing to scan the original in the document proces-
sor.(Front page)
9. DP backside timing sensor ................... Detecting the timing to scan the original in the document proces-
sor.(Back page)
10. DP exit sensor....................................... Detecting paper output to the document processor.
11. DP lift upper limit sensor ....................... Detecting the upper limit when lifting the original bottom plate
inside the document processor.
12. DP lift lower limit sensor........................ Detecting the lower limit when lifting the original bottom plate
inside the document processor.
13. DPLED PWB......................................... Document processor original set indication or original jam indica-
tion.
14. DPSHD PWB ........................................ Processing the scanned image data in the document processor.
3-59
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
15. DPCIS ................................................... Scanning the backside original data in the document processor.
16. DP lift motor .......................................... Drive the original paper feed lift plate of the document processor.
17. DP feed motor....................................... Drive the original feed section in the document processor.
18. DP registration motor ............................ Drive the original registration section in the document processor.
19. DP conveying motor.............................. Drive the original conveying section in the document processor
20. DP exit motor ........................................ Drive the original exit section in the document processor.
21. DP drive fan motor ................................ Cool drive section in the document processor.
22. DPCIS fan motor................................... Cooling the CIS PWB in the document processor. Document Pro-
cessor (DP-7120)
3-60
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
2 11
12
13
14
9
7 4 1
8 10
15 5
3
6
Front side of main unit / inside of main unit / back side of main unit
Figure 3-49
1. DP PWB................................................ Consisting of the engine PWB and relay circuit for the DP electri-
cal components.
2. DP top cover switch .............................. Shutting off the 24V power supply line when the top cover is
opened.
3. DP open/close sensor........................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
4. DP original sensor................................. Detecting the presence of the original in the document processor.
5. DP original width sensor ....................... Detecting the size of the original width in the document processor.
6. DP original length sensor...................... Detecting the size of the original length in the document proces-
sor.
7. DP feed sensor ..................................... Detecting the primary feed timing of the original in the document
processor.
8. DP registration sensor .......................... Detects the primary feed timing of the document processor.
9. DP timing sensor................................... Detecting the timing to scan the original in the document proces-
sor.
10. DP feedshift sensor............................... Detecting the position of the feedshift guide in the document pro-
cessor.
11. DP feed motor....................................... Drive the original feed section in the document processor.
12. DP feedshift motor ................................ Drive the original feedshift section in the document processor.
13. DP paper feed clutch ............................ Control drive of the original primary feed section in the document
processor.
14. DP registration clutch............................ Control drive of the original registration roller in the document pro-
cessor.
15. DPLED PWB......................................... Document processor original set indication or original jam indica-
tion.
3-61
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1
26
11
9 19 17 22
5 15 24
6
10 3
27 12 2
8 21
13
7 23
18
20 4 25
14 16
28
Front side of main unit / inside of main unit / back side of main unit
Figure 3-50
1. PF PWB ................................................ Controlling drive of the electrical components in the PF.
2. PF right cover sensor............................ Detecting opening/closing of the right cover.
3. PF paper sensor 1 ................................ Detecting presence of paper in the upper cassette.
4. PF paper sensor 2 ................................ Detecting presence of paper in the lower cassette.
5. PF upper paper gauge sensor 1 ........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the upper cassette.
6. PF lower paper gauge sensor 1 ............ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the lower cassette.
7. PF upper paper gauge sensor 2 ........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the lower cassette.
8. PF lower paper gauge sensor 2 ............ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the lower cassette.
9. PF paper width sensor 1 ....................... Detecting the paper width in the upper cassette.
10. PF paper width sensor 2 ....................... Detecting the paper width in the lower cassette.
11. PF paper length sensor 1...................... Detecting the paper length and presence of upper cassette.
12. PF paper length sensor 2...................... Detecting the paper length and presence of lower cassette.
13. PF retard sensor 1 ................................ Detecting the retard roller rotation of upper cassette.
14. PF retard sensor 2 ................................ Detecting the retard roller rotation of lower cassette.
15. PF conveying sensor 1 ......................... Detecting paper jam at the upper paper conveying section.
16. PF conveying sensor 2 ......................... Detecting paper jam at the lower paper conveying section.
17. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 .................... Detecting the upper limit when the lift plate of the upper cassette
is activated.
18. PF lift upper limit sensor 2 .................... Detecting the upper limit when the lift plate of the lower cassette
is activated.
19. PF lift motor 1........................................ Driving the lift plate of the upper cassette.
20. PF lift motor 2........................................ Driving the lift plate of the lower cassette.
21. PF feed motor ....................................... Drive the paper feed section.
22. PF feed clutch 1 .................................... Control drive of the primary paper feeding from the upper cas-
sette.
23. PF feed clutch 2 .................................... Control drive of the primary paper feeding from the lower cas-
sette.
24. PF conveying clutch 1........................... Control drive of paper conveying section from the upper cassette.
3-62
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
25. PF conveying clutch 2........................... Control drive of paper conveying section from the lower cassette.
26. PF cassette sensor 1 ............................ Detecting presence of the upper cassette.
27. PF cassette sensor 2 ............................ Detecting presence of the lower cassette.
28. PF cassette heater................................ Dehumidifying paper.
3-63
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1
19
14
4 21
20
16 11
18
7 22
8
10 24 17 12 2
13
5
15
3
6
9 23
25
Front side of main unit / inside of main unit / back side of main unit
Figure 3-51
1. PF PWB ................................................ Controlling drive of the electrical components in the PF.
2. PF right cover sensor............................ Detecting opening/closing of the right cover.
3. PF paper sensor 1 ................................ Detecting presence of paper in the right cassette.
4. PF paper sensor 2 ................................ Detecting presence of paper in the left cassette.
5. PF upper paper gauge sensor 1 ........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the right cassette.
6. PF lower paper gauge sensor 1 ............ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the right cassette.
7. PF upper paper gauge sensor 2 ........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the left cassette.
8. PF lower paper gauge sensor 2 ............ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the left cassette.
9. PF retard sensor 1 ................................ Detecting the retard roller rotation of right cassette.
10. PF retard sensor 2 ................................ Detecting the retard roller rotation of left cassette.
11. PF horizontal conveying sensor ............ Detecting paper jam at the horizontal paper conveying section.
12. PF vertical conveying sensor ................ Detecting paper jam at the vertical paper conveying section.
13. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 .................... Detecting the upper limit when the lift plate of the right cassette is
activated.
14. PF lift upper limit sensor 2 .................... Detecting the upper limit when the lift plate of the left cassette is
activated.
15. PF lift motor 1........................................ Driving the lift plate of the right cassette.
16. PF lift motor 2........................................ Driving the lift plate of the left cassette.
17. PF feed motor ....................................... Drive the paper feed section.
18. PF feed right clutch 1 ............................ Controlling drive of the primary paper feed from the right cassette.
19. PF feed left clutch 2 .............................. Controlling drive of the primary paper feed from the left cassette.
20. PF horizontal conveying clutch 1 .......... Control drive of the right horizontal paper conveying section.
21. PF horizontal conveying clutch 2 .......... Control drive of the right horizontal paper conveying section.
22. PF vertical conveying clutch ................. Control drive of the vertical paper conveying section.
23. PF cassette sensor 1 ............................ Detecting presence of the right cassette.
3-64
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
13 9
2
11
5
10 8
1
7
12
3
6
4
14
Front side of main unit / inside of main unit / back side of main unit
Figure 3-52
3-65
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7
6
9 10
11
1 8
5 4
21 17
18 15 23
25 20
19
27
12 24
13
22
16
26
14 3 2
Front side of main unit / inside of main unit / back side of main unit
Figure 3-53
3-66
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
25. DF paper press solenoid....................... Switching the bundle exit paper pressure.
26. DF connection sensor ........................... DF connection detection with the main unit (connection detec-
tion).
27. DF release LED .................................... Lighting up when releasing the inner finisher.
2 6
3 1
7
9 10 4
Front side of main unit / inside of main unit / back side of main unit
Figure 3-54
3-67
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4
1 5
2 3
Front side of main unit / inside of main unit / back side of main unit
Figure 3-55
3-68
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
24 39
41 26 23 32 27 36
47 30
49 29
48
31
45
16
25
3 40 13 44
28 14 11 12 42
34 10 17 7
37 35
8 18
5 43
38
22 6
15 9 33
2
46 19
1
4
21
20
Front side of main unit / inside of main unit / back side of main unit
Figure 3-56
3-69
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-70
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8 10
12 15
25
21
6 16 27
20
13 7
17
18 1
5
28 2
Front side of main unit / inside of main unit / back side of main unit
Figure 3-57
3-71
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-72
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3
4 1
10
5
6
7
8
9
2
13
11
12
Front side of main unit / inside of main unit / back side of main unit
Figure 3-58
3-73
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4
2
3
7 10
11
8
5
6 1
Front side of main unit / inside of main unit / back side of main unit
Figure 3-59
3-74
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
22 16
12
23
13
6 10
8
3 9
4
19
2 7 21
17
18
11 20 1
15
14
Front side of main unit / inside of main unit / back side of main unit
Figure 3-60
1. BF PWB ................................................ Controlling the electrical components of the folding unit.
2. BF tray sensor....................................... Detecting opening/closing of the BF tray.
3. BF left cover sensor .............................. Detecting opening/closing of the BF left cover.
4. BF paper entry sensor .......................... Detecting paper entering into the folding unit.
5. BF vertical conveying sensor ................ Detecting presence of paper on the BF bridge section.
6. BF paper sensor ................................... Detecting presence of paper on the folding unit.
7. BF adjusting sensor 1 ........................... Detecting home position of the lower BF moving plate.
8. BF adjusting sensor 2 ........................... Detecting home position of the upper BF moving plate.
9. BF side registration sensor 1 ................ Detecting home position of the BF side registration guide.
10. BF side registration sensor 2 ................ Detecting home position of the BF side registration guide.
11. BF blade sensor.................................... Detecting home position of the BF blade.
12. BF exit sensor ....................................... Detecting paper output to the BF tray.
13. BF tray full sensor ................................. Detecting paper full on the BF tray.
14. BF set sensor........................................ Detecting the folding unit.
15. BF main motor ...................................... Drive of the paper conveying in the holding unit.
16. BF paper entry motor ............................ Drive of the entry roller.
17. BF blade motor ..................................... Drive of the BF blade.
18. BF adjusting motor 1............................. Drive of the lower adjusting plate in the folding unit.
19. BF adjusting motor 2............................. Drive of the upper adjusting plate in the folding unit.
20. BF side registration motor 1.................. Detecting home position of the lower BF side registration guide.
21. BF side registration motor 2.................. Detecting home position of the upper BF side registration guide.
22. BF staple motor..................................... Drive of the BF staple.
23. BF feedshift solenoid ............................ Operation of the BF feedshift guide.
3-75
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Front side of main unit / inside of main unit / back side of main unit
Figure 3-61
3-76
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(High-end model)
3-77
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Feed/conveying drive
Middle roller
Registration clutch
Middle clutch
Retard roller
Pickup roller
Retard roller
Pickup roller
Cassette1
Cassette2
Figure 3-62
3-78
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
MP drive
MP clutch
MP tray
MP lift motor
Figure 3-63
3-79
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Drum drive
Drum motor K
Drum K
ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Drum M
Drum C
Drum Y
Drum unit K
Drum unit M
Drum unit C
Drum unit Y
Figure 3-64
3-80
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
⌧ീࣂࢫ
Developer roller Y
Developer roller C
Developer roller M
Developer roller K
⌧ീ࣮ࣔࢱ࣮YC
Developer motor CMY
Developer clutch
Developer unit K
Developer unit M
Developer unit C
Developer unit Y
Figure 3-65
3-81
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
⌧ീࣂࢫ
Developer sleeve roller Y
Developer motor CY
Developer motor M
Developer K ࣋ࣝࢺ㞳㛫࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
/ Transfer belt motor
Developer clutch
Developer unit K
Developer unit M
Developer unit C
Developer unit Y
Figure 3-66
3-82
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-67
3-83
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Fuser motor
DU clutch 2
DU clutch 1
DU registration roller
DU conveying upper roller
Figure 3-68
3-84
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Fuser motor
Duplex clutch 2
Duplex clutch 1
DU registration roller
IH core motor
Figure 3-69
3-85
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
11
10
12 9
7 8
5 6
1
13 14 15 16
Figure 3-70
3-86
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(High-end model)
12
11
13 10
7 9
8
5 6
1
14 15 16 17
Figure 3-71
3-87
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-72
Low-end model
High-end model
Figure 3-73
3-88
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-74
Figure 3-75
3-89
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. Paper feed roller 8 7 62 3 1 4
2. Pickup roller
3. Pickup holder
4. Retard roller
5. Retard holder 13
6. Friction pad
7. Lift plate 12 5 1
8. Paper width guides 23
6
9. Paper length guide 8 14
10. Cassette base 7
11. Paper width guide release 4
lever
12. Actuator (paper sensor)
13. Vertical conveying roller 12
5
14. Vertical conveying pulley
Figure 3-76
3-90
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9
8
10
3
12
8 1
7
2
12
11
4
13
2
14
1
4
Figure 3-77
3-91
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC5-A15
Lift motor 1
YC5-A16
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
DU clutch 2 YC7-A3
YC5-B1
Lift motor 2
YC5-B2
YC5-A3
Paper length sensor 1 YC5-A5
YC5-A6
YC5-B13
Paper length sensor 2 YC5-B15
YC5-B16
Figure 3-78
3-92
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts] 4 1 6 9 5
1. MP paper feed roller
2. MP Retard roller
3. MP Retard guide
4. MP Retard holder
5. MP lift plate
6. MP friction pad
7. MP tray
8. MP frame
9. MP paper width guides
10. Actuator (MP paper sensor )
11. Sub tray
12. Actuator (MP paper length
sensor)
2 10 8
Figure 3-79
10
9
1
4
5 7
11
2 6 12
9 3
Figure 3-80
3-93
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
MP clutch YC7-A5
Figure 3-81
3-94
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. Middle roller 5
2. Middle pulley 4
3. Registration guide sheet 3
6
4. Registration roller left
5. Registration roller right 7
6. Registration guide
7. Conveying frame
2
1
Figure 3-82
2
1
6
3
Figure 3-83
3-95
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
DU sensor 2 YC7-B9
Figure 3-84
3-96
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8 16 7 15 2
Figure 3-85
[Components parts]
1. CCD 9. Exposure lamp
2. Scanner frame 10. Drive motor
3. Contact glass 11. Scanner wire
4. Original size indicator 12. Scanner wire drum
5. Slit glass 13. Original size sensor
6. ISU lens 14. Home position sensor
7. Mirror A 15. Mirror unit A
8. Mirror B 16. Mirror unit B
5
4 14
9
7
3
13
10
11 6
1
2
12
Figure 3-86
3-97
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC16-A2
YC16-A3
Scanner motor
YC16-A4
YC16-A5
LED PWB
Engine PWB
Figure 3-87
3-98
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
Drum Drum Drum Drum
1. Polygon motor (Yellow) (Cyan) (Magenta) (Black)
2. fθ lens A
3. fθ lens B
4. LSU glass 6 7 4 3 7 4 3 7 4 3 7 4
5. LSU base
6. Mirror
7. Laser emitting diode
8. Collimator lens
9. LD slit glass plate
10. LD mirror
11. Cylindrical lens
12. PD PWB 5 1 2 7 7 7 3 7
13. PD lens
14. PD mirror
Figure 3-88
(Low-end model)
7
5 8
9
12
11 13 14
4 10
1
2
6
3
6
Figure 3-89
3-99
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
YC9 YC27
YC1 YC3
LSU thermistor YC7-1
PD PWB YC4
YC6-1
LSU cleaning motor
YC6-3
YC5-3
Polygon motor YC5-4
YC5-5
APC PWB
Figure 3-90
3-100
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(High-end model)
7
5 8
9
12
11 13 14
4 10
1
2
6
3
6
Figure 3-91
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
YC9 YC10 YC27
PD PWB YC4
YC6-1
LSU cleaning motor
YC6-3
YC5-3
Polygon motor YC5-4
YC5-5
APC PWB
Figure 3-92
3-101
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(Low-end model)
[Components parts]
1. Developer roller
2. Developer blade
5 1 7(Y) 5 1 7(C) 5 1 7(M) 5 1 7(K)
3. Developer screw A
4. Developer screw B
5. Developer case
6. Toner sensor 4
6
7. Drum
3 2 4 6 3 2 4 6 3 2 4 6 3 2
Figure 3-93
4 6
3
Figure 3-94
3-102
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Developer bias YC34
Main high-voltage PWB
YC33
YC24-20
YC24-21
Developer motor CMY
YC24-22
YC24-23
YC24-13
Developer K / YC24-14
Transfer belt motor YC24-15
YC24-16
YC24-17
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK
T/C sensor K
⌧ീᇶᯈBK
Developer PWB K YC2
T/C sensor C
T/C sensor Y
Figure 3-95
3-103
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(High-end model)
[Components parts]
1. Sleeve roller (Y) (C) (M) K
2. Magnet roller
3. Developer blade 6 2 1 6 2 1 6 2 1 6 2 1
4. Developer screw A
5. Developer screw B
6. Developer case
7. Toner sensor
5 7 4 3 57 4 3 5 7 4 3 5 7 4 3
Figure 3-96
5 7
4
Figure 3-97
3-104
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Developer bias
Main high-voltage PWB YC34
YC33
YC37-1
YC37-2
Developer motor YC
YC37-3
YC37-4
YC24-20
YC24-21
Developer motor M
YC24-22
YC24-23
YC24-13
YC24-14
Developer K / Belt motor YC24-15
YC24-16
YC24-17
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK
T/C sensor K
ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Vibration motor
Developer
⌧ീᇶᯈBK PWB K YC2
T/C sensor C
Vibration motor
T/C sensor Y
Vibration motor
Figure 3-98
3-105
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
(4-2) Cleaning
The remaining toner on the drum surface after transferring is removed by the cleaning blade, and collected
to the waste toner box by the drum screw. The eraser consists of the LED lamp, and it removes the
remaining electric charge on the drum before the main charge.
(Low-end model)
[Components parts] 3 (Y) 3 (C) 3(M) 3 (K)
1. MC roller 567 567 567 567
2. MC cleaning roller
3. Drum
4. Drum frame
5. Cleaning blade
6. Drum screw
7. Eraser
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Figure 3-99
3
2
1
6
Figure 3-100
3-106
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Main charger voltage YC34
Main high-voltage PWB
YC33
YC24-7
YC24-8
Drum motor CMY
YC24-9
YC24-10
YC24-1
YC24-2
Drum motor K
YC24-3
YC24-4
Drum/Developer
ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Eraser K relay PWB
⌧ീᇶᯈBK
Drum PWB K YC10
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK
Drum heater YC6
Eraser M
Eraser C
Eraser Y
Figure 3-101
3-107
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
(High-end model)
[Components parts] 3 (Y) 3 (C) 3(M) 3 (K)
1. MC roller 568 568 568 568
2. MC cleaning roller
3. Drum
4. Drum frame
5. Cleaning blade
6. Cleaning roller
7. Drum screw
8. Eraser
1 2 7 1 2 7 1 2 7 1 2 7
Figure 3-102
3 8
2
1
5
7
6
Figure 3-103
3-108
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Main charger voltage
YC34
Main high-voltage PWB
YC33
YC24-7
YC24-8
Drum motor CMY
YC24-9
YC24-10
YC24-1
Drum motor K YC24-2
YC24-3
YC24-4
Drum/Developer
Eraser K relay PWB
ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Drum PWB K
⌧ീᇶᯈBK YC10
Drum heater
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK YC6
Eraser M
Eraser C
Eraser Y
Figure 3-104
3-109
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. Drive roller
2. Backup roller 8 7 6 3 3 3 5 3 1
3. Primary transfer roller
4. Tension roller
5. Transfer belt
6. Belt pre-brush
7. Cleaning fur brush
8. Cleaning roller
9. Cleaning screw
10. Cleaning blade 10 9 4 2 12 12 12 12
11. Transfer unit cover (Y) (C) (M) (B)
12. Drum
Figure 3-105
2 3
9
8
4
7
10
1
11
Figure 3-106
3-110
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC34
Transfer high-voltage
Transfer bias
PWB
Engine PWB
YC23-1
Belt release motor
YC23-2
YC24-13
Developer K / YC24-14
Transfer belt motor YC24-15
YC24-16
YC24-17
Transfer connect
PWB
Figure 3-107
3-111
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. Secondary transfer roller
2
2. Discharger needle
3. Transfer front guide
4. Transfer spring
3 1 4
Figure 3-108
3 4
Figure 3-109
3-112
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Figure 3-110
3-113
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
2
7
6
8
9
4
10 11
5
Figure 3-112
3-114
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
IH PWB YC10-1
YC2-1 YC10-2
Fuser motor
YC3-1 YC10-3
YC10-4
YC10-7
Fuser high voltage Fuser pressure release motor
YC10-8
PWB
FSR-1 Feed drive PWB
Fuser thermostat
Feed image PWB
YC22
Fuser PWB
Front belt rotation sensor YC2-3
Figure 3-113
3-115
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(High-end model)
[Components parts]
1. Fuser heater belt 8
9
2. IH core
3. Fuser thermistor 7
4. Separator 6
5. Fuser press roller 4
2
6. Fuser press roller separation 3
claw 5
7. Actuator (Fuser sensor) 11
8. Fuser exit roller
9. Fuser exit sub roller
13 12
10. Pressure switching cam
11. Fuser frame
12. Fuser front guide
13. Fuser discharger needle
1
Figure 3-114
2
7
6
8
9
4
10 11
5
Figure 3-115
3-116
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
IH PWB YC10-1
YC10-2
YC2-1 Fuser motor
YC10-3
YC3-1
YC10-4
YC10-7
Fuser high voltage Fuser pressure release motor
YC10-8
PWB
Feed drive PWB
FSR-1
Fuser thermostat
Feed image PWB
YC22
Fuser PWB
Front belt rotation sensor YC2-3
YC32-B9
YC32-B10
IH core motor
YC32-B11
YC32-B12
Figure 3-116
3-117
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-117
8
2 7
9
1
9
4
10
5
6
12
11
Figure 3-118
3-118
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
Low-end model
YC17-B9
Rear exit motor YC17-B10
YC17-B11
YC17-B12
YC17-A1
YC17-A2
Exit reversing motor
YC17-A3
YC17-A4
YC17-1A5
Upper exit full sensor
YC17-A16
YC17-A12
Lower exit solenoid
YC17-A13
Figure 3-119
3-119
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
High-end model
YC17-A1
YC17-A2
Exit reversing motor
YC17-A3
YC17-A4
YC17-1A5
Upper exit solenoid
YC17-A16
YC17-A12
Lower exit solenoid
YC17-A13
Figure 3-120
3-120
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-121
Figure 3-122
Figure 3-123
3-121
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
[Components parts]
1. DU conveying upper roller 1
2. DU conveying upper pulley 9
3. DU conveying middle roller 2
4. DU conveying middle pulley 12
5. DU conveying lower roller 3
6. DU conveying lower pulley 4
7. DU registration roller
8. DU registration pulley
9. Actuator (DU sensor 1)
10. Actuator (DU sensor 2) 6
11. DU conveying base 5
12. DU conveying guide
4
11
10
7
8
Figure 3-124
9
1
3
2 4
12
5
6
10
11
7
8
Figure 3-125
3-122
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
[Block diagram]
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
Figure 3-126
3-123
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
14 3 4
2 1 12
9 10 8 7
13
15
5
12
13
15
1
4
5
2
9 10 8 7 14 3
Figure 3-127
[Components parts]
1. PF feed roller 9. PF paper length guide
2. PF Pickup roller 10. PF cassette base
3. PF Pickup holder 11. PF paper width guide release lever
4. PF retard roller 12. PF conveying roller
5. PF retard holder 13. PF conveying pulley
6. PF friction pad 14. PF actuator (PF paper sensor)
7. PF lift plate 15. PF actuator 1 (PF paper conveying sensor 1)
8. PF paper width guide
3-124
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
8
9 12
7 13
14
2
11 4
6 1
Figure 3-128
8
9 7
14
2
12
13
4
8 1
6
11
Figure 3-129
3-125
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
[Block diagram]
PF PWB
YC3-11
PF paper length sensor 1 YC3-13
YC3-15
YC6-1
PF lift motor 1
YC6-2
YC8-3
YC8-4
PF feed motor
YC8-5
YC8-6
YC6-3
PF lift motor 2
YC6-4
YC5-11
PF paper length sensor 2 YC5-13
YC5-15
Figure 3-130
3-126
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
8
9
12
4
9 1 8 13
2 10
8 11 14
9
8
9 11 1
2
8 12
8
10
4
6
7
Figure 3-132
3-127
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC6-1
PF lift motor 1
YC6-2
YC8-3
YC8-4
PF feed motor
YC8-5
YC8-6
YC6-3
PF lift motor 2
YC6-4
PF PWB
Figure 3-133
3-128
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
[Components parts]
9 1 3 2 7 6 8
1. PF feed roller
2. PF Pickup roller
3. PF Pickup holder 10
4. PF retard roller
4
5. PF friction pad
6. PF lift plate
7. PF paper width guide 11
8. PF paper length guide 5
9. PF conveying roller
10. PF conveying pulley
11. PF actuator (PF paper sen-
sor)
Figure 3-134
1 7
9
10 8
4 2 6
5
7
Figure 3-135
3-129
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC18-1
YC18-2
PF conveying motor YC18-4
YC18-5
YC18-6
PF PWB
YC8-1
PF lift motor
YC8-2
YC5-9
PF paper feed solenoid
YC5-10
Figure 3-136
3-130
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. DP pick up roller
2. DP paper feed belt
11 12 2 3 5 7 13
3. DP feed holder
4. DP retard roller 10 4 1 8
5. DF friction pad
6. DP original sensor
7. DP original width guide
8. DP original tray
9. DP feed sensor
10. DP registration roller
11. DP registration pulley
12. DP actuator (DP registration
sensor ) 9 6
13. DP actuator (DP original length sensor )
Figure 3-137
2
13
12
11
8
1
4
5
8
9 12
Figure 3-138
3-131
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. DP conveying roller 1
2. DP conveying pulley 1 6 8 9
3. DP scanner guide
4. DP scanner guide pulley
5. DP conveying roller 2
6. DP conveying pulley 2
7. DP feedshift guide
8. DP reversing roller
9. DP reversing pulley 14
10. DP feedshift roller
11. DP feedshift pulley
12. DP exit roller
13. DP exit pulley
14. DP exit tray
1 3 6 11 15 13
2 4 5 7 10 12
15. DP actuator (DP exit sensor)
Figure 3-139
5
3
1 4
8
2 9
15 13 14
10 12
8 11
Figure 3-140
3-132
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC9-9
YC9-10
DP conveying motor YC9-12
YC9-13
YC9-14
YC9-1
YC9-2
DP feed motor YC9-4
YC9-5
YC9-6
YC11-1
YC11-2
DP lift motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
YC11-5
YC11-6
DP reversing motor YC11-8
YC11-9
YC11-10
DP main PWB
DP exit sensor YC17-3
YC10-1
YC10-2
DP feedshift motor
YC10-3
YC10-4
Figure 3-141
3-133
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
2
The first side of original is scanned 3
at the slit glass (machine main body).
1
Slit glass: first side scanning
2
The original is reversed by the DP 3
switchback roller.
1
DP switchback roller
Figure 3-142
3-134
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. DP pick up roller
2. DP paper feed belt
11 10 2
3. DP belt tension pulley
12 9 8 3 1 7 6 13 14
4. DP retard roller
5. DF friction pad
6. DP original width guide
7. DP lift plate
8. DP feed sensor
9. DP registration roller
10. DP registration pulley
11. DP conveying roller 1
12. DP conveying pulley 1
13. DP original tray
14. DP original length sensor 4 5
Figure 3-143
11
12
9
10
3 6
7
13
2 5 1
4
6
Figure 3-144
3-135
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
[Components parts]
1. DP backside timing sensor 32 1
2. DPCIS
3. DPCIS roller
4. DP conveying roller 2
5. DP conveying pulley 2
6. DP scanner guide pulley
7. DP scanner guide
8. DP conveying roller 3
9. DP conveying pulley 3 13
10. DP actuator (DP exit sensor)
11. DP exit roller
12. DP exit pulley
13. DP exit tray
5 4 6 8 10 12
7 9 11
Figure 3-145
2
3
6 4
13 14
12
8 10
7 11
9
Figure 3-146
3-136
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
DPSHD PWB
YC9-10
YC9-12
DP conveying motor
YC9-13
YC9-14
YC9-2
YC9-4
DP registration motor
YC9-5
YC9-6
YC11-1
YC11-2
DP feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
YC11-6
YC11-8
DP lift motor
YC11-9
YC11-10
DP PWB
DP original length sensor YC17-3
YC10-1
YC10-2
DP exit motor
YC10-3
YC10-4
Figure 3-147
3-137
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. DP pick up roller
2. DP feed roller
3. DP feed holder 12 11 2 8 7
4. DP retard roller 13 14 4 5 3 1 9 10 15
5. DP separation pad Assy
6. DF friction pad
7. DP actuator (DP original sen-
sor)
8. DP original stopper
9. DP original width guide
10. DP original tray
11. DP actuator (DP paper feed
sensor)
12. DP registration roller
13. DP registration pulley
14. DP actuator (DP registration
sensor )
15. DP actuator (DP original length sensor )
Figure 3-148
11
2
14 9
13
12 7
4
5
1
8 6
9 10
15
Figure 3-149
3-138
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. DP conveying roller 1
2. DP conveying pulley 1
3. Actuator (DP timing sensor) 12
4. DP scanner guide
5. DP conveying roller 2
6. DP conveying pulley 2
7. DP feedshift guide
8. DP reversing roller
9. DP reversing pulley
13
10. DP exit roller
11. DP exit pulley
12. DP reversing guide
13. DP exit tray 1 5 7 8 11
2 4 6 9 10
Figure 3-150
7
5
6
3
7
2 1
12
11
8 10
9 13
Figure 3-151
3-139
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC9-1
YC9-2
DP feed motor
YC9-3
YC9-4
YC9-5
YC9-6
DP feedshift motor
YC9-7
YC9-8
DP PWB
YC4-1
DP original width sensor YC4-2
YC4-4
Figure 3-152
3-140
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
2
The first side of original is scanned 3
at the slit glass (machine main body).
1
Slit glass: first side scanning
2
The original is reversed by the DP 3
switchback roller.
1
DP switchback roller
2
The second side of original is 3
scanned at the slit glass (machine
main body) and the original is 1
conveyed to the DP switchback tray.
DP switchback tray
Figure 3-153
3-141
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts] 18 12 11 10 7 8 9 5 3 4
1. DF entry roller
2. DF entry pulley
3. DF conveying roller 13
4. DF conveying pulley
5. DF entry sensor 14
6. DF paper stopper
7. DF Middle roller 2
8. DF Middle pulley
1
9. DF paddle
10. DF upper guide
11. DF paper width guides
12. DF bundle exit unit
13. DF exit roller 15 17 6 16
14. DF exit pulley
Figure 3-154
15. DF actuator (Paper press sensor)
16. DF stapler
17. DF middle tray
18. DF tray
18 13
8
7
14
4
9
2 1
16
Figure 3-155
3-142
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC8-1 / YC8-2
DF exit motor
YC8-3 / YC8-4
YC13-2
DF Paper press solenoid
YC13-3
YC8-5 / YC8-6
DF slide motor
YC8-7 / YC8-8
YC9-1 / YC9-2
DF paddle motor
YC9-3 / YC9-4
YC9-5 / YC9-6
DF Side registration motor 2
YC9-7 / YC9-8
YC9-9 / YC9-10
DF Side registration motor 1
YC9-11 / YC9-12
DF staple unit
YC8-17 / YC8-18
DF paper entry motor
YC8-19 / YC8-20
YC8-9 / YC8-10
DF exit release motor
YC8-11 / YC8-12
YC8-13 / YC8-14
DF middle motor
YC8-15 / YC8-16
YC11-1
DF tray motor
YC11-2
DF PWB
Figure 3-156
3-143
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-157
a
2. The DF bundle exit unit (b) and The DF
upper guide (c) descend when the d b
paper trailing edge passes the DF mid-
dle roller (a). Then, the DF exit roller (d) c
is rotated reversely and paper is sent to
the DF middle tray (e).
Figure 3-158
b a
3. Then, the DF upper guide (a) ascends
and the DF bundle exit unit (b) ascends
by the DF exit release motor drive.
By rotating the DF paddles(c), paper is f c
conveyed to the DF middle tray (d).
The DF side registration motor 1,2 (e)
drive the DF side registration guides (f)
d
to adjust paper.
Figure 3-159
3-144
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-160
a
5. The DF bundle exit unit (b) and The DF
upper guide (c) descend when the d b
paper trailing edge passes the DF mid-
dle roller (a). Then, by rotating the DF c
exit roller (d) and the DF paddles (e) ,
e
paper is conveyed to the DF middle tray
(f). Paper is adjusted which is same as
f
the 1st sheet.
Figure 3-161
a
6. Once completing to adjust the last
sheet to bundle, the DF bundle exit unit b
(a) descends and output paper bundle
(c) to the DF tray (d) by the rotation of
DF exit roller (b). c
Figure 3-162
3-145
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts] 7 9 8
1. DF entry roller
2. DF entry pulley 6
3. DF feedshift solenoid 3
4. DF tray B conveying roller 11
5. DF conveying pulley
6. DF tray B exit roller
7. DF exit pulley 10
8. DF sub exit sensor 4
5
9. DF actuator (DF sub exit sen-
sor) 2
3
10. DF entry sensor
11. DF tray B 1
Figure 3-163
11
9
6
7
3
4
5
1
2
Figure 3-164
3-146
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC12-5
YC12-6
DF exit motor
YC12-7
YC12-8
YC12-13
YC12-14
DF paper entry motor
YC12-15
YC12-16
YC18-12
DF feedshift solenoid 3
YC18-13
DF PWB
Figure 3-165
3-147
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
e
d
b
Figure 3-166
3-148
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-167
20
10
11
13
12 9
1
5
2
3
Figure 3-168
3-149
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
DF shift sensor 1 YC23-3
YC14-5 / YC14-6
DF shift motor 2
YC14-7 / YC14-8
YC14-9 / YC14-10
DF shift motor 1
YC14-11 / YC14-12
DF shift sensor 2 YC23-6
YC14-1 / YC14-2
DF shift release motor
YC14-3 / YC14-4
YC15-1 / YC15-2
DF paddle motor
YC15-3 / YC15-4
YC12-17 / YC12-18
DF exit release motor
YC12-19 / YC12-20
YC12-9 / YC12-10
DF middle motor
YC12-11 / YC12-12
YC18-6
DF feedshift solenoid 1
YC18-7
YC18-1 / YC18-2
DF relief drum motor
YC18-3 / YC18-4
YC18-9
DF feedshift solenoid 2
YC18-10
YC12-1 / YC12-2
DF slide motor
YC12-3 / YC12-4
YC19-1 / YC19-2
DF tray motor
YC19-3 / YC19-4
DF staple unit
YC15-5 / YC15-6
DF side registration motor 2
YC15-7 / YC15-8
YC15-9 / YC15-10
DF side registration motor 1
YC15-11 / YC15-12
Figure 3-169
3-150
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
When finishing multiple copies of A4 size paper to the finishing section or folding section, to secure the time to
finish paper, the 1st and 2nd paper of the next group is relieved until the 3rd paper is conveyed.
b
c
Figure 3-170
Figure 3-171
3-151
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
Figure 3-172
3-152
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
b
e
f
g
3. Then, the paper conveying guide (d)
ascends and the bundle exit unit (g) k
ascends by the DF exit release motor
(f) drive.
h
By rotating the DF tray A exit roller (b)
and adjusting paddles (h), paper is
conveyed to the adjusting tray (i).
The DF side registration motor 1,2 (j)
drive the adjusting guides (k) to adjust
paper.
d
b i
j
Figure 3-173
3-153
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
e f
5. The conveying guide (d) descends
when the paper trailing edge passes the c
DF middle roller (c). Then, by rotating
the paddles (e) and the adjusting pad-
dles (e), paper is conveyed to the
adjusting tray (g). Paper is adjusted
which is same as the 1st sheet.
d
h
j
6. When adjusting the last paper of bundle
is completed, the bundle exit unit (h)
descends and the DF tray A exit roller
(i) rotates to output the paper bundle to
the DF tray A (j).
i
Figure 3-174
3-154
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-175
18
6
7
18
10
9
1
2
Figure 3-176
3-155
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC9-1 / YC9-2
DF paddle motor
YC9-3 / YC9-4
YC11-1
DF tray motor
YC11-2
YC8-9 / YC8-10
DF exit release motor
YC8-11 / YC8-12
YC8-17 / YC8-18
DF middle motor
YC8-19 / YC8-20
YC8-13 / YC8-14
DF paper entry motor
YC8-15 / YC8-16
YC8-1 / YC8-2
DF exit motor
YC8-3 / YC8-4
YC8-5 / YC8-6
DF slide motor
YC8-7 / YC8-8
DF PWB
DF staple relay PWB YC10
DF staple unit
YC9-5 / YC9-6
DF side registration motor 2
YC9-7 / YC9-8
YC9-9 / YC9-10
DF side registration motor 1
YC9-11 / YC9-12
Figure 3-177
3-156
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
a
c
e
f
h g
Figure 3-178
3-157
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
d
Figure 3-179
3-158
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(10)Mailbox (MT-730(B))
Paper is output to the mailbox tray 1 to 7 which is specified and stock them.
[Components parts] 9
1. MT conveying pulley
2. MT conveying roller 10
3. MT exit pulley
4. MT exit roller
11
5. MT lower entry guide 3
6. MT middle entry guide 4
7. MT upper entry guide 12
8. MT feedshift nail 3 7
4
9. MT tray 1 13
10. MT tray 2 3 8
11. MT tray 3
4
14 2 1
12. MT tray 4 3 8
13. MT tray 5 4
14. MT tray 6 15
15. MT tray 7 3 8
4
16. MT Actuator (MT overflow sen- 2 1
sor) 3 8
4
3 8
4
2 1
8
7
5 6
Figure 3-180
3-159
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9
10
11
7
12 3
4
13 16 3
4
16 3
14 4
16 3
15 4
16 3
2 4
1
16 3
4
16 3
2 4
1
16 8
2
1
Figure 3-181
3-160
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Block diagram]
MT PWB
YC5-1
MT conveying motor YC5-2
YC5-3
YC5-4
YC3
YC7
DF PWB
Figure 3-182
3-161
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b d
a e
Figure 3-183
3-162
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. PH cam
2. PH cutter 1
3. PH dust tank 6
4. PH cutter holder
7
5. PH cam shaft
6. PH home position sensor 2
7. PH pulse sensor
8. PH pulse plate
Figure 3-184
8
4
1
5
2
Figure 3-185
3-163
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC4-1
PH motor
YC4-3
YC3-1
YC3-2
PH slide motor
YC3-3
YC3-4
PH PWB
PH tank full sensor YC5-10
YC5-4
YC5-5
PH paper edge sensor 1
YC5-6
YC5-7
YC5-2
PH solenoid
YC5-3
YC1
YC7
DF PWB
Figure 3-186
3-164
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
2 1
1.BF conveying roller 1 3
2.BF conveying pulley 1
3.BF vertical conveying sensor
4.BF conveying roller 2
5.BF conveying pulley 2
21 17 16
6.BF entry roller 22 19 18 14 15
7.BF entry pulley 4
5
8.BF entry sensor
9.BF paper sensor 6
8
7
10.BF blade motor 25
11.BF blade sensor
12.BF right roller 26 20
13.BF left roller 23
3-165
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1
2
18
21 17
14 20
5
6
4
26 7
13 12
Figure 3-188
3-166
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC17-2
BF feedshift solenoid
YC17-3
YC13-6 / YC13-7
BF staple motor
YC13-9 / YC13-10
YC10-9 / YC10-10
BF paper entry motor
YC10-11 / YC10-12
YC15-1 / YC15-2
BF blade motor
YC15-3 / YC15-4
YC20-5 / YC10-6
BF side registration motor 2
YC10-7 / YC10-8
YC10-1 / YC10-2
BF adjusting motor 2
YC10-3 / YC10-4
YC10-13 / YC10-14
BF adjusting motor 1
YC10-15 / YC10-16
BF PWB
YC16-1 / YC16-2
BF main motor
YC16-3 / YC16-4
YC10-17 / YC10-18
BF side registration motor 1
YC10-19/ YC10-20
YC3, 5, 7
YC9, 10
DF PWB
Figure 3-189
3-167
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
e a d
f c
c f
Figure 3-190
3. The BF blade (a) pushes up the center of paper by the BF blade motor drive to pinch it between the BF
right roller (b) and BF left motor (c).
4. Center-folded paper is output to the BF tray (e) by the BF right roller (b), BF left roller (c) and BF exit roller
(d).
c b
d a
Figure 3-191
3-168
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Tri-folding
1. The paper in the folding unit is conveyed to the center-folding position by drive of the BF adjusting motor
1/2 as well as the center-folding operation.
2. After the paper side registration, the BF blade (a) pushes up the paper and have it pinched between the
BF right roller (b) and BF left roller (c).
3. The BF feed-shift guide (e) activates the BF feed-shift solenoid (d), and switches the conveying path of
paper from the BF right/left roller and convey it to the relief section (f).
d
e
f
b
c a
Figure 3-192
4. When the paper stops at the relief section, the paper loop generated at the space is pinched between the
BF right roller (a) and upper BF roller (b). Then, the paper is folded inside.
3-169
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-193
5. Tri-folded paper (a) is output to the BF tray (d) by the BF conveying roller3 (b) and BF exit roller (c).
c b
a
Figure 3-194
3-170
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
A B C
B
Z
*: In case to perform this measure to the
bundled paper, please note that there
might be a little margin for the tri-folding
A C
position and Z section might be folded.
Figure 3-195
3-171
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Adjustment 1
Change the width of B.
a
Figure 3-196
3-172
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
c
Figure 3-197
3-173
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-198
Treatment 2 B
Change the setting values in U246 [Setting:
Change the setting value of [Three Fold] to
shift the tri-folding position (a) and change the A C A C
width of A and C. (Width of B remains
Left Right
unchanged.)
3-174
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-175
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
4 Maintenance
4-1 Precautions for the maintenance
(1) Precautions
Before disassembling the main unit, press the main power switch to turn the power off. Make sure that the
power lamp on the operation panel is off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Then, start the
disassembly.
When handling the PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. Make sure not to
damage the PWB.
If ICs are mounted on the PWB, do not touch them by hand or something charged with electrostatic.
Make sure to release the hook before disconnecting the connector with the hook.
Take care not to pinch up the wire and cable.
Use the original screws when reassembling the parts once disassembled.
If the types and the sizes of screws are not sure, refer to the parts list.
4-1
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4-2
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
120V/ 220-240V
4-3
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
120V/ 220-240V
4-4
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
(2) Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit
Execute the following maintenance modes after replacing the above maintenance kit.
Low-end model
High-end model
4-5
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Developer unit
4-6
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
MC roller
4-7
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-1
c
a
b
c
Figure 4-2
4-8
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-3
c d
Figure 4-4
4-9
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-5
Figure 4-6
c b
4-10
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-7
b
a
Figure 4-8
IMPORTANT
When replacing new feed roller, pickup roller or retard roller, be careful not to touch the roller surface.
c b
Figure 4-9
Execute the following setting after replacing the feed roller.
Clearing the maintenance counts (Execute maintenance mode U251): Clear
4-11
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-10
Figure 4-11
4-12
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
b b
Figure 4-12
IMPORTANT
When closing the inner cover (a), push in the A
part until the position of the lever (b) is same
level as both side covers.
Figure 4-13
4-13
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-14
4-14
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-15
Figure 4-16
4-15
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
c
1. Slide the MP feed roller holder (c) until
b
the hook (b) comes to visible.
Figure 4-17
4-16
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new MP retard roller or MP
feed roller, please be careful not to touch the
roller surface.
Figure 4-18
4-17
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-19
Note
Before removing the primary transfer unit (a), b
make sure that the pressure release lever (b)
comes close to the position (c) at the right
edge of the cover of the primary transfer unit.
c a
b
b
Figure 4-20
4-18
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-21
IMPORTANT
Make sure not to hit the transfer belt to the
inner cover (d) and maintenance front cover
(c).
d
c
Figure 4-22
4-19
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
a
b
Figure 4-23
b
a
Figure 4-24
Execute the following setting after replacing the primary transfer unit.
1. Primary transfer unit initial setting (Execute the maintenance mode U469): Belt Initialize
2. ID correction operation setting (Execute maintenance mode U464): Calib
3. Primary transfer unit initial setting (Execute the maintenance mode U469): Auto
4. Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410)
4-20
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
b
a c
b
c
b
c
Figure 4-25
4-21
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
b
c
Figure 4-27
Figure 4-28
4-22
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-29
Figure 4-30
4-23
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Note
Before removing the drum unit (a), make sure b
that the pressure release lever (b) comes close
to the position (c) at the right edge of the cover
of the primary transfer unit.
c a
b
b
Figure 4-31
b b
Figure 4-32
4-24
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
IMPORTANT
When closing the inner cover (a), push in the A
part until the position of the lever (b) is same
level as both side covers.
Figure 4-33
Figure 4-34
4-25
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5. Push up on the lock lever (a) and remove 35/40/50/60 ppm 25/32 ppm
the four drum units (b) (Y, C, M, K)
6. Attach the new drum units.
7. Reattach the parts in the original position.
a b b b
b
Figure 4-35
IMPORTANT
Make sure to pull out the lock shaft (b) of the a
developer unit when installing the drum unit
while the developer unit is installed. Otherwise,
it causes the drum damage. (High-end model
only)
Figure 4-36
4-26
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
After replacing the drum unit, close the cover and turn on the power.
Drum refresh will be executed automatically.
Please perform the below settings after "Ready" is displayed.
1. Drum unit initial setting (Execute maintenance mode U119): Execute (High-end models only)
2. Developer bias adjustment (Execute maintenance mode U140): AC Calib/Calibration (High end model
only)
3. ID correction operation setting (Execute maintenance mode U464): Calib
4. Primary transfer unit initial setting (Execute the maintenance mode U469): Auto
5. Adjusting the uneven density (maintenance mode U412): Normal Mode (High-end models only)
6. ID correction operation setting (Execute maintenance mode U464): Calib (High-end models only)
7. Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410)
Figure 4-37
4-27
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
IMPORTANT
1. When installing the main charger roller
unit (a), attach it to the drum unit (c) b
with the condition of the MC roller
release lever (b) released.
2. Insert the MC roller release lever (b) into
the opening and push down on part A and
make sure it clicks and locks in place. a
Figure 4-38
Figure 4-39
Execute the following setting after replacing the MC roller.
1. Clearing the main charger roller counts (maintenance mode U930): Clear
2. ID correction operation setting (Execute maintenance mode U464): Calib
3. Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410)
4-28
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-40
Figure 4-41
4-29
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
b b
Figure 4-42
b
b b
b
Figure 4-43
4-30
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
IMPORTANT
*: When installing the developer unit,
securely insert it by pressing the front
side pressing part (a).
Figure 4-44
Execute the following setting after replacing the developer unit.
1. ID correction operation setting (Execute maintenance mode U464): Calib
2. Primary transfer unit initial setting (Execute the maintenance mode U469): Auto
3. Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410)
Figure 4-45
4-31
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-46
b b
Figure 4-47
4-32
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
b b b b
a
Figure 4-48
IMPORTANT
*: When installing the developer unit,
securely insert it by pressing the front
side pressing part (a).
Figure 4-49
4-33
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-50
After replacing the developer unit, close the cover and turn on the power.
Developer unit auto aging correction, etc. will be executed.
Please perform the below settings after "Ready" is displayed.
1. Developer bias adjustment (Execute maintenance mode U140): AC Calib/Calibration
2. ID correction operation setting (Execute maintenance mode U464): Calib
3. Primary transfer unit initial setting (Execute the maintenance mode U469): Auto
4. Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410)
4-34
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-51
b b
a a
Figure 4-52
4-35
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
b
Figure 4-53
IMPORTANT
Insufficient lock will cause the phenomenon below when installing the fuser unit.
1. Back side lock failure
This will cause the C6600 fuser belt rotation failure without drive at the rear side.
2. Front side lock failure
This will cause a factor of image squareness failure due to skew feeding.
4-36
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(6-2) Adjusting the fuser unit height (Trailing edge skew image adjustment)
Procedures
1. Compare the trailing edge of the image between the original document and output document and check
the image length matching side (image front side or image rear side)
[Origin
nal]
P
Printing direc
ction
Output image
[O e A] [O
Output imagee B]
(Image front side is short) (Image rear side is short)
(Image front side) (Image rear side) (Image front side) (Image rear side)
Figure 4-54
Figure 4-55
4-37
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
b a a b
Figure 4-56
4. Loosen 2 screws (f) fixing the fuser positioning guide at the inner front frame.
5. Lift the fixing positioning guide (g) and move the fixing height adjustment lever (h) left and right.
[Shift amount reference] (Adjust based on the side with the correct image length)
• When front side of the image is short (Output image pattern A), relocate the fuser height adjust-
ment lever (h) toward the machine right side and lower the position of the fuser positioning guide
(g) by one step. The rear side of the image shrinks about 0.4 mm
• When rear side of the image is short (Output image pattern B), relocate the fuser height adjust-
ment lever (h) toward the machine left side and increase the position of the fuser positioning
guide (g) by one step. The rear side of the image extends about 0.5 mm
f
Machine left side
4-38
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(7) Others
(7-1) Detaching and reattaching the filter
Procedures
Rear upper filter
1. Push the lever (a) and remove the rear b
upper filter cover (b) and the rear upper
a
filter (c).
2. Clean or replace the upper rear filter and c
refit the filter.
Figure 4-58
4-39
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-59
Figure 4-60
4-40
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-61
c d
Figure 4-62
4-41
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-63
Figure 4-64
4-42
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
c b
Figure 4-65
b
a
Figure 4-66
IMPORTANT
When replacing new PF feed roller, PF pickup roller or PF retard roller, be careful not to touch the roller sur-
face.
4-43
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c b
Figure 4-67
4-44
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-68
Figure 4-69
4-45
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
b
a
Figure 4-70
Figure 4-71
4-46
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
a
Figure 4-72
Figure 4-73
4-47
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
c
b
Figure 4-74
IMPORTANT
When replacing new PF feed roller, PF pickup roller or PF retard roller, be careful not to touch the roller sur-
face.
4-48
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Pull out the deck.
2. Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and detach
the wire cover (b).
b
Figure 4-75
g
b
f
e
Figure 4-76
4-49
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-77
Figure 4-78
4-50
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Remove the PF feed unit (a).
c
2. Turn over the PF feed unit (a).
3. Remove the stop ring (c) from the PF
retard roller shaft (b). d
4. Pull out the spacer (d) from the PF retard
roller shaft and remove it.
*: Be careful not to drop the set pin when
removing the spacer
Figure 4-79
Figure 4-80
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new pickup holder or retard holder, take care not to touch the roller surface.
4-51
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-81
Figure 4-82
4-52
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover (a). a
2. Remove hook (b) and remove the DP
retard roller cover (c). b c
Figure 4-83
c
b
Figure 4-84
4-53
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-85
Figure 4-86
4-54
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-87
Figure 4-88
4-55
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover.
2. Detach the DP feed guide (a) and the DP
feed unit.
3. Release hook (a) and remove the DP
retard roller cover (b).
a
b
Figure 4-89
Figure 4-90
4-56
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Figure 4-91
Figure 4-92
4-57
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-93
Figure 4-94
4-58
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-95
4-59
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
1. Input "10871087" using the numeric keys to enter the maintenance mode.
2. Input "952" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
3. Select [Execute].
4. Select the maintenance kit to set.
5. Select the displayed maintenance modes from the top and press the [Start] key to enter the mainte-
nance mode.
6. After transition, execute the setting steps in the maintenance mode.
7. After executing, press the [Stop] key to go back to the original flow.
8. Repeat step 5, 6 and 7 and exit from the maintenance mode.
MK-8335A
MK-8335D MK-8335B
Start Start
MK-8515A MK-8335E
MK-8515B
U119 Setting the drum *1 U119 Setting the drum *1
(Execute) (Execute)
U412 Adjusting the uneven density *1 U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically
(Normal Mode)
4-60
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-96
Figure 4-97
4-61
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-98
c
d
Figure 4-99
4-62
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the
main unit (b) and remove it in the direc-
tion of the arrow. b
Figure 4-100
Figure 4-101
4-63
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
c
b
Figure 4-102
Figure 4-103
4-64
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b b
Figure 4-104
Figure 4-105
4-65
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-106
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-107
4-66
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-108
Figure 4-109
4-67
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
(1-8) Detaching and reattaching the top left cover/the rear left cover/the lower left
cover
Procedures
1. Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x8). b
2. Release two hooks (c) and remove the
left rear cover (b) in the direction of the
arrow.
a
Figure 4-110
Figure 4-111
4-68
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
b
a
c
b
c c c c
Figure 4-112
4-69
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-113
(1-10) Detaching and reattaching the rear right top cover / rear right bottom cover
Procedures
1. Detach the rear top cover.
2. Open the right cover. c
3. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).
4. Release the hook (b) and remove right
rear upper cover (c).
c
b
Figure 4-114
4-70
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-115
4-71
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
c
b d
Figure 4-116
b
c
d
Figure 4-117
4-72
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-118
4-73
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
d
a
c
Figure 4-119
4-74
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-120
4-75
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
a
c
Figure 4-121
Figure 4-122
4-76
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
g
Note when attaching; b
To attach the middle guide (a), insert the boss
(f) to the pin (e) which is reverse way of remov-
ing it and after that, insert it in both sides of the
d
hole (b).
b
e
Figure 4-123
4-77
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-124
Figure 4-125
4-78
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-126
Figure 4-127
4-79
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b b
Figure 4-128
Figure 4-129
4-80
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
a
b
Figure 4-130
Figure 4-131
4-81
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-132
b
a
a
Figure 4-133
4-82
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
c
b
d d
e e
Figure 4-134
c
b
c
b
Figure 4-135
4-83
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-136
Figure 4-137
4-84
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
b
a
c
b
c c c c
Figure 4-138
4-85
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
a
a
Figure 4-139
b
(High-end model) b
Disconnect two FFC connectors (b) and
the connector (c).
Figure 4-140
4-86
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-141
4-87
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
1. Primary transfer unit initial setting (Execute the maintenance mode U469)
(1)Input "469" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
(2)Select [Manual].
(3)Select [Print].
(4)Press the [Start] key to output the manual adjustment chart.
(5)Execute the following adjustment if the gap between V-1 and V-5 match scale position is 2 scales or more
for each color.
CV-1 CV-1
CV-5 CV-5
ࢧࣥࣉࣝ ࢧࣥࣉࣝ
Figure 4-142
(6)Open the front cover slightly and open the maintenance front cover.
(7)Rotate the hex hole (a) by using a hex wrench (5mm).
Direction of rotation
The gap between V-1 and V-5 match scale is 2 scales or more (sample 1): counter-clockwise
The gap between V-1 and V-5 match scale is -2 scales or more (sample 2): clockwise
Number of rotation
The gap between V-1 and V-5 match scale multiplied by 4 clicks.
(8)Close the front cover for the maintenance and the front cover.
(9)Output the adjustment chart to check it is within the range.
(10)Press the [Stop] key.
4-88
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a a a
b
a
Figure 4-143
2. Primary transfer unit initial setting (Execute the maintenance mode U469)
(1)Input "469" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
(2)Select [Auto].
*: Output the automatic adjustment chart.
(3)Select [Execute].
(4)Set the chart on the table and press the [Start] key.
*: Execute the automatic adjustment. When adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
(5)Press the [Stop] key.
3. Drum unit initial setting (Execute maintenance mode U119): Execute (Only high end Models)
(1)Input "119" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
(2)Select [Execute] and press the [Start] key.
*: Start the drum setup operation.
(3)Press the [Stop] key.
4-89
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5. Adjusting the uneven density (maintenance mode U412): Normal Mode (High-end models only)
(1)Input "412" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
(2)Select [Normal Mode].
(3)Press the [Start] key.
*: Output the test patter with the initial light intensity setting. (1st sheet)
(4)Set the test pattern 1 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.
(5)Press the [Start] key. Correction starts.
(6)Press the [Start] key after completing correction. Output the test pattern. (2nd sheet)
*: According to the test pattern of 1st sheet, output with -20% light intensity setting.
(7)Set the test pattern 1 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.
(8)Press the [Start] key. Correction starts.
(9)Press the [Start] key after completing correction. Output the test pattern. (3rd sheet)
(10)Set the test pattern 1 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.
(11)Press the [Start] key.
*: Check the correction result.[Finish] appears after normal completion. Display [Finish] .after normal com-
pletion.
(12)Press the [Stop] key.
6. ID correction operation setting (Execute maintenance mode U464): Calib (High-end models only)
(1)Input "464" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
(2)Select [Calib].
(3)Select [Execute] and press the [Start] key.
*: Calibration starts.
Press the [Stop] key.
Figure 4-144
4-90
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4-91
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-145
E
D
Figure 4-146
4-92
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-147
D
D
Figure 4-148
4-93
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-149
4-94
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a a
a b a
Figure 4-150
4-95
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
D b
Figure 4-151
Figure 4-152
4-96
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
E
D
Figure 4-153
Figure 4-154
4-97
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
a
Figure 4-155
a
b
Figure 4-156
4-98
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-157
4-99
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
g
f
h a
g
Figure 4-158
c
IMPORTANT
Use an air blower when cleaning the reflector,
light guide plate and diffusion sheet of the LED
mount Assy. Clean not to leave a hair dust.
Figure 4-159
4-100
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Detach the upper right cover.
2. Detach the ISU right cover.
3. Remove the contact glass.
b
a
Figure 4-160
4-101
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
b
Figure 4-161
Figure 4-162
4-102
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
g
f
h a
g
Figure 4-163
Figure 4-164
4-103
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d e
c
c
Figure 4-165
b
d c
Figure 4-166
4-104
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3 5
d d
Figure 4-167
4-105
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
4. Move the mirror frame B (a) to the position
shown in the figure, and insert the mirror
frame fixing tool (c) in the front and rear
b
positioning holes (b), and fix the position
of the mirror frame B (a)
c
Figure 4-168
(1)Hang the scanner wire (a) on the outside of the main unit in the groove on the outside of the pulley (b) of
the mirror frame B from above.
*: Pass through the scanner wire outside of the positioning pin.
(2)Hang the round terminal (c) on the hook (d) inside the scanner unit
(3)Hang the scanner wire (e) on the inside of the main unit in the groove of the left side pulley (f) of the scan-
ner unit from below.
*: Pass through the scanner wire under the mirror frame B (j)
(4)Wind the scanner wires around the inside grooves in the pulleys (b) of the mirror frame B from below to
above.
(5)Hang it on the pulley (g) on the left side of the scanner unit
(6)Hook the round terminals (h) to the scanner wire springs (i).
(7)Apply the procedures 1 through 6 to another scanner wires.
4-106
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
hg
i
b
i
h
f
g
c
d
a
f
c
d e
a
b
i e
h
g
j
b e
d
LQQHU
c a
outer
Figure 4-169
4-107
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
c h
b
a
a h
b
Figure 4-170
4-108
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-171
4-109
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
c
YC10
YC9
YC1
YC11
YC6
YC2
YC3
YC7
YC4
YC5
Figure 4-172
a
a
b a
a
a a
Figure 4-173
4-110
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(3-2) Detaching and reattaching the main drive unit (Low-end models)
Procedures
1. Remove one screw (a)(M3x10) and
slide the rear top cover (b) in the direc-
a
tion of the arrow.
Figure 4-174
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-175
4-111
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-176
b c
Figure 4-177
4-112
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
36
YC
21
YC
1 9
YC 25
YC
2
Y C2
17
YC
6
YC
33
YC 30
28 YC
24 YC
YC 32
YC C1
Y
23
a YC
2
YC
29
YC
YC
35
3
YC
a
(b: )
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-178
b
a
Figure 4-179
4-113
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
IMPORTANT a
When attempting to detach the main drive unit
without removing the waste toner joint (a), the
1
sensor cleaning sprint inside the joint might 2
deform and the waste toner full might be mis-
detected. c
Before removing the main drive unit, please b
make sure to pull out the waste toner joint (a)
to the front.
Figure 4-180
a
a
a
b
a
a b a
a
a a a
Figure 4-181
4-114
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(3-3) Detaching and reattaching the main drive unit (High-end models)
Procedures
1. Remove one screw (a)(M3x10) and
detach the rear top cover (b) by sliding
a
it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 4-182
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-183
4-115
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-184
b c
Figure 4-185
4-116
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
36
YC
21
YC
19
YC 25
YC
2 2
YC
17
YC
6
YC
33
YC 30
4 28 YC
Y C2 32 YC
YC 1
YC
23
a YC
2
YC
29
YC
YC
35
3
YC
a
(b: )
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC37
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-186
4-117
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
a
Figure 4-187
IMPORTANT a
When attempting to detach the main drive unit
without removing the waste toner joint (a), the
sensor cleaning sprint inside the joint might 1 2
deform and the waste toner full might be mis-
detected. c
Before removing the main drive unit, please b
make sure to pull out the waste toner joint (a)
to the front.
Figure 4-188
4-118
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
a
b
a
a b a
a
a a a
Figure 4-189
Figure 4-190
4-119
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-191
Figure 4-192
4-120
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-193
Figure 4-194
4-121
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
b
Figure 4-195
d
b
Figure 4-196
4-122
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
c
Figure 4-197
a
Figure 4-198
4-123
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
15. Lift up the shield box (a) and pull it, and
then release the hooks (b). a
16. Open the shield box (a).
b
Note
When doing some work on the back bottom
side of the main unit with the shield box open,
please be careful not to hit your head against
the shield box.
Figure 4-199
Figure 4-200
4-124
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-201 b a
4-125
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-202
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-203
4-126
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Figure 4-204
Figure 4-205
4-127
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-206
c
b
Figure 4-207
4-128
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
b
Figure 4-208
b
c
Figure 4-209
4-129
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
Figure 4-210
15. Lift up the shield box (a) and pull it, and
a
then release the hooks (b).
16. Open the shield box (a).
b
Note
When doing some work on the back bottom
side of the main unit with the shield box open,
please be careful not to hit your head against
the shield box.
Figure 4-211
4-130
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
d c
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC37
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-212
a
d
Figure 4-213
4-131
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
IMPORTANT
When attaching the transfer terminal cover (a),
make sure that the rib (b) is between two termi-
nals. (8 locations)
c
Figure 4-214
Figure 4-215
4-132
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b c
Figure 4-216
36
YC
21
YC
19
YC 25
YC
2
Y C2
17
YC
6
YC
33
YC 30
28 YC
24 YC
YC 3 2
YC 1
YC
23
a YC
2
YC
29
YC
YC
35
3
YC
a
(b: )
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC37
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-217
4-133
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
a
Figure 4-218
IMPORTANT a
When attempting to detach the main drive unit
without removing the waste toner joint (a), the
sensor cleaning sprint inside the joint might 1 2
deform and the waste toner full might be mis-
detected. c
Before removing the main drive unit, please b
make sure to pull out the waste toner joint (a)
to the front.
Figure 4-219
4-134
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
a
b
a
a b a
a
a a a
Figure 4-220
b b
1 1
a a
c
2
Figure 4-221
4-135
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
b a
a a a
b
Figure 4-222
4-136
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-223
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-224
4-137
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-225
Figure 4-226
4-138
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-227
c
b
Figure 4-228
4-139
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
b
Figure 4-229
b
c
Figure 4-230
4-140
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
Figure 4-231
15. Lift up the shield box (a) and pull it, and
then release the hooks (b). a
16. Open the shield box (a).
b
Note
When doing some work on the back bottom
side of the main unit with the shield box open,
please be careful not to hit your head against
the shield box.
Figure 4-232
4-141
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
c
Figure 4-233
c
a
Figure 4-234
4-142
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
d c
b
Figure 4-235
4-143
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
(4) Others
(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the SSD
Procedures
1. Remove one screw (a)(M3x10) and
detach the rear top cover (b) by sliding
a
it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 4-236
c
a
b
Figure 4-237
4-144
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
IMPORTANT
To avoid damage when attaching the SSD (b), align the screw hole (d) to the positioning boss (e).
Please do not replace the main PWB, engine PWB and SSD at the same time.
SSD replacement procedures when the SSD replacement is indicated.
*: Data transfer by U026 is not available since data cannot be read when SSD is broken or it is in Read
Only mode.
Procedures
Preparation: 2 USB memory (for storing firmware and data backup)
Before operating, perform data backup in U917.
(1)Store the firmware in a USB memory (USB memory A)
1. Store the newest firmware upgrade pack or set of the released firmware (Main /MMI /Panel Main/
BROWSER /DICTIONARY /Language /OCR /Color Table) in a USB memory.
*: Check the firmware applicable to the target model. Operation becomes unstable if firmware not covered
is included
In order to reboot, at least the main FW is required.
4-145
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4-2) Detaching and reattaching the hard disk: Except Low-end models (100V, 220-
240V model)
Procedures
1. Remove one screw (a)(M3x10) and
detach the rear top cover (b) by sliding
a
it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 4-238
b
b
c
b
Figure 4-239
4-146
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
IMPORTANT
When disconnecting the connector of the hard
disk (a), please be careful not to apply the
force on the battery of the main PWB (b).
There is a danger of damage to the terminal if
a force is applied b
Figure 4-240
a
Figure 4-241
*: Execute maintenance mode U024 (See pageP.6-31) when formatting a new HDD.
4-147
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
IMPORTANT
When installing the HDD (a), hold it without a
touching the PWB side (b) to avoid damage.
a
b
Figure 4-242
4-148
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the
main unit (c) and remove it in the direc- c
tion of the arrow.
2. Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the
main unit (c) and remove it in the direction a
of the arrow.
Figure 4-243
c
a
b
c
Figure 4-244
4-149
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-245
a
b b
c
B
b
b b
b
b b c
b
Figure 4-246
4-150
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
e b
c
Figure 4-247
In case of the lower (B)
(1)When attaching the lift motor, remove the B db
film (b) affixed to the old lift motor (a), dis-
connect the connector (c) and remove the a
wire (d).
*: The film (b) can not be used in the new lift
motor. c
(2)Connect the connector (c) of the wire (d)
once disconnected to the new lift motor (e).
*: Don't fix the wire (d) in the hook (f).
f
e d
Figure 4-248
A
a
B a
Figure 4-249
4-151
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Open the right cover (a) of the main unit
b
(b).
Figure 4-250
b b
a a
Figure 4-251
4-152
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
a
c
a
b
a
Figure 4-252
After replacing the fuser discharge needle unit and IH unit, please perform the below settings.
(Clear the fuser counter value (correction))
Fuser counter clear (Execute the maintenance mode U167): Correction
4-153
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-253
b
c
b
b b
Figure 4-254
(4-6) Detaching and reattaching the waste toner box unit: Low-end models
4-154
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
*: Remove the toner containers (a) (Y,M,C,K) while the power is on.
*: If the container cover (b) is locked, execute maintenance mode U033 to activate the container solenoid
and to open the container cover.
a
b
Figure 4-255
Figure 4-256
4-155
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
a
b
c
Figure 4-257
Figure 4-258
4-156
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-259
c
b
a
Figure 4-260
4-157
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-261
c
d
Figure 4-262
4-158
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-263
Figure 4-264
4-159
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b b
Figure 4-265
Figure 4-266
4-160
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
a
b c
b
b
b c b b
Figure 4-267
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-268
4-161
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-269
IMPORTANT
When connecting the connector, please wire
so that there is a margin in the wire (a).
Please be careful that the waste toner box
detection error or waste toner full detection
error in the early stage may appear if the waste
toner box unit is strained with the wiring. a
Figure 4-270
4-162
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
IMPORTANT
When attempting to detach the waste toner a
box unit without removing the waste toner joint
(a), the sensor cleaning sprint inside the joint
1
might deform and the waste toner full might be 2
mis-detected.
Before removing the waste toner box unit, c
make sure to pull the waste toner joint (a) in b
front and release.
Figure 4-271
a b
Figure 4-272
4-163
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
a
a
Figure 4-273
a b a
a
a
a
a a
a a
a b
a
a
Figure 4-274
4-164
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-275
d
d
Figure 4-276
4-165
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
c
Figure 4-277
Figure 4-278
4-166
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
b
a
c
b
c c c c
Figure 4-279
Figure 4-280
4-167
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
a
Figure 4-281
Execute the following settings after replacing the waste toner box unit.
Waste toner box weight detection calibration (execute maintenance mode U155): calibration
Figure 4-282
Procedures
1. After replacing the waste toner box unit (A), turn the power on without installing the waste toner box.
2. Select the maintenance mode U155 and close the waste toner box cover.
3. Select [Calibration] and confirm [None] indicated next to [Waste Toner]. Press the [Start] key.
4. Check if "OK" appears next to [Execute].
4-168
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-283
6. Press [Waste Toner] and check if "None" is changed to "Empty". Then, press [Execute] --> the [Start] key.
7. The value next to [None / Empty] is updated and confirm the [OK] display next to [Execute]
*: If numbers (error code) is indicated next to [Execute], redo from the first step.
4-169
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4-7) Detaching and reattaching the waste toner box unit: High-end models
*: Remove the toner containers (a) (Y,M,C,K) while the power is on.
*: If the container cover (b) is locked, execute maintenance mode U033 to activate the container solenoid
and to open the container cover.
a
b
Figure 4-284
Figure 4-285
4-170
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
a
b
c
Figure 4-286
Figure 4-287
4-171
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-288
c
b
Figure 4-289
4-172
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-290
c
d
Figure 4-291
4-173
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Figure 4-292
Figure 4-293
4-174
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b b
Figure 4-294
Figure 4-295
4-175
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
b c
b
b
b c b b
Figure 4-296
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-297
4-176
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Figure 4-298
IMPORTANT
When connecting the connector, please wire
so that there is a margin in the wire (a).
Please be aware and note that if the toner box
unit is pulled by wiring, unnecessary misdetec-
tion or early full misdetection
a
Figure 4-299
4-177
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
IMPORTANT
When attempting to detach the waste toner a
box unit without removing the waste toner joint
(a), the sensor cleaning sprint inside the joint
1
might deform and the waste toner full might be 2
mis-detected.
Before removing the waste toner box unit, c
make sure to pull the waste toner joint (a) in b
front and release.
Figure 4-300
a b
Figure 4-301
4-178
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
a
a
b
Figure 4-302
a b a
a
a
a
a a
a a
a b
a
a
Figure 4-303
4-179
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
d
d d
a
Figure 4-304
b
c
Figure 4-305
4-180
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Figure 4-306
4-181
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
b
a
c
b
c c c c
Figure 4-307
Figure 4-308
4-182
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
a
Figure 4-309
After replacing new waste toner box unit, please perform the below settings.
Waste toner box weight detection calibration (execute maintenance mode U155): calibration
Figure 4-310
Procedures
1. After replacing the waste toner box unit (A), turn the power on without installing the waste toner box.
2. Select the maintenance mode U155 and close the waste toner box cover.
3. Select [Calibration] and confirm [None] indicated next to [Waste Toner]. Press the [Start] key.
4. Check if "OK" appears next to [Execute].
4-183
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-311
6. Press [Waste Toner] and check if "None" is changed to "Empty". Then, press [Execute] --> the [Start] key.
7. The value next to [None / Empty] is updated and confirm the [OK] display next to [Execute]
*: If numbers (error code) is indicated next to [Execute], redo from the first step.
4-184
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
k
c
a
j
h
i
Figure 4-312
High-end model
k c
m
l
a
j o
g h
f
e b
d i
Figure 4-313
4-185
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5) PWBs
(5-1) Detaching and reattaching the engine PWB (Low-end models)
Procedures
1. Remove one screw (a)(M3x10) and
detach the rear top cover (b) by sliding
a
it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 4-314
4-186
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
YC1
YC6
YC36 YC29
YC16 YS15 YC38
YC43
YC35
YC42
YC31
YC40
Figure 4-315
b b
Figure 4-316
4-187
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
b
YS1
YS1
b
a a
Figure 4-317
4-188
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-318
4-189
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC1
YC29 YC6
YC36
YC16 YS1 YC38
YC43
YC35
YC42
YC31
YC40
YC34
YC9 YC10 YC4 YC27 YC21 YC22
Figure 4-319
b b
Figure 4-320
4-190
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
YS1
b
YC39 YC33
YC34
YC4 YC27
a
a
Figure 4-321
4-191
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Figure 4-322
(Step 2 to 3: Only the model that IB-35 is installed)
b
IMPORTANT
When disconnecting the connector (a) from the
main PWB (b), pull straight out against the
main PWB (b) and do not pull out diagonally. a
c
If it is pulled slantwise it will cause damage to
FPC (f)
d e
Figure 4-323
4-192
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
d
c
a
c
YC2
YC1
Figure 4-324
4-193
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
b
b
a b
b
YC6
YC59 YC11 YC63 YC9
YC58
YC12 YC8
YC43
YC5
YC10
YC2
YC51
YC33
YC32 YC42
Figure 4-325
YC23
4-194
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
(1)Input "004" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
(2)Select [Execute] and press the [Start] key.
(3)Turn the power switch off / on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
4-195
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-326
4-196
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5-4) Detaching and reattaching the main high voltage PWB (Low-end models)
Procedures
1. Remove one screw (a)(M3x10) and
detach the rear top cover (b) by sliding
a
it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 4-327
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-328
4-197
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
b a
Figure 4-329
4-198
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c d
d
e d
c
e e
b
b a
b
b
b
c
e
Figure 4-330
4-199
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5-5) Detaching and reattaching the main high voltage PWB (High-end models)
Procedures
1. Remove one screw (a)(M3x10) and
detach the rear top cover (b) by sliding
a
it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 4-331
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-332
4-200
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
b a
Figure 4-333
4-201
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c d
d
e d
c
e e
b
b a
b
b
b
c
e
Figure 4-334
4-202
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-335
Figure 4-336
4-203
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-337
Figure 4-338
4-204
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
b
Figure 4-339
d
b
Figure 4-340
4-205
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
c
Figure 4-341
a
Figure 4-342
4-206
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
13. Lift up the shield box (a) and pull it, and
then release the hooks (b). a
14. Open the shield box (a).
b
Note
When doing some work on the back bottom
side of the main unit with the shield box open,
please be careful not to hit your head against
the shield box.
Figure 4-343
4-207
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
d c
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC37
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-344
a
d
Figure 4-345
4-208
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
IMPORTANT
When attaching the transfer terminal cover (a),
make sure that the rib (b) is between two termi-
nals. (8 locations)
c
Figure 4-346
c
a
Figure 4-347
4-209
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5-7) Detaching and reattaching the low voltage PWB (Low-end models)
Procedures
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-348
a
a
b a
Figure 4-349
4-210
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
d
Figure 4-350
IMPORTANT
When attaching the MP feed roller holder (c),
make sure to hook it to two lancing positions.
a
Figure 4-351
4-211
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c d
d
e d
c
e e
b
b a
b
b
b
c
e
Figure 4-352
4-212
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
b
Figure 4-353
a
a
b
b
a
Figure 4-354
4-213
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
b
a
YC8
YC2 YC9 YC7 YC6 YC5
YC1
TB1 TB2
TB3
YC4
Figure 4-355
4-214
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5-8) Detaching and reattaching the low voltage PWB (High-end models)
Procedures
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-356
4-215
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
b a
Figure 4-357
a
d
Figure 4-358
4-216
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
IMPORTANT
When attaching the MP feed roller holder (c),
make sure to hook it to two lancing positions.
a
Figure 4-359
4-217
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
c d
d
e d
c
e e
b
b a
b
b
b
c
e
Figure 4-360
4-218
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
b
a
Figure 4-361
a
a
b
b
a
Figure 4-362
4-219
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
b
a
b
YC2
YC9 YC6
YC8 YC7 YC5
YC3
YC1
TB1 TB2
TB3
YC4
Figure 4-363
4-220
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Figure 4-364
f
e
Figure 4-365
4-221
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b a
Figure 4-366
Figure 4-367
4-222
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-368
Figure 4-369
4-223
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-370
b a
Figure 4-371
4-224
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-372
a
a
Figure 4-373
4-225
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
a
a
a
Figure 4-374
4-226
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
b
2
a
Figure 4-375
4-227
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
d
c
Figure 4-376
Figure 4-377
4-228
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-378
b
c
d
Figure 4-379
4-229
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-380
b a
a
c
Figure 4-381
4-230
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC9
YC11
YC8
YC6
YC4
YC7
YC2
YC5
YC3 YC1
YC10
Figure 4-382
4-231
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a c a
a
a
Figure 4-383
4-232
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
c
c
c
c
Figure 4-384
Figure 4-385
4-233
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
b
a
c
b
b
b b
b c
Figure 4-386
4-234
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-387
a c a
a
a
Figure 4-388
4-235
3. Disconnect all the connectors from the PF
PWB (a).
4. Remove two screws (b) (M3x8) and
detach the PF PWB (a).
5. Inspect or replace the PF PWB (a), and
then reattach the removed parts.
b
a
YC11 YC10
YC9
YC4
YC2 YC1
YC6
YC12
YC14
YC8 YC13
YC3 YC5
Figure 4-389
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c a
a
a
Figure 4-390
b
b a
b
b
Figure 4-391
4-237
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-392
a b
a
Figure 4-393
4-238
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
b
b b
Figure 4-394
c a
a
a
Figure 4-395
4-239
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
b
b a
b
b
Figure 4-396
b a
b c
Figure 4-397
4-240
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b d
b
b
Figure 4-398
c
b
Figure 4-399
4-241
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
c a
a
a
Figure 4-400
b a
b
YC11 YC10
YC9
YC4
YC2 YC1
YC6
YC12
YC14
YC8 YC13
YC3 YC5
Figure 4-401
4-242
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Remove 4 screws (a) (M3x8).
2. Remove the PF rear cover (c) from the
paper feeder (b).
a
a
a
Figure 4-402
b a
a
c c
Figure 4-403
4-243
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
b
b
Figure 4-404
Procedures
1. Remove 4 screws (a) (M3x8).
2. Remove the PF rear cover (c) from the
paper feeder (b).
a
a
a
Figure 4-405
4-244
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
d
d
d
c d a
e
Figure 4-406
Figure 4-407
4-245
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
a
Figure 4-408
YC12 YC11
YC14
YC17
YC5
YC15
YC2
YC8 YC4
YC10
YC7
YC13
YC16 YC1
YC18 YC3 YC6
Figure 4-409
4-246
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-410
Figure 4-411
4-247
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-412
Figure 4-413
4-248
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-414
Figure 4-415
4-249
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-416
c
b
Figure 4-417
4-250
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-418
Figure 4-419
4-251
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-420
Figure 4-421
4-252
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-422
Figure 4-423
4-253
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-424
Figure 4-425
4-254
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-426
Figure 4-427
4-255
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
Figure 4-428
Figure 4-429
4-256
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-430
c b
c
Figure 4-431
4-257
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
Figure 4-432
Figure 4-433
4-258
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
c
c
Figure 4-434
b
c
Figure 4-435
4-259
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
Figure 4-436
b
c
Figure 4-437
4-260
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
Figure 4-438
Figure 4-439
4-261
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
c
Figure 4-440
a
a
Figure 4-441
4-262
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-442
Figure 4-443
4-263
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-444
4-264
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-446
Figure 4-447
4-265
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
Figure 4-448
Figure 4-449
4-266
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-450
a
b b
Figure 4-451
4-267
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-452
b c
c
Figure 4-453
4-268
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-454
a
a
Figure 4-455
4-269
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
c
Figure 4-456
Figure 4-457
4-270
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
Figure 4-458
a
c
Figure 4-459
4-271
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
d
a
a
a c
a
Figure 4-460
Figure 4-461
4-272
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-462
Figure 4-463
4-273
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-464
a b
Figure 4-465
4-274
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC7
YC16
YC3
original position.
b
a b b
Figure 4-466
4-275
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 4-467
Figure 4-468
4-276
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
b
b
Figure 4-469
Figure 4-470
4-277
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-471
a a
Figure 4-472
4-278
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
c
a
b
Figure 4-473
4-279
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
a
b
Figure 4-474
Figure 4-475
4-280
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
b
b
Figure 4-476
Figure 4-477
4-281
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-478
Figure 4-479
4-282
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5. Disconnect all the connectors from the YC3 YC12 YC18 YC17 YC16
YC19
a
b
b b
Figure 4-480
4-283
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
4-284
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
2 MIRROR A/B/C -------- CL Clean only when the image failure (streaks) occurs (use air blower after cleaning by the dry
cloth)
3 LENS ISU -------- CL Clean only when the image failure (streaks) occurs (use air blower after cleaning by the dry
cloth)
4 PARTS MOUNT LED ASSY SP 302ND93120 CL Replace when the image failure occurs
RE
5 RAIL ISU R/F -------- LU Apply grease only when the abnormal sound, blur, etc. occurs
Grease to the optical rail: PG-671(P/N: 6017000)
6 SENSOR OPT. 7NXPS181EL1M CH Clean by the alcohol or dry cloth only when the error occurs (Sensor transmitter and receiver
H01 only)
CL
7 PARTS ISU 302ND93110 CH Replace when the image failure occurs
RE
F <Drive and other section>
1 CLUTCHS -------- CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition on registration and paper feed section.
RE
2 SENSORS -------- CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH Use dry cloth or air blower to the light reception surface of the photo sensor.
3 Each gears -------- CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH In case if there is abnormal sound, apply EM-50 LP coating to teeth
LU (PN 7BG010009H GREASE MOLYKOTE EM-50LP 50G)
G <MP tray>
1 PULLEY PAPER FEED 302ND94380 CL CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CL: Alcohol or dry cloth (If no replacement)
RE RE RE RE RE RE RE RE CH: Performing U901 and check feeding count : Target to replace at 150K.
4-285
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
*:If replaced when checking, go back to the original maintenance procedure at the next maintenance If not replaced when checking, check again at the next maintenance
4-286
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
(1-2)High-end model
4-287
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
3 LENS ISU -------- CL Clean only when the image failure (streaks) occurs (use air blower after cleaning by the dry
cloth)
4 PARTS MOUNT LED ASSY SP 302ND93120 CL Replace when the image failure occurs
2ND93120 RE
5 RAIL ISU R/F -------- LU Apply grease only when the abnormal sound, blur, etc. occurs
Grease to the optical rail: PG-671(P/N: 6017000)
6 SENSOR OPT. 7NXPS181EL1M CH Clean by the alcohol or dry cloth only when the error occurs (Sensor transmitter and receiver
H01 only)
CL
7 PARTS ISU 302ND93110 CH Replace when the image failure occurs
2ND93110 RE
F <Drive and other section>
1 CLUTCHS -------- CH CH CH CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition on registration and paper feed section.
RE
2 SENSORS -------- CH CH CH CH CH Use dry cloth or air blower to the light reception surface of the photo sensor.
3 Each gears -------- CH CH CH CH CH In case if there is abnormal sound, apply EM-50 LP coating to teeth
LU (PN 7BG010009H GREASE MOLYKOTE EM-50LP 50G)
G <MP tray>
1 PULLEY PAPER FEED 302ND94380 CL CH CH CH CH CL: Alcohol or dry cloth (If no replacement)
RE RE RE RE CH: Performing U901 and check feeding count : Target to replace at 150K.
2 PULLEY SEPARATION 302F909171 CL CH CH CH CH CL: Alcohol or dry cloth (If no replacement)
RE RE RE RE CH: Performing U901 and check feeding count : Target to replace at 150K.
*:If replaced when checking, go back to the original maintenance procedure at the next maintenance If not replaced when checking, check again at the next maintenance
4-288
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2) Option
(2-1)DP-7100
4-289
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
*:If replaced when checking, go back to the original maintenance procedure at the next maintenance If not replaced when checking, check again at the next maintenance
4-290
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-2)DP-7110
CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
4-291
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
E <Table Section>
1 SENSOR OPT. 7NXPSR11GD6F CL CL CL CL CL CL: Blower brush or dry cloth
H01
F <Other section>
1 PLATE ORIGINAL 303JC04201 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3JC04201
G <CIS Section>
1 PARTS ROLLER CIS SP ------ CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
2 GLASS CIS ------ CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol or dry cloth (Prohibit to use water)
*:If replaced when checking, go back to the original maintenance procedure at the next maintenance If not replaced when checking, check again at the next maintenance
4-292
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-3)DP-7120
(X5) 3M824220
D <Conveying and Reversing section>
1 ROLLER CONVEYING A 303M824050 CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3M824050
2 PULLEY CONVEYING BK 303M824210 CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X5 3M824210
3 ROLLER CONVEYING B 303M824060 CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3M824060
4 PULLEY CONVEYING BK 303M824210 CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X5 3M824210
5 ROLLER LOOP 303M829100 CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3M829100
6 PULLEY CONVEYING BK 303M824210 CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X4 3M824210
7 ROLLER EXIT 303M828010 CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3M828010
4-293
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
*:If replaced when checking, go back to the original maintenance procedure at the next maintenance If not replaced when checking, check again at the next maintenance
4-294
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-4)PF-7100
*:If replaced when checking, go back to the original maintenance procedure at the next maintenance If not replaced when checking, check again at the next maintenance
4-295
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-5)PF-7110
CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
*:If replaced when checking, go back to the original maintenance procedure at the next maintenance If not replaced when checking, check again at the next maintenance
4-296
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-6)PF-7120
CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
*:If replaced when checking, go back to the original maintenance procedure at the next maintenance If not replaced when checking, check again at the next maintenance
4-297
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-7)AK-7100
CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
*:If replaced when checking, go back to the original maintenance procedure at the next maintenance If not replaced when checking, check again at the next maintenance
4-298
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-8)DF-7100
CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
4-299
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
*:If replaced when checking, go back to the original maintenance procedure at the next maintenance If not replaced when checking, check again at the next maintenance
4-300
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-9)DF-7110
4-301
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
*:If replaced when checking, go back to the original maintenance procedure at the next maintenance If not replaced when checking, check again at the next maintenance
4-302
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-10)DF-7120
4-303
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
*:If replaced when checking, go back to the original maintenance procedure at the next maintenance If not replaced when checking, check again at the next maintenance
4-304
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5 Firmware
5-1 Firmware update
Execute when upgrading the below firmware
*: Parallel process can be done by each group to reduce processing time.
[GROUP1 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
step
1 Controller firmware DL_CTRL.2ND(high) CTRL
DL_CTRL.2RL(low)
2 Panel data DL_PANL.2ND PANL
3 Optional language data DL_OPT.2ND OPT
4 Dictionary data DL_DIC.2ND DIC
5 Browser data DL_BRWS.2ND BRWS
6 Color table 1 data (Printer) DL_PCLT1.2ND P-CLUT1
7 Color table 2 data (Printer) DL_PCLT2.2ND P-CLUT2
8 Color table 1 data (Copy) DL_CCLT1.2ND C-CLUT1
9 Color table 2 data (Copy) DL_CCLT2.2ND C-CLUT2
10 OCR dictionary data DL_OCR.2ND OCR
[GROUP2 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
step
1 Slot 1 FAX firmware DL_FAX.3R2 FAX1
2 Slot 2 FAX firmware DL_FAX.3R2 FAX2
[GROUP3 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
step
1 INNER PUNCH DL_03RF.2ND INNER-PU
2 MAIL BOX DL_03N0.2ND MAIL-BOX
3 BOOKLET DL_03ND.2ND BOOKLET
4 PUNCH UNIT DL_03NK.2RH P-UNIT
5 4000-sheets DF DL_03RW.2ND DF
1000-sheets DF
INNER DF DL_03ND.2ND INNER-DF
6 DP DL_03R7.2ND DP-REV
DL_03R8.2ND DP-CIS
DL_03RJ.2ND DP-LOW
7 A4 Side Paper Feeder DL_03RL.2ND PF-SIDE
8 3000-sheets PF DL_03RB.2ND PF-UNDER
500 sheets x 2PF
5-1
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[GROUP5 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
step
1 Panel firmware DL_SPNL.2ND SPNL
5-2
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5-3
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Preparations
Unzip the file containing the downloaded firmware and then copy the firmware and high-speed master file
(skip files: ES_SKIP.ON) in the root folder of the USB memory.
*: If the high-speed master file exists, skip to update the same version of the firmware.
Procedures
1. Push the power switch (a) to turn on the
power.
2. Push the power switch (a) to turn off the
power.
3. Insert the USB memory (b) with the firm-
ware into the USB memory slot (c).
4. Push the power switch (a) to turn on the
power.
c
b
Figure 5-1
䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 FW -U PD ATE䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢
5. [FW-UPDATE] and the progress indicator
䢢
is displayed. &75/ 0$,/%2;
䢢 3$1/
*: Several kinds of firmware updates are 237
%22./(7
䢢 381,7
processed simultaneously. ',& ')
䢢 %5:6
,11(5')
䢢 3&/87 '35(9
3&/87 '3&,6
䢢
&&/87 '3/2:
䢢 &&/87 3)6,'(
2&5 3)81'(5
䢢
)$; (1*1
)$; 631/
,11(538
Figure 5-2
Figure 5-3
5-4
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Note
Please do not turn off the power or remove the USB memory (b) while updating.
Figure 5-4
5-5
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Safe-Update
In case if the firmware update was interrupted by power shut-off or removing the USB memory during the
firmware update, the firmware update will be retried at the next power-on.
Turn the main power switch on without removing the USB memory.
*: The firmware update that was already completed before power shut-down will be skipped.
5-6
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6 Maintenance mode
6-1 Maintenance mode
Service mode for the main unit maintenance and repair is equipped.
Start
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
Enter 001 using the [▲] [▼] keys
or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.
End
6-1
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-2
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
U099 Original size detection setting Check the operation of the original size detec-
tion and set detection threshold
High volt- U100 Main high voltage adjustment Adjust the drum surface potential
age sec-
U101 Primary transfer voltage adjustment Setting and outputting the primary transfer volt-
tion
age
U106 Secondary transfer voltage adjust- Set the secondary transfer voltage correction
ment value
U107 Primary transfer cleaning voltage Set the transfer belt cleaning voltage
adjustment
U108 Separation Shift bias adjustment Set control voltage of the transfer belt unit clean-
ing
U110 Drum counter Display the drum counter
U117 Drum unit number Display the drum number
U118 Drum unit history Display the drum history
U119 Drum unit initial setting Set the initial LSU light intensity
U120 Drum drive distance counter Display the drum drive distance counter
U122 Primary transfer unit number Display the primary transfer unit number
U123 Primary transfer unit history Display the machine number and the primary
transfer unit counter history
U127 Clearing the transfer count Display the transfer counter value
U128 Transfer timing adjustment Adjust the transfer high-voltage output ON/OFF
timing
Devel- U131 Toner sensor control voltage adjust- Adjust the toner sensor control voltage
oper sec- ment
tion
U132 Forcible toner supply operation Execute the toner supply in the toner control
level
U135 Checking the toner motor operation Drive the toner motor
U136 Toner level detection setting Set the number of pages printable at toner near
end
U139 Temperature, humidity Display the machine inside and outside humidity
6-3
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
6-4
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
6-5
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-6
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-7
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
6-8
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Output the list of the current settings of maintenance modes, and occurrence condition of paper
jam or service call error. Output the event log and the service status page.
Also, send output data to a USB memory.
Purpose
Check the current settings of maintenance modes, and occurrence condition of paper jam and
service call error.
When initializing or replacing the backup memory, output the list of the current settings of mainte-
nance modes beforehand as it is necessary to re-enter the settings after initialization or replace-
ment.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to output.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-9
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Event Log
MFP XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TASKalfa 6052ci (2) 2016/03/19 15:15
(1) Firmware version 2ND_2000.001.133 2016.02.02 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
(3) (4) (5)
(6 )Machine No.:Z2C5Y00100 (7) Life Count:100000
Figure 6-5
6-10
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Event Log
MFP XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TASKalfa 6052ci 2016/03/19 15:15
Firmware version 2ND_2000.001.133 2016.02.02 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Figure 6-6
6-11
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Contents
(1) System version
(2) System date
(3) Engine firmware version
(4) Engine boot version
(5) Operation panel firmware version
(6) Machine serial number
(7) Total life counter
(8) Paper Jam Log
# Count. Event Descriptions Date and
Time
Record 1 to 16 occurrence The total page count at the Log code ( 5 types in hexa- Date and
If number of the past paper time of paper jam. decimal) time of
jam occurrence is less occur-
than 16, all of them are (a) Cause of paper jam rence
described. It will be deleted (b) Paper source
from the old log if it (c) Paper size
exceeds 16 times (d) Paper type
(e) Output location
(a)Detail of Cause of paper jam (Hexadecimal)
Refer to "2-2 Paper Misfeed Detection", for the detail of Cause of paper jam. (P.7-
133)
(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)
00: MP tray
01: Cassette 1
02: Cassette 2 (paper feeder)
03: Cassette 3 (paper feeder)
04: Cassette 4 (paper feeder)
05: Cassette 5 (paper feeder)
06 to 09: Reserved
(c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal)
00: Not specified 0B: B4 22: Special 1
01: Monarch 0C: Ledger 23: Special 2
02: Business 0D: A5R 24: A3 Wide
03: International DL 0E: A6 25: Ledger Wide
04: International C5 0F: B6 26: Full bleed paper(12 x
05: Executive 10: Commercial #9 8)
06: Letter-R 11: Commercial #6 27: 8K
86: Letter-E 12: ISO B5 28: 16K-R
07: Legal 13: Custom size A8: 16K-E
08: A4R 1E: C4 32: Statement-R
88: A4E 1F: Hagaki B2: Statement-E
09: B5R 20: Oufuku Hagaki 33: Folio
89: B5E 21: Oficio II 34: Youkei type 2
0A: A3 35: Youkei type 4
6-12
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Contents
(8) Paper Jam Log
cont.
(d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal)
01: Plain 0A: Color 15: Custom 1
02: Transparency 0B: Prepunched 16: Custom 2
03: Preprinted 0C: Envelope 17: Custom 3
04: Labels 0D: Cardstock 18: Custom 4
05: Bond 0E: Coated 19: Custom 5
06: Recycled 0F: 2nd side 1A: Custom 6
07: Vellum 10: Thick 1B: Custom 7
08: Rough 11: High quality 1C: Custom 8
09: Letterhead
6-13
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Contents
(9) Service Call Log
# Count. Service Code Date and
Time
Record 1 to 8 occurrence The total page count at the The first two digits (identifi- Date and
of the past self diagnostics time of the self diagnostic cation number) time of
error. error. 01: Service call / System occur-
If number of the past self error rence
diagnostics error occur- 02: Unit replacement
rence is less than 16, all of
them are described. Next two digits (Auto
reboot information)
00: Without auto reboot
01: Auto reboot execution
Last 4 digits
Self diagnostic error code
(Refer to P.7-303)
(Example) 01.00.6000
01 indicates Self diagnos-
tic error, 00 indicates with-
out auto reboot and 6000
indicates Self diagnostic
error code.
*: Auto reboot function
can be set at U287
6-14
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
No. Contents
(10) Maintenance Log
# Count. item Date and
Time
Record 1 to 8 occurrence Total page count at the Maintenance replacement Date and
of the past unknown toner time of the replacement of item code (1-byte value to time of
detection. If number of the the maintenance item. indicate 2 items) occur-
past unknown toner detec- rence
tion is less than 8, all of First byte (Replacing item)
them are described. The toner replacement log 02: Maintenance kit
is triggered by toner empty.
This record may contain Second 1 byte (replace-
such a reference as the ment item type)
toner container is inserted (Low-end model)
twice or a used toner con- 01: MK-8335A
tainer is inserted. 02: MK-8335B
03: MK-8335D
04: MK-8335E
(High-end model)
01: MK-8515A
02: MK-8515B
Last 16 digits
Display the serial number
of the toner container.
6-15
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Contents
(12) Counter Log
(f) Paper jam (g) Self diagnostic error (h) Replacement for main-
tenance
Item
Display the log counter of Display the log counter of Display the log counter by Consist of
paper jams by each loca- self diagnostics errors by the maintenance replace- three log
tion. each cause. ment item. counters
Refer to Paper Jam Log. of paper
The number of auto reboot T: Toner container jams, self
* All factors including those is also displayed at the 00: Black diagnos-
that have not occurred are service call/system error. 01: Cyan tics errors,
displayed 02: Magenta and main-
03: Yellow tenance
(Example) CF245: 4(2) replace-
System error 245 occurred M: Maintenance kit ment
four times in the past and (Low-end model) items.
auto reboot was done 01: MK-8335A
twice. 02: MK-8335B
03: MK-8335D
04: MK-8335E
(High-end model)
01: MK-8515A
02: MK-8515B
Example: T00: 1
The toner container
(Black) has been replaced
once in the past.
6-16
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Controller Information
Memory status (37) FRPO Status
(9) Total Size 2.0 GB User Top Margin A1+A2/100 0.00
Time User Left Margin A3+A4/100 0.00
(10) Local Time Zone +01:00 Amsterdam .
(11) Date and Time 06/04/2010 12:00 .
(12) Time Server 10.183.53.13 .
Installed Options .
(13) Document Processor Installed .
(14) Paper Feeder LCF(1500X2) .
(15) Side Feeder Not Installed .
(16) SD Card Not Installed .
(17) Finisher Not Installed .
(18) Mail Box Not Installed .
(19) Card Authentication Kit (B) .
Installed .
(20) Internet Fax Kit (A) Not Installed .
(21) Data Security Kit (E) Installed .
(22) UG-33 Installed .
(23) UG-34 Installed .
(24) USB Keyboard Installed .
(25) USB Keyboard Type US-English .
(26) Scan extention Kit(A) Installed PDF mode Y5 00
Print Coverage e-MPS error control Y6 03
(27) Average(%) / Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion) RP Code
(28) Total (38) 1234 5678 9012
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 (39) 5678 9012 3456
C: 1.10 / 2222222.22 (40) 9012 3456 7890
M: 1.10 / 3333333.33 (41) 3456 7890 1234
Y: 1.10 / 4444444.44
(29) Copy
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 (39) Altitude Adjustment
C: 1.10 / 2222222.22 Status Normal
M: 1.10 / 3333333.33
/ 4444444.44
(30) Printer
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
C: 1.10 / 2222222.22
M: 1.10 / 3333333.33 Print Settings
Y: 1.10 / 4444444.44
(31) FAX (23) MP Tray Priority Auto Feed
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
(32) Period (27/10/2009 - 03/11/2009 08:40)
(33) Last Page (%) 1.00
FAX Information
(34) Rings (Normal) 3
(35) Rings (FAX/TEL) 3
(36) Rings (TAD) 3
Figure 6-7
6-17
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Send Information
(48) Date and Time 14/03/05 15:30
(49) Address mail@bjd.ne.jp
1/2 (50) (51)
(52) 100/100
(53) 0/0/0/0/
(54) 0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
0000000/0000000/
F00/U00/0/0/0/0/0/30/30/70/70/abcde/1/0/1/ (55) (56) (57) (58) (59) (60) (61) (62) (63) (64) (65) (66) (67) (68) (69) (70)(71) (72)
(73) 0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
(74) 0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
(75) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/
(76) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000
(77) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(78) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(79) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(80) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(81) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(82) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(83) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(84) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(85) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(86) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(87) 12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
(88) XXXXXXXX/
(89) [ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ]
(90) [ABCDEFGHIJ]
[ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ] (91) (92)
[ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ] (93) (94)
(95) 00070107FE/0700FE00FE/00FE000100/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/00000A010A/0A0A0A3200/0000000000/0000000000/
0008000000/080000001D/0096009B00/9B009BFFFB/0082000000/000000001F/0000002C00/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/
0008000000/080000001D/0096009B00/9B009BFFFB/0082000000/000000001F/
Figure 6-8
6-18
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
6-19
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-20
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
6-21
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
6-22
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Code conversion
A B C D E F G H I J
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6-23
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Exit the maintenance mode and return back to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
Execute when exit the maintenance mode.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Return back to the normal copy mode.
Contents
Set the machine initial setting values to the factory default.
Purpose
Execute the machine initial settings when shipping from factory.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Mode1(All)].
3.Press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
Mode1(All) Set the machine initial setting values to the factory default.
Code Contents
0001 Controller (Entity error)
0002 Controller (Counter error)
0003 Controller (OS error)
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
6-24
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the phone number displayed at the service call error.
Purpose
Execute to set the phone number for the service call when installing the machine
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display the key to input on the touch panel.
2.Input telephone number (15 digits maximum).
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Display or set the machine serial number.
Purpose
Use when checking the machine serial number.
After the main/engine PWB replacement, execute if the service call C0180 "machine serial num-
ber mismatch" is displayed.
Note
Do not execute U004 (select [Execute] and press [Start] key) if the machine serial number of the
engine PWB is different from the main unit serial number. A different machine serial number is
overwritten in the main PWB.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
When the machine serial number of the engine PWB and the main PWB match.
Items Contents
Machine No. Display the machine serial number.
When the machine serial number of the engine PWB and the main PWB do not match.
Items Contents
Machine No.(Main) Display the machine serial number of the main PWB.
Machine No.(Eng) Display the machine serial number of the engine PWB.
Setting
Execute if the machine serial numbers do not match.
1.Select [Execute].
2.Press the [Start] key.
* :Start writing the machine serial number
3.Turn the power switch off then on. Please wait at least 5 seconds or more between power off
and on
6-25
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-26
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Change the maintenance mode ID for the field.
Purpose
Prevent vulnerability of security function by changing maintenance mode ID for the field.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
New ID Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID
New ID(Reconfirm) Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID (to confirm)
Initialize Initialize the maintenance mode ID for the field.
Setting: New ID
1.Select [New ID].
2.Press ten key (0–9, *, #) to enter new 8-digit ID.
* :Either [*] or [#] must be included.
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
4.Select [New ID(Reconfirm)].
5.Press ten key (0–9, *, #) to re-enter new 8-digit ID.
6.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
Method: Initialize
1.Select [Initialize].
2.Press the [Start] key to initialize the maintenance mode ID.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Code Contents
0001 Do not include "#" or "*" in the ID.
0002 ID does not match.
0003 8-digit ID is not input
6-27
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Verify if the firmware is not falsified.
Purpose
Re-calculate the checksum to verify the firmware is not falsified.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
Expected Display the checksum expected value
Result Display the result of the checksum calculation
Execute Execute self-verification
2.Select [Execute].
3.Press the [Start] key.
After execution, display the checksum obtained in the [Expected].
Items Contents
f001 The expected value file does not exist
f002 Expected value file read failure
f003 Illegal data of the expected value file (not 64-byte data)
s001 Fails to obtain the checksum
NG Expected value and checksum are different
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-28
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display each firmware / software version.
Purpose
Use when checking each firmware / software version.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display each firmware version.
2.Change the screen using the [▲][▼] key.
Items Contents
Main Main firmware
MMI Operation section firmware
Panel Main Panel firmware
Panel Boot Panel Boot
Browser Browser firmware
Engine Engine firmware
Engine Boot Engine boot
RFID RFID
Dictionary Dictionary firmware
Option Language Optional language firmware
OCR OCR dictionary firmware
HyPAS Embedded API HyPAS Embedded API firmware
Color Table1(Copy) Color table 1 firmware (copy)
Color Table2(Copy) Color table 2 firmware (copy)
Color Table1(Prn) Color table 1 firmware (printer)
Color Table2(Prn) Color table 2 firmware (printer)
DP DP firmware
DP Boot DP Boot
DP SSW Document Processor SSW
PF1 Paper feeder 1 firmware
PF1 Boot Paper Feeder 1 boot
Side PF Side feeder firmware
Side PF Boot Side feeder boot
SMT SSW SMT SSW
PF2 Paper feeder 2 firmware
PF2 Boot Paper Feeder 2 boot
DF finisher firmware
DF Boot finisher boot
6-29
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
PH PH Firmware
PH Boot PH Boot
MT MT Firmware
MT Boot MT boot
BF BF firmware
BF Boot BF Boot
Fax APL1 Fax APL1
Fax Boot1 FAX Boot1
Fax IPL1 Fax IPL1
Fax APL2 Fax APL2
Fax Boot2 FAX Boot2
Fax IPL2 Fax IPL2
Application Name 01 Application 1 firmware
Application Name 02 Application 2 firmware
Application Name 03 Application 3 firmware
Application Name 04 Application 4 firmware
Application Name 05 Application 5 firmware
Application Name 06 Application 6 firmware
Application Name 07 Application 7 firmware
Application Name 08 Application 8 firmware
Application Name 09 Application 9 firmware
Application Name 10 Application 10 firmware
Application Name 11 Application 11 firmware
Application Name 12 Application 12 firmware
Application Name 13 Application 13 firmware
Application Name 14 Application 14 firmware
Application Name 15 Application 15 firmware
Application Name 16 Application 16 firmware
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-30
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Initialize all settings, except those pertinent to the type of machine, namely each counter, service
call error history and mode setting. Also, initializes the backup RAM according to the area spec-
ification selected in the maintenance mode U252 (Setting the destination).
Purpose
Initialize the backup data except machine settings to the factory default in the field
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initialize data according to the destination information.
Items Contents
0001 Controller (Entity error)
0002 Controller (Counter error)
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-31
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Initialize the HDD.
Purpose
Initialize the HDD when replacing the HDD in the field.
Note
The following settings are initialized if the HDD is initialized.
System Menu (User Management, Job Accounting, Address Book, One Touch Key, Document
Box, etc.),Shortcut key, Panel program.
If executing full-format, the following installed software is deleted.
Optional language, HyPAS application (FMU, etc.), OCR dictionary software, color table.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to be executed.
Items Contents
HDD Format Executing the HDD format
SSD Format Executing the SSD format
Items Contents
Full Full format
Data Data format (save in the application software)
4.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Start operation
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-32
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Execute Firmware-Update from the USB memory when "Very High" is selected in the Security
Level settings under the System Menu.
Supplement
Firmware update starts by executing the maintenance mode U035 under the condition of the
USB memory is installed.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Update the firmware
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-33
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Execute to retrieve backup data after replacing the main PWB.
Purpose
Restore the setting value backed up from the HDD to the flash memory on the main PWB.
Migrate data from backup source SSD to backup destination SSD via USB memory
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to be executed.
Items Contents
Flash Update the firmware
SSD When USB memory is installed, back up and restore SSD data.
Method: Flash
1.Select [Restore].
Items Contents
Restore Restore the backup data
Method: SSD
1.Select items to be executed.
Items Contents
Backup Backup the SSD data
Restore Restore the backup data
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-34
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Drive each motor.
Contents
Execute to check each motor's operation.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the motor to operate.
3.Press the [Start] key.
* :Each operation start.
Items Contents
Feed Operate the feed motor
DLP(K) Operate the developer K/Transfer belt motor
DLP(CMY) Operate the developer motor CMY *1
Operate the developer motor M / the developer motor CY
Belt Lift Operate the belt release motor
Belt Clean Operate the belt cleaning motor
Drum(K) Operate the drum motor K
Drum (CMY) Operate the drum motor (CMY)
IH Core Operate the IH Core motor
Fuser Operate the fuser motor
Fuser Release Operate the fuser pressure release motor
SB(CW) Operate the exit reverse motor (CW)
SB(CCW) Operate the exit reverse motor (CCW)
Bridge Operate the BR conveying motor
Container Mix Operate the toner container motor
Toner Recovery Operate the waste toner motor
Vibration Operate the vibration motor
Exit *1 Operate the rear exit motor
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-35
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display the on/off status of each switch and sensor to detect paper on the paper conveying path.
Purpose
Execute to check if the conveying switches and sensors are operating correctly.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Check the condition of the switches and sensors by turning them on / off manually.
3.The display of the switch inverts at the time of detecting the switch on.
Items Contents
Casstte2 Feed Display the switching status of the conveying sensor
Regist Display the switching status of the registration sensor
Belt Jam Display the switching state of the belt wound sensor
Exit Feed Display the switching status of the exit sensor
DU1 Display the switching status of the DU sensor 1
DU2 Display the switching status of the DU sensor 2
Bridge1 Feed Display the switching status of the bridge conveying sensor 1
Bridge2 Feed Display the switching status of the bridge conveying sensor 2
Exit Paper Display the switching status of the exit switchback sensor
Fuser Feed Display the switching status of the fuser sensor
Inner Job Separator Display the switching status of the JS sensor
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-36
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Supply power to each clutch.
Purpose
Execute to check each clutch operation.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the clutch to operate.
3.Press the [Start] key.
* :Each operation start.
Items Contents
Feed Operate the vertical conveying clutch
Middle Operate the middle clutch
DU1 Operate the DU clutch 1
DU2 Operate the DU clutch 2
DLP Operate the developer clutch
Regist Operate the registration clutch
MPT Feed Operate the MP clutch
Cassette2 Operates the feed clutch 2
Cassette1 Operates the feed clutch 1
Motor Operate the motor
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-37
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Supply power to each solenoid.
Purpose
Execute to check each solenoid operation.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the solenoid to operate.
3.Press the [Start] key.
* :Each operation start.
* :Select the motor first before checking the motor rotation.
* :Operation is not possible if the front cover is open.
* :Operation can' be done even when "Printer preparation in progress" is displayed
Items Contents
Branch Eject Up Operate the upper exit solenoid
Branch Eject Down Operate the lower exit solenoid
ID Sensor Operate the cleaning solenoid
Container Cover(C) Operate the toner container solenoid(C)
Container Cover(M) Operate the toner container solenoid(M)
Container Cover(Y) Operate the toner container solenoid(Y)
Container Cover(K) Operate the toner container solenoid(K)
Motor Operate the motor
4.To stop the operation of the solenoid, press the [Stop] key.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-38
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Contents
Adjust the leading edge registration or center line.
Purpose
Execute if regular errors occur on the leading edge of the original and the leading edge of the
copy image
Execute if regular errors occur on the center of the original and the center of the copy image
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to be adjusted.
* :Migrate to each adjustment screen
Items Contents
LSU Out Top Adjust the leading edge timing
LSU Out Left Adjust the center line
LSU Out Top B/W Adjust the leading edge timing (B/W)
LSU Out Top 3/4 Adjust the leading edge timing (3/4 speed)
Mode*1 Set the conveying timing inspection mode
Reset*1 Reset the conveying timing inspection data
On Timing*1 Check the conveying timing (sensor ON)
Off Timing*1 Check the conveying timing (sensor retrieve time)
6-39
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
5.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
For the test pattern 1, increase the setting value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the setting value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves in the direction of the trailing edge,
and when the setting value is decreased, the image moves in the direction of the leading
edge.
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.0 mm)
Note
Please check the copy image after completing this adjustment If proper images can not be
obtained even after adjustment, please adjust in the following maintenance mode
U034 > U066(P.6-64) > U071(P.6-68)
6-40
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
For the test pattern 1, increase the setting value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the setting value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves in the direction of the trailing edge,
and when the setting value is decreased, the image moves in the direction of the leading
edge.
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.0 mm)
Note
Please check the copy image after completing this adjustment If proper images can not be
obtained even after adjustment, please adjust in the following maintenance mode
U034 > U066(P.6-64) > U071(P.6-68)
6-41
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
For the test pattern 1, increase the setting value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the setting value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves in the direction of the trailing edge,
and when the setting value is decreased, the image moves in the direction of the leading
edge.
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.0 mm)
Note
Please check the copy image after completing this adjustment If proper images can not be
obtained even after adjustment, please adjust in the following maintenance mode
U034 > U066(P.6-64) > U071(P.6-68)
6-42
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
5.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
For the test pattern 1, increase the setting value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the setting value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves to right, and it moves to left when the
setting value is decreased.
Center line of printing
(within ± 2 mm)
Note
Please check the copy image after completing this adjustment If proper images can not be
obtained even after adjustment, please adjust in the following maintenance mode
U034 < U067(P.6-65) < U072(P.6-70)
6-43
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Execution: Mode
1.Select items to set.
Items Contents
On Set the conveying timing inspection mode to On
Off Set the conveying timing inspection mode to Off
Method: Reset
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Operation is started and data is reset
Items Contents
Execute Reset the conveying timing inspection data
Items Contents
Value(Plain) Check the measured value(Plain)
Value(Thick) Check the measured value(Thick)
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-44
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Changes the printable area when copying with Folio paper.
Purpose
Preventing the image from missing in the trailing edge or left/right edges by setting the actual
size of Folio paper used
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
3.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-45
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Drive each fan motor.
Contents
Execute to check each fan motor's operation.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the fan motor to operate.
3.Press the [Start] key.
* :Each operation start.
Items Contents
All Operate all the fan motors
Fuser Edge Operate the fuser edge fan motor
IH PWB Operate the IH PWB fan motor
DLP1*1 Operate the developer fan motor Y
DLP2*1 Operate the developer fan motor C
DLP3*1 Operate the developer fan motor M
DLP4*1 Operate the developer fan motor K
Exit Cooling Operate the exit fan motor, the right container fan motor
Exit Paper IH Coil Operate the exit/IH fan motor
Toner*1 Operates the toner suction fan motor
LVU Operate the power source fan motor
Belt Cooling*1 Operate the developer fan motor CKMY
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-46
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjust the paper loop amount.
Purpose
The leading edge of the image may drop, image position may shift irregularly or paper is folded
in a Z-shape.
* :Use to check/adjust skew feed.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to be adjusted.
* :Migrate to each adjustment screen
Items Contents
Paper Loop Amount Paper loop amount adjustment
Paper Loop Amount Paper loop amount adjustment at B/W
B/W
Paper Loop Amount Paper loop amount adjustment at 3/4 speed
3/4
6-47
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the paper loop amount increase, and it decreases
when the setting value is decreased.
6-48
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the paper loop amount increase, and it decreases
when the setting value is decreased.
Figure 6-14
6-49
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the paper loop amount increase, and it decreases
when the setting value is decreased.
Figure 6-15
6-50
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-51
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Execute the motor speed fine tuning.
Purpose
No need to change the basic settings. Change the set value when an image failure occurs.
* :The adjustment value "+" makes the motor speed "Slow" and "-" makes the motor speed
"Fast".
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to be adjusted.
* :Migrate to each adjustment screen
Items Contents
Motor1 Set the drum motor K and the drum motor CMY
Motor2 Set the developer motor CMY, the developer K/Transfer belt motor
Motor3 Set the exit motor, the fuser motor, the BR conveying motor, the
feed motor, the PF feed motor (Option)
Motor4 Set the drum motor K at the monochrome high speed mode
Set the drum motor K at the monochrome mode (3 color release
mode)
Motor5 *1 Set the developer K/Transfer belt motor at the monochrome high
speed mode
Motor6 *1 Set the exit motor, the fuser motor, the BR conveying motor, the
feed motor, the PF feed motor (Option) at the monochrome high
speed mode
Motor1 Half Set the drum motor K and the drum motor CMY at the half speed
Motor2 Half Set the developer motor CMY and the developer K/the transfer belt
motor at the half speed
Motor3 Half Set the exit motor, the fuser motor, the BR conveying motor, the
feed motor, PF feed motor (Option) at the half speed
Motor1 3/4 Set the drum motor K and the drum motor CMY at 3/4 speed
Motor2 3/4 Set the developer motor CMY and the developer K/Transfer belt
motor at 3/4 speed,
Motor3 3/4 Set the exit motor, the fuser motor, the BR conveying motor, the
feed motor at 3/4 speed
6-52
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Setting: Motor1
1.Select items to be adjusted.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :Drum motor CMY is set by input of Drum Y Input of Drum C, Drum M is invalid
Setting: Motor2
1.Select items to be adjusted.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-53
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Setting: Motor3
1.Select items to be adjusted.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Setting: Motor4
1.Select items to be adjusted.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-54
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Setting: Motor5
1.Select items to be adjusted.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Setting: Motor 6
1.Select items to be adjusted.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-55
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
* :Drum motor CMY is set by input of Drum Y Input of Drum C, Drum M is invalid
6-56
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
* :Drum motor CMY is set by input of Drum Y Input of Drum C, Drum M is invalid
6-57
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-58
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Contents
In the cooling mode, perform condition setting to turn all the fans.
Purpose
Change the temperature setting which shift to the cooling mode that all fans are rotated at full
speed when the main unit inside temperature becomes high during continuous printing.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Cooling Mode Set the Cooling Cycle
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-59
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Turns the exposure lamp on.
Purpose
Light the exposure lamp to confirm.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to operate.
Items Contents
CCD Turns the exposure lamp on
CIS Turn the DP CIS lamp on (when the simultaneous duplex scanning doc-
ument processor is installed)
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-60
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Changes the scanner shading position.
Purpose
Execute if the vertical white lines appears on the image and they are not improved after cleaning
the shading plate, namely there are scratches or dirt inside the shading plate.
By changing the shading position, shading is available where there is no influence of dirt or
scratch of the shading plate.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :If the set value is increased, the shading position moves toward the machine left side and
toward the right side if the value is reduced.
Note
Test copy of the original is available by pressing the [System Menu] key as interruption copy
mode when executing this maintenance mode.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-61
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Adjust the magnification in the main and sub scanning direction of the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjust the magnification in the main and sub scanning direction if scanner magnification is not
correct.
Note
The magnification adjustment in the main scanning direction could cause black streaks depend-
ing on the content of the original document.
Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order.
U065(main scanning direction)(P.6-62)>U065((sub scanning direction)(P.6-62)
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Select items to be adjusted.
* :Initial setting value is a reference value as the value changes by the adjustment at the pro-
duction.
Figure 6-16
6-62
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 6-17
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-63
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjust the leading edge timing for the table scanning.
Purpose
Execute if regular errors occur on the leading edge of the original and the leading edge of the
copy image
Adjustment
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves forward, and it moves backward
when the setting value is decreased.
Figure 6-18
Note
Please check the copy image after completing this adjustment If proper images can not be
obtained even after adjustment, please adjust in the following maintenance mode
U034(P.6-39) > U065(P.6-62) > U066
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-64
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Adjust the center line in the main scanning direction for the table scanning.
Purpose
Execute if regular errors occur on the center of the original and the center of the copy image
Adjustment
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
* :Initial setting value is a reference value as the value changes by the adjustment at the pro-
duction.
5.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
For the copy example 1, decrease the value.
For the copy example 2, increase the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves to left, and it moves to right when the
setting value is decreased.
Figure 6-19
Note
Please check the copy image after completing this adjustment If proper images can not be
obtained even after adjustment, please adjust in the following maintenance mode
U034(P.6-39) > U065(P.6-62) > U067
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-65
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjust the starting position for scanning originals from the DP.
Execute test copy at the four scanning positions after adjustment.
Purpose
Adjust if the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is
used
* :Execute U071 to adjust the timing of the DP leading edge when the scanning position is
changed.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to be adjusted.
Adjustment: DP Read
1.Select [DP Read].
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves in the direction of the trailing edge,
and when the setting value is decreased, the image moves in the direction of the leading
edge.
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-66
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Adjusting the magnification for DP scanning.
Purpose
Adjusted if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the DP is used
Adjustment
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
* :Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Select items to be adjusted.
* :Initial setting value is a reference value as the value changes by the adjustment at the pro-
duction.
6.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image get longer, and it shortens when the setting
value is decreased.
Figure 6-20
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-67
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjust the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the
copy image when the DP is used
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
* :Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Select items to be adjusted.
DP-7100
DP-7110
DP-7120
6-68
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
* :Initial setting value is a reference value as the value changes by the adjustment at the pro-
duction.
Figure 6-21
Note
Check the back page after adjusting the front page. Adjust if necessary.
Please check the copy image after completing this adjustment If proper images can not be
obtained even after adjustment, please adjust in the following maintenance mode
U034(P.6-39) > U071
Original
Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 6-22
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-69
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Adjusts the DP original center line.
Purpose
Execute if regular errors occur on the center of the original and the center of the copy image
when scanning the original through DP (Document Processor)
Adjustment
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
* :Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Select items to be adjusted.
* :Initial setting value is a reference value as the value changes by the adjustment at the pro-
duction.
6.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
For the copy example 1, decrease the value.
For the copy example 2, increase the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves to left, and it moves to right when the
setting value is decreased.
Note
Check the back page after adjusting the front page. Adjust if necessary.
Please check the copy image after completing this adjustment If proper images can not be
obtained even after adjustment, please adjust in the following maintenance mode
U034(P.6-39) > U065(P.6-62) > U067(P.6-65) > U072
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-70
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Simulate the scanner operation in any condition.
Purpose
Execute the scanner operation to check the abnormal operation and dust adhesion on the slit
glass.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to be executed.
Items Contents
Scanner Motor Execute the scan operation
Home Position Home positioning operation
Dust Check Check if there is dust by turning the exposure lamp on
DP Reading scan position operation for the document processor
3.Select [Execute].
4.Press the [Start] key.
* :Start scanning with the condition specified.
5.To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-71
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Contents
Set the DP image scanning density
Purpose
Changes the setting if the background image appears when scanning bluish original or originals
with slightly thick background. Adjust the image difference between the table scanning and DP
scanning. DP CIS scanning is not corrected.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
3.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-72
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
If dust can be detected by comparing the original trailing edge scanned data with the scanned
data after the original feed, change the original scan position next time.
Also, reduce the black lines by image correction.
Purpose
Use as the corrective measures for the black lines appearing with dust on the original scanning
position when using the document processor.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to check
3.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :If the set value is lowered, dark density image are considered dust as it makes dust detec-
tion more likely.
If the set value is increased, it will be difficult to detect dust.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-73
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Contents
Select and output the MIP-PG pattern generated by the main unit.
Purpose
When adjusting the image scanning items, execute to check the machine status except the scan-
ner section using the MIP-PG pattern output without image scanning process.
* :Test pages printed from the maintenance mode are not counted for the print coverage and
page count displayed on the service status page.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the MIP-PG pattern to output
Items Contents
256Gradation PG for the grayscale level check (256 grayscale PG1)
Color Belt PG for the developer status and engine ID check (four
color PG)
6-74
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
Gray(Y) For drum quality check (Yellow PG)
cyan
magenta
green
6-75
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
Sample Set Outputs the following output patterns for the long life unit warranty appli-
cation
PG for the developer status and engine ID check (four color PG)
For drum quality check (Yellow PG)
For drum quality check (Cyan PG)
For drum quality check (Magenta PG)
For drum quality check (Gray PG)
3.Press the [System Menu] key.
4.Press the [Start] key to output a MIP-PG pattern.
5.Press the [System Menu] key.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-76
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the error detection threshold for white lines correction and display the abnormal pixel count.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the DP CIS, DP main PWB or DP CIS roller.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
3.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :Normally do not change the threshold from the initial value of 112.
Increase the value if white lines appear while the CIS roller/glass is not dirty.
Reduce the set value if thin lines disappear depending on the original to use.
Set in the range of 50 to 200. (In the case of out of range, it may affect the image output)
6-77
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Execute
1.Select [Execute].
2.Press the [Start] key.
* :Start retaining the white reference data.
3.Press the [System Menu] key.
4.Set the gray original face-down on the document processor and set paper in the cassette.
* :Match the original and paper size.
5.Press the [Start] key.
* :Outputs 2-sheet test pattern.
1st sheet: black band of about 60mm width
2nd sheet: blank (or may be gray band of about 60mm width)
6.Setting is correctly completed if no vertical line is observed on both sheets.
If vertical black streaks in blank sheet (gray band) or vertical white streaks in black band
appear in the same position, clean the DP CIS roller or DP CIS glass section and then perform
the white strip correction again.
White line correction is completed if both sheets have vertical black lines or vertical white
lines. However, check the engine since there are factors of vertical streaks at the engine Side.
7.Press the [System Menu] key.
* :Mode is set to [1].
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-78
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Check the operation of the original size detection and set detection threshold
Purpose
Change the detection threshold if the original size is frequently misdetected with entirely dark
originals (high density) or dark originals at edges only.
Change the detection threshold
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Data1 Display original width
B/W Level1 Original size detection threshold setting
Data2 Display original width (when document processor is installed)
Execution: Data1/Data2
1.Place an original on the table and close the platen cover or the document processor.
2.The light source is turned on and the CCD sensor detects the original width. Whether or not the
original length is present is judged with the document size sensor (Detected twice when the
document processor is installed)
Items Contents
Original Area(dot) Detected number of pixels (dot) in the original width
Original Area(mm) Detected the original width (mm)
Size SW L Indicating ON/OFF of the original length sensor (0: Off/1: On)
6-79
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
* :Lowering the setting value improves the sensor's sensitivity and high density originals can
be detected but the original mat may be detected as an original.
* :If differentiating each setting value, mis-detection may appear depending on the condition of
placing the original.
Figure 6-24
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-80
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjust the surface potential by changing the voltage impressed to the MC roller.
Purpose
Change the setting value and adjust the image when an image failure (background image)
occurs.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Adj AC Bias *1 Adjust main charge AC bias for each color
Set AC Auto Adj *1 Set AC bias automatic adjustment
Set DC Auto Adj *2 Set DC bias automatic adjustment
Set DC Bias Before Display the main charge DC bias correction value for each color.
(Adjustment value before correction)
Set DC Bias After Display the main charge DC bias correction value for each color.
(Adjustment value after correction)
Adj DC Bias Adjust the surface potential additional value
Set Charger Freq *1 Set the frequency of the main charger
Chk Current *1 Display the electric current flows
Set AC Gain *1 Set the AC Gain
6-81
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
On Adjust automatically
Off Not adjusted automatically
Items Contents
DC1 Bias(C) Cyan main charge DC bias correction value before correction (Full
speed)
DC1 Bias(M) Magenta main charge DC bias correction value before correction (Full
speed)
DC1 Bias(Y) Yellow main charge DC bias correction value before correction (Full
speed)
DC1 Bias(K) Black main charge DC bias correction value before correction (Full
speed)
Items Contents
DC1 Bias(C) Cyan main charge DC bias correction value after correction (Full speed)
DC1 Bias(M) Magenta main charge DC bias correction value (Full speed)
DC1 Bias(Y) Yellow main charge DC bias correction value after correction (Full
speed)
DC1 Bias(K) Black main charge DC bias correction value after correction (Full
speed)
6-82
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
C Cyan inflow current
M Magenta inflow current
Y Yellow inflow current
K Black inflow current
6-83
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
Mode Multiplication Mode setting
Value Multiplication value setting
Setting: Value
1.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Auto Automatic environmental setting (default)
Mode Charge Multiplication Mode
Setting: Mode
1.Select items to set.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-84
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the primary transfer control voltage
Purpose
Change setting if a failure such as faint image, etc. occurs.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Voltage Set the primary transfer feedback voltage
Altitude Adjustment Altitude Adjustment setting
Current Set the primary transfer feedback current
Final Current Set the primary transfer feedback final current
Prohibit Reflection Set the primary transfer feedback correction ON/OFF setting
Force Execute Set the forcing primary transfer feedback
Surround Correct Setting the environmental correction ON/OFF
Setting: Voltage
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Target Set the primary transfer feedback voltage target
Step Set the primary transfer feedback voltage step
Value Set the primary transfer feedback voltage (1st side)
Value 2nd Set the primary transfer feedback voltage (2nd side)
6-85
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Target
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Setting: Step
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Setting: Value
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-86
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-87
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-88
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
1st Side Altitude Adjustment setting (1st side)
2nd Side Altitude Adjustment setting (2nd side)
6-89
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Current
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Target Primary transfer feedback current target setting (1st side)
Target 2nd Primary transfer feedback current target setting (2nd side)
6-90
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Target
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-91
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
6-92
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
6-93
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Items Contents
Target Primary transfer final current target setting (1st side)
Target 2nd Primary transfer final current target setting (2nd side)
Setting: Target
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-94
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
6-95
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-96
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Items Contents
On Primary transfer feedback result reflection prohibition setting: On
Off Primary transfer feedback result reflection prohibition setting: Off
Items Contents
Execute Forced primary transfer feedback execution
Items Contents
On Primary transfer feedback environmental correction prohibition setting:
On
Off Primary transfer feedback environmental correction prohibition setting:
Off
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-97
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the secondary transfer control voltage by each paper type.
Purpose
Change setting if a failure such as faint image, etc. occurs.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Light/Normal1 Transfer control value for Light and Normal1
Normal2/3 Transfer control value for Normal 2 / 3
Heavy1 Transfer control value for Normal 1 / 3
Heavy2/3 Transfer control value for Heavy 2 / 3
Heavy4/5 Transfer control value for Heavy 4 / 5
OHP Transfer control value for Transparency
Bias Bias setting
Items Contents
1st Front page transfer control value at full speed
2nd Back page transfer control value at full speed
1st 3/4(Gloss) Surface transfer control value on gloss mode at 3/4 speed (Front page)
2nd 3/4(Gloss) Surface transfer control value on gloss mode at 3/4 speed (Back page)
1st B/W Front page transfer control value on B/W at full speed
2nd B/W Back page transfer control value on B/W at full speed
Setting: 1st / 2nd / 1st 3/4(Gloss) / 2nd 3/4(Gloss) / 1st B/W / 2nd B/W
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-98
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
[1st]
Initial setting value
[2nd]
Initial setting value
[1st 3/4(Gloss)]
Initial setting value
[2nd 3/4(Gloss)]
Initial setting value
[1st B/W]
Initial setting value
[2nd B/W]
Initial setting value
6-99
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Heavy1
1.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
1st 3/4 Front page transfer control value at full speed
2nd 3/4 Transfer control value at full speed (Back page)
[1st 3/4]
Initial setting value
[2nd 3/4]
Initial setting value
6-100
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Heavy2/3
1.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
1st Half Front page transfer control value at the half speed
2nd Half Back page transfer control value at the half speed
[1st Half]
Initial setting value
[2nd Half]
Initial setting value
Setting: Heavy4/5
1.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
1st Half Front page transfer control value at the half speed
2nd Half Back page transfer control value at the half speed
6-101
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[1st Half]
Initial setting value
[2nd Half]
Initial setting value
Setting: OHP
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-102
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Bias
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-103
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Belt(A)/(B):Set the transfer belt unit cleaning control voltage
1st sheet CLN B/W: Shift printing surface from the position of the cleaning section
Purpose
Belt(A): Change the setting when offset images appear with the transfer belt cleaning failure.
1st sheet CLN B/W:
Set when cleaning failure of the transfer belt occurs only on the first sheet after monochrome
continuous printing.
* :First copy time will be slightly longer after On.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Belt(A) Belt A setting
Belt(B) Belt B setting
1st sheet CLN B/W*1 Set the cleaning operation after monochrome printing.
Setting: Belt(A)
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-104
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Setting: Belt(B)
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents
On Turn on the cleaning operation setting after monochrome printing.
Off Turn off the cleaning operation setting after monochrome printing.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-105
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Separation shift bias OFF timing
Purpose
Change setting if paper separation failure occurs
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Output Separation Shift bias output adjustment
Output 3/4 Separation Shift bias output adjustment at 3/4 speed
Output B/W Separation Shift bias output adjustment at B/W mode
Timing ON/OFF timing adjustment by paper position
Subtraction Value Subtracted value for the separation bias (correction by fuser count)
Setting: Output
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-106
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Output B/W
6-107
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Timing
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-108
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Execute to display the drum counter value.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum usage status.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :The drum counter value is displayed.
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan drum counter value
M Display the Magenta drum counter value
Y Display the Yellow drum counter value
K Display the Black drum counter value
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Display the drum number
Purpose
Execute to check the drum number.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display the drum number.
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan drum number
M Display the Magenta drum number
Y Display the Yellow drum number
K Display the Black drum number
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-109
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display the machine serial number and drum counter history.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine serial number and drum counter values.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Select items to refer.
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan drum history
M Display the Magenta drum history
Y Display the Yellow drum history
K Display the Black drum history
Items Contents
Machine History 1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Cnt History 1 to 3 Drum counter history
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-110
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Set the initial LSU luminosity based on the drum sensitivity
Purpose
Execute after replacement of the drum unit or laser scanner unit
After completion, execute maintenance mode U464 [Calibration].
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Send the sensitivity data of the drum (stored in EEPROM) to the engine
PWB and set the LSU light amount correction.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Display the drum drive distance counter.
Purpose
Execute to display the drum control counter.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display the counter value.
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan drum drive distance counter
M Display the Magenta drum drive distance counter
Y Display the Yellow drum drive distance counter
K Display the Black drum drive distance counter
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-111
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display the primary transfer unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the primary transfer unit number.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display the primary transfer unit number
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Display the machine number and the primary transfer unit counter history
Purpose
Perform to check the main unit serial number and the primary transfer unit counter value.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display the machine serial number and 3 primary transfer unit counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History 1 to 3 Machine serial n]umber history
Cnt History 1 to 3 Primary transfer unit counter history
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-112
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Display and clear the transfer counter used for transfer high voltage output correction, etc.
Purpose
Execute when verifying the primary/secondary transfer unit counter value after replacing them.
Also, execute to clear the secondary transfer counter value after replacing it.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
* : The transfer counter value is displayed
Items Contents
Mid Trans(Cnt) Display the primary transfer counter value
2nd Trans(Cnt) Display the secondary transfer counter value
Mid Trans(Time) Display the primary transfer unit drive time counter value
2nd Trans(Time) Display the secondary transfer unit drive time counter value
Method: Clear
1.Select [Clear].
2.Press the [Start] key to clear the secondary transfer counter value.
* :2nd Trans (Cnt)/2nd Trans (Time) only
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-113
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Adjust On/Off timing of the transfer high voltage output.
Purpose
Prevent paper from being rolled up in the drum.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
3.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-114
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjust the toner sensor control voltage
Purpose
If control values are not correctly retrieved due to the EEPROM on the developer unit failure,etc.,
change to manual adjustment and fix the control value temporary.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Manual Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment
Auto Toner sensor control voltage automatic adjustment
Mode Switch manual adjustment/automatic adjustment
Setting: Manual
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Method: Auto
1.The current setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Default(C) Toner sensor(C) default control voltage
Default(M) Toner sensor(M) default control voltage
Default(Y) Toner sensor(Y) default control voltage
Default(K) Toner sensor(K) default control voltage
6-115
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Execution: Mode
1.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Manual Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment
Auto Toner sensor control voltage automatic adjustment
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-116
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Toner is supplied forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner supply level.
Purpose
Execute if toner empty is detected frequently.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Install toner
Items Contents
Supply(C) Cyan toner supply level
Supply(M) Magenta toner supply level
Supply(Y) Yellow toner supply level
Supply(K) Black toner supply level
Sensor(C) Cyan toner sensor output value
Sensor(M) Magenta toner sensor output value
Sensor(Y) Yellow toner sensor output value
Sensor(K) Black toner sensor output value
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-117
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Drives the toner motor.
Purpose
Execute to check the toner motor operation.
Note
If driven for a long time or several times repeatedly, the developer unit will be full of toner inside
and it may lock up.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to operate.
3.Press the [Start] key.
* :Start the operation
Items Contents
Toner Drive the toner motor MCY
Toner(BK) Drive the toner motor K
Hopper Drive the toner container motor
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-118
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Contents
Execute the level setting of printable pages between toner near end and toner empty.
Purpose
Change the timing of detecting toner near end earlier than the current setting if the interval
between toner near end and toner empty is too short.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
If the set value is increased, the time interval from the toner near end to the toner empty
becomes longer.
If the set value is reduced, the time interval from toner near end to toner empty becomes shorter.
0: no toner near end detection
* :The set value is not reflected if set when Toner Low is already indicated.
* :Turn the main switch off and on to change the setting when Toner Low is already indicated
toner hopper.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-119
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display the machine inside and outside temperature and machine outside humidity.
Purpose
Check the machine inside and outside temperature and machine outside humidity.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to check
Items Contents
Ext/Int Machine inside and outside temperature (°C) and machine outside
humidity (%)
LSU Machine inside temperature around LSU (°C)
Developing Machine inside temperature around Developer (°C)
Method: Ext/Int
1.Display the current temperature and humidity
Items Contents
External Temp Machine outside temperature (°C)
External Humidity Machine outside humidity (%)
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature (°C)
Method: LSU
1.Display the current temperature and humidity
Items Contents
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature around Laser Scanning Unit (°C)
Method: Developing
1.Display the current temperature and humidity
Items Contents
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature around Developer Unit (°C)
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-120
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Display/change the developer bias setting values or set high altitude mode.
Purpose
Execute to check/change the developer bias setting values.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Sleeve DC *1 Set the developer sleeve roller DC bias.
Sleeve AC *1 Set the developer sleeve roller AC bias.
Mag DC Set the developer magnet roller DC bias.
Mag AC Set the developer magnet roller AC bias.
Sleeve Freq *1 Set the developer sleeve roller frequency.
Sleeve Duty *1 Set the developer sleeve roller duty.
Mag Freq *2 Set the developer magnet roller frequency.
Mag Duty Set the developer magnet roller duty.
AC Calib *1 Execute and set AC Calibration
Image Preference Set the toner density
Altitude Adjustment Set the altitude adjustment mode
Freq Mode*1 Set the developer frequency mode
6-121
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Mag DC
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
*1: 60 ppm only, *2: High-end model only, *3: Low-end model only
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
Setting: Mag AC
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
*1: High-end model only, *2: 60 ppm model only, *3: Low-end model only
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
6-122
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-123
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
*1: High-end model only, *2: 60 ppm model only, *3: Low-end model only
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
Setting: AC Calib
1.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Calibration Executing AC Calibration (Developer AC bias setting)
Execution timing
1.Setup at high altitude
2.When replacing the developer unit or drum unit
3.When the developer leakage occurs
4. When the solid image density is low after executing the AC calibra-
tion
Magnification*1 Setting the AC calibration target bias value
Execution timing
1. When the developer leak occurs after executing the AC calibration
Setting: Calibration
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the developer ON for executing AC calibration.
3.Select [Execute].
4.Press the [Start] key. AC calibration is started.
5.Turn the power switch off then on. Please wait at least 5 seconds or more between power off
and on
6-124
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Setting: Magnification
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents
Normal Set 1000m or less
1001 to 2000m Set at 1001 to 2000m
2001 to 3000m Set at 2001 to 3000m
3001 to 3500m Set at 3001 to 3500m
Items Contents
Mode0 Set to Mode 0
Mode1 Set to Mode1
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-125
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Execute mode setting to remove overcharged toner in the developer unit (Toner applying mode).
And also execute setting of operation (vibration motor control) of returning the toner accumulated
on the developing blade into the developing unit
Purpose
Change the setting to reduce the toner applying amount. Execute when changing the frequency
of vibration motor control
* :Density is lowered if overcharged toner stays in the developer unit.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Timing Set the toner apply timing
Mode Set the toner applying mode.
Upper limit Set the upper limit of the toner applying amount for each operation
mode.
Setting: Timing
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Setting: Mode
1.Select items to set.
Items Contents
On Execute the toner applying operation
Off Not to execute the toner applying operation
6-126
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Set the mode to use the drum refresh in the user adjustment.
Purpose
Change the setting if the drum refresh is frequently operated.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-127
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Display the toner sensor output
Purpose
Execute to check each color's output value when an image failure occurs.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to refer
* :Switch to each reference screen.
Items Contents
Waste Toner Display the waste toner sensor value
Toner Display the toner sensor value and supply level value for each color
Calibration Executing the calibration for the waste toner
Items Contents
Full Display the waste toner sensor value 1 (WTS1)
Method: Toner
1.Display the toner sensor value.
Items Contents
Sensor(C) Display the difference between Cyan toner sensor output value and the
target value
Sensor(M) Display the difference between Magenta toner sensor output value and
the target value
Sensor(Y) Display the difference between Yellow toner sensor output value and the
target value
Sensor(K) Display the difference between Black toner sensor output value and the
target value
Method: Calibration
1.Display each setting value.
Items Contents
Waste Toner Display the waste toner weight sensor output value
None Display the adjustment value (no bottle)
Empty Display the adjustment value (empty bottle)
Level Display the accumulated waste toner amount
Execute Executing the calibration
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-128
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display and adjust the toner empty level for each color.
Purpose
Execute displaying and adjusting the toner empty level for each color.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Empty].
Items Contents
Empty Display the toner empty level
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan toner empty level
M Display the Magenta toner empty level
Y Display the Yellow toner empty level
K Display the Black toner empty level
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-129
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display the developer drive time to be a reference for the toner density control correction.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer drive time after replacing the developer unit.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display the developer unit drive time.
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan developer unit drive time.
M Display the Magenta developer unit drive time.
Y Display the Yellow developer unit drive time.
K Display the Black developer unit drive time.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Display the developer counter value
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit usage status.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display the developer counter value
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan developer counter value.
M Display the Magenta developer counter value.
Y Display the Yellow developer counter value.
K Display the Black developer counter value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-130
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Perform the container cover lock setting, the lock release operation display setting and the waste
toner box usage setting of the toner container K.
Purpose
Set when changing the container cover lock setting or displaying the lock release operation And
also, use to change setting when the toner container K is used as the waste toner box
* :If you want to unlock the container cover all the time, set lock invalid.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Container Lock Container Lock setting
Container Unlock Display Setting to display the toner lock release operation
Waste Box Setting Setting reuse of the toner container as the waste toner box
Items Contents
Off Lock disabled
Low Lock enabled: set the release timing to Toner Low
Empty Lock enabled: set the release timing to Toner Empty
Items Contents
On Display the lock release selection in the System Menu --> [Adjust-
ment/Maintenance] screen
Off The lock release selection does not display in the System Menu --
> [Adjustment/Maintenance] screen
* :Initial setting value:
100V model : Off
120V model : On
220-240V model: On
6-131
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-132
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the fuser control temperature.
Purpose
Normally no need to change. However, change the setting as corrective measures for paper curl,
creases and fusing failure on thick paper.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Warm Up Control temperature except at printing
Print Control temperature at printing
Grain Mode Control for the impalpable unevenness in glossiness
Ready Time Adjust Setting the low-temperature aging operation temperature
Setting: Warm Up
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-133
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
120V
220-240V
6-134
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Setting: Print
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
120V/ 220-240V
Items Contents
Mode0 Current level (No special control is done)
Mode1 Improvement mode for the impalpable unevenness in glossiness
Mode2 More improvement
6-135
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
*: If the set value α is decreased, the operating temperature of aging performed after stabilization in the
silent mode decreases.
*: If low operating temperature of low temperature aging is lowered, aging may not enter and fusing level
may be poor.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Display the machine serial number and fuser unit history.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine serial number and the fuser unit counter value.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display the machine serial number and 3 fuser unit counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History 1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Cnt History 1 to 3 Fuser unit history
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Display the fuser unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the fuser unit number.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display the fuser unit number.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-136
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Contents
Display the fuser counter value, display or clear the discharge correction counter for the fuser
discharger needle.
Purpose
Execute to confirm the fuser counter value. And also, execute it to clear the discharge correction
counter value after replacing the IH unit or fuser discharger needle unit.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
* : Display the fuser unit counter value
Items Contents
Cnt Display the fuser unit counter value
Release(Time) Display the fuser unit drive time (release)
Press(Time) Display the fuser unit drive time (press)
Correction Display or change the discharge correction counter value for the fuser
discharger needle
Clear Clear the discharge correction counter for the fuser discharger needle
Clear the fuser discharger needle unit count after replacing it
Setting: Correction
1.Select [Correction].
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
Method: Clear
1.Select [Clear].
2.Press the [Start] key.
* :The correction fuser counter value is cleared
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-137
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display and set the control voltage specification of IH PWB
Purpose
Perform to check the control voltage specification.
* :When U021 is being executed, set the same voltage with the voltage of the IH controlPWB.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
Set Fuser Setting the fuser unit destination
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-138
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Display and change bias setting value for fixing belt charging needle
Purpose
Check and change the bias applied current value to the surface of the fuser belt as a measure
against the fuser electrostatic offset due to the charging of the fuser belt.
* :Increasing the set value suppresses the adhesion of toner to the fuser belt, but if it raises too
much, it will also promote adhesion of organic matter to the charge needle, so that electro-
static offset tends to occur. Therefore, please be careful.
If you can not see the effect even if raising the set value, replace the fuser discharge needle
unit and clear the correction fuser counter value at U167.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
Bias Display and change bias setting value for fixing belt charging needle
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-139
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Contents
Change the fuser control setting
Purpose
Change the fuser control setting when the security gate (anti-theft gate) malfunctions caused by
the fuser control.
* :For specific areas (100 V specification)
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
Security Gate Set malfunction prevention of the security gate (anti-theft gate)
Items Contents
On Turn on malfunction prevention setting of the security gate (anti-theft
gate)
Off Turn off malfunction prevention setting of the security gate (anti-theft
gate)
Reradiated
Signal
Swept
Transmitter Tag
Signal
Transmitter Receiver
Figure 6-25
6-140
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display the fuser temperature
Purpose
Execute to check the fuser temperature.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display the fuser temperature
Items Contents
Heat Roller Edge 1 Display the temperature (°C) of the fuser belt edge section
Heat Roller Center Display the temperature (°C) of the fuser belt center section
Heat Roller Middle Display the temperature (°C) of the fuser belt middle section
Press Roller Center Display the temperature (°C) of the fuser pressure roller center section
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-141
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
All the LEDs on the operation panel will light up
Purpose
Execute to check the LED on the operation panel
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
3.Press the [Start] key.
* :All the LEDs on the operation panel will blink
4.Press the [Stop] key to turn the LED off.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-142
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Contents
Adjust touch panel detecting positions.
Purpose
Correct and confirm the touch panel detecting positions, when the panel PWB or the operation
panel is replaced or if the detecting positions are not aligned.
* :When unable to press the software numeric keys due to the touch screen press position
error and unable to enter the maintenance mode, press and hold [Home], [Stop] and [Reset]
keys 3 seconds to start up U201.
Items Contents
Initialize Automatically correct the touch panel display position
Check Check the touch panel display position
Method: Initialize
6-143
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-144
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Check
Single Tap Check
1.Press the center of indicated three "+", and
then check the display position. Initialize
(4, -1)
6-145
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(Step1)
* :Display the detected point with a red dot if Multi tap Check. Step1.
it is out of the default value. Press both circles. Finalize with both pressed at the same time.
* :If the set value is out of specified value, *Press with the tips of your fingers. (NOT your fingenails)
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-146
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Simulate the original conveying operation separately in the DP.
Purpose
Execute to check DP operation
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.
3.Select the scan speed to operate
Items Contents
Normal Speed Normal scanning (600dpi)
High Speed High speed scan:
Mode Set the conveying timing inspection mode
Reset Reset the conveying timing inspection data
Result Check the conveying timing
Items Contents
CCD ADP With paper, execute feed operation of single sided original through CCD
CCD RADP With paper, execute feed operation of back page through CCD
CIS With paper, execute feed operation of back page through CIS
CCD ADP (Non-P) With paper, execute feed operation (continuous feed) of single sided
original through CCD
CCD RADP (Non-P) Without paper, execute feed operation (continuous operation) of back
page through CCD
CIS(Non-P) Without paper, execute feed operation (continuous operation) of back
page through CIS
Setting: Mode
1.Select items to set.
Items Contents
On Set the conveying timing inspection mode to On
Off Set the conveying timing inspection mode to Off
Method: Reset
1.Select [Execute].
2.Press the [Start] key to reset.
6-147
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Method: Result
1.Display the conveying timing data.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Set the optional key card or key counter connection.
Purpose
Execute when installing the key card or key counter.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Device Set the key card/key counter connection.
Message Set the message displayed when the device is not installed.
Setting: Device
1.Select the type of the optional counter to install.
Items Contents
Key-Card Key card installation
Key-Counter Key counter installation
Parallel Coin Parallel Coin Vender installation
Vender*1
Off Not installed
Setting: Message
1.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Key Device When multiple devices are used, change the display priority of the login
screen to the key device
Coin Vendor When multiple devices are used, change the display priority of the login
screen to the coin vendor
6-148
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-149
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Contents
Set the optional Coin Vendor connection.
Also, set the details such as the operation mode and unit price when the coin vendor is installed.
(This is an optional device which is currently supported for Japan specification only)
Purpose
To run this maintenance mode if a coin vender is installed.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
On/Off Config* Coin vendor is installed or not
No Coin Action Set the operation when change runs out during copying
Price Charge per copy by size and color
Boot Mode Setting activation mode
Apl Charge Mode Setting extended charge unit price
Items Contents
On Set the coin vendor is installed
Off Set the coin vendor is not installed
Items Contents
All Clear All clear at coin shortage during the print
Auto Clear Auto clear at coin shortage during the print
Off Do nothing at coin shortage during the print
6-150
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Price
1.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Normal Charge setting: Normal
AD Charge setting: Commercial
Print Charge setting: Print
Apl Charge setting: Extended
Setting: Normal / AD
1.Select items to set.
Items Contents
B/W Black and White
CMY Single color C, M, Y
RGB Single color R, G, B
Full Color Full color
2.Change the charger setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Setting: Print
1.Select items to set.
Items Contents
B/W Black and White
Full Color Full color
6-151
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Setting: Apl
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the charger setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents
Normal Assign activation to normal mode
Copy Service Assign activation to copy service display
Items Contents
On The extended charge unit is used.
Off The extended charge unit is not used.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-152
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Check the operation panel keys.
Purpose
Check the operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key to display execution window.
2.[Count 0] appears and the LED at the most left column in the operation panel is turned on.
3.Pressing the keys in order from the top at the row where the LED is lit, count increases one by
one. When pressing all the keys at the row and there is an LED at the next right side row, the
LED is lit.
* :The job separator LED is lit during execution and turns off when completing.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Set paper size used in side feeder.
Purpose
Change the setting when installing the side feeder or the size of paper used in the side feeder is
changed.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to setting screen
Items Contents
Cassette3* Setting the paper size for Cassette3
Cassette4* Setting the paper size for Cassette4
Cassette5* Setting the paper size for Cassette5
Setting
1.Select items to set.
Items Contents
A4 Paper size of the side feeder: A4
B5 Paper size of the side feeder: B5
Letter Paper size of the side feeder: Letter
6-153
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Execute to set the job separator installation
Purpose
Execute when installing the job separator.
* :Make sure to set [Off] for preventing wrong LED lighting when not installed.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Inner Job Separator].
* :Move to setting screen
Items Contents
Inner Job Separator Job separator setting
Procedure
1.Select items to set.
Items Contents
On Installing the job separator
Off The job separator is not installed
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-154
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Set ON/OFF of the USB Host lock function. When setting it to on, the device connected to the
USB host is not recognized.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Host Lock].
* :Move to setting screen
Items Contents
Host Lock Turns the USB Host lock function on/off
Items Contents
On The USB Host lock function is available
Off The USB Host lock function is not available
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-155
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the ID card type
Purpose
Change the type of ID card
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Other Select when the ID card type is other than SSFC.
SSFC Select when the ID card type is SSFC.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-156
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Execute setting the operation panel function.
Purpose
Execute to prohibit the system menu and job cancel operations from the operation panel by the
users other than those with administrator privileges.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Unlock Unlock System Menu operation
Partial Lock 1 Lock System Menu operation and Input/Output setting
Partial Lock 2 Lock System Menu operation, Input/Output setting and Job execution
setting
Partial Lock 3 Lock System Menu operation, Input/Output setting, Job execution set-
ting and Paper settings
Lock Lock System Menu operation and Job Cancel operation
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-157
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Change the image data and the message of the opening screen at the machine start up and the
image data and the message of the service call screen to user specified data.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user request
Setting
1.Write the image data or the message data to the USB memory.
2.Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.
3.Turn the main power switch on.
4.Press the [Start] key.
5.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Install Installs the image data or the message data
UnInstall Restores the original image data or message data
6-158
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Note
The graphics file for startup screen must be opaque. (To avoid the background from overlapping
at recovering from sleeping.)
The total size of the files installable is approximately 4 MB.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-159
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Display the optional device serial number
Purpose
Specify the production lot from the serial number to make it help of investigation at problem
occurrence.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display the serial number.
Items Contents
DP Display the document processor serial number.
Finisher Display the finisher serial number.
Booklet Display the booklet folder serial number.
PF1 Display the paper feeder 1 serial number.
PF2 Display the paper feeder 2 serial number.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Set destination of the punch unit for the finisher.
Purpose
Execute when installing the punch unit for the destination different from the main unit.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Destination].
Items Contents
Auto Match the destination setting.
Japan Metric Japan metric
Inch North American inch specification
Europe Metric European metric
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-160
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the stacking count of the main tray and middle tray.
Purpose
Execute when stacking failure occurs.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Main Tray] or [Middle Tray].
3.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-161
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Turn each motor and solenoid of the finisher on.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation of each motor and solenoid of the finisher.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to operate
* :Move to setting screen
Items Contents
Motor Finisher motor operation check
Solenoid Finisher solenoid operation check
Mail Box MT motor operation check
Booklet Booklet folder operation check
Method: Motor
1.Select items to operate
2.Press the [Start] key.
* :Start the operation
Items Contents
Feed In(H) Drive the DF paper entry motor at high speed.
Feed In(L) Drive the DF paper entry motor at low speed.
Middle(H) Drive the DF middle motor at high speed.
Middle(L) Drive the DF middle motor at low speed.
Eject(H) Drive the DF exit motor at high speed.
Eject(L) Drive the DF exit motor at low speed.
Save(H) *1 Drive the DF relief drum motor at high speed.
Save(L) *1 Drive the DF relief drum motor at low speed.
Tray Drive the DF tray motor.
Operation pattern: After descending to the lower limit, ascends and
descends again when passing 1s after detecting the middle sensor off.
ascends again when detecting the middle sensor on and stops at the
upper limit.
Staple Move Drive the DF slide motor.
Staple Drive the DF staple motor.
Width Test(A3) Drive the DF side registration motor 1, 2.
Width Test(LD) Drive the DF side registration motor 1, 2.
Beat Drive the DF paddle motor.
Eject Unlock(HP) Drive the DF exit release motor at the home position.
Sort Test *1 Execute the DF shift operation.
6-162
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
Eject Unlock(30) Drive the DF exit release motor at the 30-sheet bundle position
Eject Unlock(50) Drive the DF exit release motor at the 50-sheet bundle position
Eject Unlock(Fix) Drive the DF exit release motor at the fixed position
Eject Unlock(Full) Drive the DF exit release motor at the full open position
Punch Drive the PH motor
Punch Move *2 Drive the PH slide motor.
Eject Conv(H) Drive the DF drum motor at high speed.
Eject Conv(L) Drive the DF drum motor at low speed.
Cooling Fan *1 Drive exit fan motor.
*1: 4000-sheet finisher only, *2: Inner finisher only
* :To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.
Method: Solenoid
1.Select items to operate
2.Press the [Start] key.
* :Start the operation
Items Contents
Sub Tray *1 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 1 on
Save Drum *1 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 2 on
Booklet *1 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 3 on
Punch Turn the punch solenoid on
Three Fold *1 Turn the BF feed-shift solenoid on
Press Paper *2 Turn the DF paper press solenoid
Items Contents
Conv Drives the MT drive motor to convey paper
Branch Drives the MT drive motor for feed-shift
6-163
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Booklet
1.Select items to operate
2.Press the [Start] key.
* :Start the operation
Items Contents
Folding Drive the BF main motor.
Blade Drives the BF blade motor.
Bundle Up Drives the BF adjuster motor 2
Bundle Down Drives the BF adjuster motor 1
Staple Drive the BF staple motor.
Width Test(A3) Execute the side registration test (A3).
Width Test(LD) Execute the side registration test (LD).
Feed In Drive the BF paper entry motor.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-164
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display each switch and sensor status of the document finisher.
Purpose
Execute for the finisher's switches and sensors operation check.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to operate
* :Move to setting screen
Items Contents
Finisher Check the finisher switch and sensor operation.
Mail Box Check the operation of the MT switch and the sensor.
Booklet Check the booklet switch and sensor operation.
Punch Check the punch unit switch and sensor operation.
Method: Finisher
1.Check the condition of the switches and sensors by turning them on / off manually.
* :The display of the switch inverts at the time of detecting the switch on.
Items Contents
Front Cover DF front cover sensor
Eject Cover DF exit cover sensor
Top Cover *2 DF top cover sensor
Tray U-Limit *3 DF tray sensor 1
Tray HP2 *1 DF tray sensor 2
Tray Middle *3 DF tray sensor 3
Tray L-Limit DF tray sensor 4
Tray L-Limit(BL) *1 DF tray sensor 5
Tray Top *3 DF tray upper side sensor
HP DF entry sensor
Sub Tray Eject *1 DF sub exit sensor
Middle Tray Eject *3 DF middle exit sensor
Drum *1 DF drum sensor
Staple HP DF slide sensor
Middle tray DF exit sensor
Width Front HP DF side registration sensor 1
Width Tail HP DF side registration sensor 2
Bundle Eject HP DF bundle exit sensor
Match Paddle DF adjusting sensor
Lead Paddle DF paddle sensor
Shift Front HP *1 DF shift sensor 1
6-165
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
Shift Tail HP *1 DF shift sensor 2
Shift Unlock HP *1 DF shift release sensor
Sub Tray Full *1 DF sub tray full sensor
Shift Set *1 DF shift set sensor
Press Paper Up *4 DF paper press sensor 1
Press Paper Down *4 DF paper press sensor 2
Release *4 DF installation detection switch
*1: 4000-sheet finisher only, *2: 1000-sheet finisher only, *3: Except Inner finisher, *4: Inner fin-
isher only
Items Contents
Eject MT tray exit sensor
Cover MT cover open/close switch
Over Flow1 MT tray sensor 1
Over Flow2 MT tray sensor 2
Over Flow3 MT tray sensor 3
Over Flow4 MT tray sensor 4
Over Flow5 MT tray sensor 5
Over Flow 6 MT tray sensor 6
Over Flow 7 MT tray sensor 7
Motor HP MT home position switch
6-166
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Booklet
1.Check the condition of the switches and sensors by turning them on / off manually.
* :The display of the switch inverts at the time of detecting the switch on.
Items Contents
HP BF paper entry sensor
Eject BF exit sensor
Paper BF paper sensor
Tray Full BF tray full sensor
Bundle Up HP BF adjusting sensor 2
Bundle Down HP BF adjusting sensor 1
Width Up HP BF side registration sensor 1
Width Down HP BF side registration sensor 2
Blade HP BF blade sensor
Tray BF tray open/close detection switch
Set BF set sensor
left Guide BF left cover sensor
Vertical Feed Vertical feed sensor
Method: Punch
1.Check the condition of the switches and sensors by turning them on / off manually.
* :The display of the switch inverts at the time of detecting the switch on.
Items Contents
Punch HP *1 PH home position sensor
Edge Face 1 *1 PH paper edge sensor 1
Edge Face 2 *1 PH paper edge sensor 2
Edge Face 3 *1 PH paper edge sensor 3
Edge Face 4 *1 PH paper edge sensor 4
Tank PH tank set switch
Tank Full PH tank full sensor
HP *2 PH entry sensor
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-167
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Drive the motor or solenoid of the document processor.
Purpose
Check the operation of the motor or solenoid of the document processor.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to operate
Items Contents
Feed Motor *3 Drive the DP feed motor for normal rotation
Conv Motor DP conveying motor
Rev Motor *2 Drive DP feedshift motor.
Lift Motor *3 DP lift motor
Feed clutch *2 Drive DP feed clutch.
Regist clutch *2 DP registration clutch
Eject motor *3 DP exit motor
Regist Motor *1 DP registration motor
DP Fan *1 DP drive fan motor
CIS Fan *1 DP CIS fan motor
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-168
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display each switch and sensor status of the document processor.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation of switches and sensors of the document processor.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Check the condition of the switches and sensors by turning them on / off manually.
* :The display of the switch inverts at the time of detecting the switch on.
Items Contents
Feed Check DP feed sensor.
Regist Check DP registration sensor.
Timing Check DP timing sensor.
CIS Head *2 Check DP back page timing sensor
Set Check DP original sensor.
Longitudinal Check DP original length sensor.
Lift U-Limit *3 Check DP lift upper limit sensor.
Lift L-Limit *3 Check DP lift lower limit sensor.
Cover Open Check DP upper cover switch
Open Check DP open/close switch.
Eject *3 Check DP exit sensor
Branch Motor HP *1 Check DP feedshift sensor.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-169
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display messages indicated on the touch panel of the operation panel.
Purpose
Execute to check messages indicated.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, display messages in order.
* :Enter the message number using the numeric keys,then press the [Start] key to display the
message of the designated number.
3.By using the [+] [-] keys key, switch the language.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-170
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Execute adjustment for the finisher installation.
Purpose
· Punch registration stop timing adjustment in the PH mode.
Adjust if paper skews or is folded in A z-shape in the PH mode.
· Punch position stop timing adjustment in the PH mode.
Adjust if the punch hole position is not as specified in the PH mode.
Punch center position timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Adjust the punch center position if it is shifted in the PH mode.
· Front/rear width adjuster home position adjustment
Adjust when the consistency of the side registration guides and paper is not good and paper jam
occurs.
· Home position adjustment before/after shift
Adjust when exit paper is not aligned.
Front/rear staple home position adjustment
Adjust if the staple is not centered on the paper in the staple mode.
· Adjustment of upper/lower side registration home position
Adjust when the consistency of the side registration guides and paper is not good and paper jam
occurs.
· Adjustment of booklet stapling position
Adjust the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
· Adjustment of center folding position
Adjust the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
· Adjustment of tri- folding position
Adjust the tri-folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Finisher Setting the finisher adjustment value
Booklet Adjustment value setting of folding unit
6-171
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Finisher
1.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Punch Regist Punch registration stop timing adjustment in the PH mode.
Punch Feed Punch position stop timing adjustment in the PH mode.
Punch Width *2 Punch center position timing adjustment in the PH mode.
Width Front HP Front width adjuster home position adjustment
Width Tail HP Rear width adjuster home position adjustment
Shift Front HP *1 Adjustment of front shift home position
Shift Tail HP *1 Adjustment of rear shift home position
Staple HP Front/rear staple home position adjustment
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-26
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
6-172
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
* :Increase the setting value if the punch position is shorter than specified value.
Reduce the setting value if the punch position is longer than specified value.
A
Preset value A: 13 mm (metric)
9.5 mm (inch)
Figure 6-27
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
* :Reduce the setting value if the punch position is shorter than specified value.
Increase the setting value if the punch position is longer than specified value.
Center line
(within ± 2 mm)
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-28
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
6-173
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Staple HP
1.Select [Staple HP].
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :Increase the set value if the staple position is shifted to the machine front side (sample1).
Lower the set value if the staple position is shifted to the machine rear side (sample2).
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-29
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
6-174
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Booklet
1. Select items to set.
Items Contents
Width Up HP Adjustment of upper side registration home position
Width Down HP Adjustment of lower side registration home position
Staple Pos 1 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/Letter size
Staple Pos 2 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4/Legal size
Staple Pos 3 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3/Ledger/8K size
Booklet Pos 1 Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size
Booklet Pos 2 Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size
Booklet Pos 3 Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Ledger/8K size
Three Fold Adjustment of tri- folding position
6-175
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
* :Increase the set value if the staple position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the staple position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: A4, Letter: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 2 mmA3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper
× 1/2 ± 3 mm
2 mm 2 mm
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-30
6-176
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
* :Increase the set value if the center folding position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the center folding position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: A4, Letter: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 3mm
A
* :Increase the set value if the tri- folding position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the tri- folding position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: 7.0 ± 2mm
A
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-32
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-177
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Turn the motor and clutch power on for each feed unit.
Purpose
Execute to check motor and clutch operation of each feed unit.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to operate
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
2PF Operates 2-tray paper feeder
LCF Operate the high capacity feeder
Side Feeder Operate the side feeder
Setting: 2PF
1.Select the item to set.
Display Contents
Motor Off PF feed motor OFF
On PF feed motor ON
Clutch C1 Clutch PF feed clutch 1: ON
C2 Clutch PF feed clutch 2: ON
Feed 1 Clutch PF conveying clutch 1: ON
Feed 2 Clutch PF conveying clutch 2: ON
Execute Start operation
2.Select [Execute].
3.Press the [Start] key. Start the motor operation.
* :To stop the operation of the motor, press the [Stop] key.
6-178
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: LCF
1.Select the item to set.
Display Contents
Motor Off PF feed motor OFF
On PF feed motor ON
Clutch C1 Clutch PF feed clutch 1: ON
C2 Clutch PF feed clutch 2: ON
Feed 1 Clutch PF horizontal conveying clutch 1: ON
Feed 2 Clutch PF horizontal conveying clutch 2: ON
Execute Start operation
2.Select [Execute].
3.Press the [Start] key. Start the motor operation.
* :To stop the operation of the motor, press the [Stop] key.
Display Contents
Motor Off PF feed motor OFF
On PF feed motor ON
Clutch C1 Clutch PF feed clutch: ON
Cassette1 Solenoid PF feed solenoid: ON
Execute Start operation
2.Select [Execute].
3.Press the [Start] key. Start the motor operation.
* :To stop the operation of the motor, press the [Stop] key.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-179
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Execute the 4000-sheet finisher operation test
Purpose
Execute to check the 4000-sheet finisher operation
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Punch Position Check the PH stop position
Booklet Pass Check the paper paths to the folding unit
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-180
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Change the pre-set values for the maintenance cycle and automatic grayscale adjustment.
Purpose
Execute when changing the display timing of messages prompting the maintenance and auto-
matic grayscale adjustment
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
3.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
*1: Low-end model only, *2: 500-sheetx2/1500-sheetx2 only, *3: 3000-sheet side feeder only
4.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-181
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display, clear and change the maintenance counter value.
Purpose
Execute to check the maintenance counter value
Or, execute to clear the counter value when performing the periodical maintenance
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
3.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
*1: Low-end model only, *2: 500-sheetx2/1500-sheetx2 only, *3: 3000-sheet side feeder only
Clearing
1.Select [Clear].
2.Press the [Start] key to clear the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-182
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
U252 Destination
(Message: Set Destination)
Contents
Switch the operations and screens of the main unit according to the specification of the destina-
tion.
Purpose
Execute to reset the destination setting to the original value when initializing the back up RAM in
the simulation U021.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Japan Metric *1 Japan metric
Inch *2 Inch
Europe Metric *2 Europe Metric
Asia Pacific *2 Asia Pacific
Australia *2 Australia
China *2 China
Korea *2 Korea
Items Contents
0001 Controller (Entity Error)
0002 Controller error
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
6-183
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters by color mode.
Purpose
Select, according to user's request (copy service provider), if the maximum size paper is to be
counted as one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count)
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Color] or [B/W].
Items Contents
Full Color Switch the counter for full color mode (Single/Double Count)
Mono Color *1 Switch the counter for mono color (Single/Double Count)
B/W Switch the counter for B/W mode (Single/Double Count)
Items Contents
SGL(All) Set single count for all the paper sizes
DBL(A3/Ledger) Set the double counts for A3 (420mm) or more
DBL(B4) Set double count if the size is Legal (356mm) or larger
DBL(Folio) Set double count for Folio size or larger *2
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-184
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Switch count timing such as total count, etc. to feed or exit.
Purpose
Change the count timing according to the user's request
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the copy count timing.
Items Contents
Feed Select secondary feed start timing
Eject Select the paper exit timing
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Set the OEM code.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the main PWB, etc.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents
No. Display the OEM code
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-185
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Contents
Execute the long paper count setting.
Purpose
Execute to change the long paper count.
* :If double count is set in U253, the value multiplied with this is the long paper count.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
3.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Set the single color count mode
Purpose
Execute to change the charge counter to count up in the single color mode.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Mode0 Count the single color count in the full color counter
Mode1 Count the single color count in the single color counter
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-186
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Register the date when the machine was installed.
Purpose
Execute when installing the machine. Execute to check the installation date of the machine.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Today].
3.Press the [Start] key.
* :Set the installation date of the machine.
Clearing
1.Select [Clear].
2.Press the [Start] key.
* :Clear the installation date of the machine.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Set whether to use the 2-color copy function.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
On 2-color copy enabled
B/W *1 2-color copy enabled, B/W count
Mono Color *1,*2 2-color copy enabled, mono color count
Off 2-color copy disabled
*1: 100V model only, *2: Appears if U276 set to other than [Mode0]
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-187
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set if the print coverage report on the report output is displayed or not.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
On Display the print coverage report.
Off Not to display the print coverage report.
Completion
4.Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-188
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Add/delete/change the optional language
Purpose
Set the optional language that can be selected in the System Menu
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Option Language 1 Set optional language 1
Option Language 2 Set optional language 2
Option Language 3 Set optional language 3
Option Language 4 Set optional language 4
Option Language 5 Set optional language 5
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
ARABIC Installed langauage list
CHINESE-S
DANISH
JAPANESE
PORTUGUESE
SWEDISH
VIETNAMESE
None
Completion
4.Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-189
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after occurrence of the service call or the
system error.
Purpose
Set to change ON/OFF setting of the automatic recovery function after occurrence of the service
call or the system error.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
C0XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after occurrence
of the service call "C0xxx".
C1XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after occurrence
of the service call "C1xxx".
C2XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after occurrence
of the service call "C2xxx".
C3XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after occurrence
of the service call "C3xxx".
C4XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after occurrence
of the service call "C4xxx".
C5XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after occurrence
of the service call "C5xxx".
C6XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after occurrence
of the service call "C6xxx".
C7XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after occurrence
of the service call "C7xxx".
C8XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after occurrence
of the service call "C8xxx".
C9XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after occurrence
of the service call "C9xxx".
CFXXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after occurrence
of the CF system error.
Completion
4.Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-190
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set whether to indicate the notification when detecting abnormal temperature and humidity.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
On Indicate the abnormal temperature and humidity notification
Off Do not indicate the abnormal temperature and humidity notification
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Set the print interval at high print coverage.
Purpose
Used to change the print interval at high print coverage.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
3.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-191
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set whether to indicate the black lines cleaning guidance when detecting black lines.
Purpose
Display the cleaning guidance to reduce the service call with the black lines by dust on the con-
tact glass when scanning from the document processor.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Black Line Mode Set On/Off of the black line cleaning guidance display
Items Contents
On Display the black lines cleaning guidance
Off Black line cleaning guidance is not displayed.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-192
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Select the cassette heater control setting.
Purpose
Select the cassette heater control setting.
Set whether the cassette heater is available in the optional cassette.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Mode1 Set the cassette heater control Mode1.
Mode2 Set the cassette heater control Mode2.
Off Set the cassette heater control Off (not installed).
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-193
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the coefficient of custom size with A4/Letter size. The coefficient set here is used to convert
the black ratio in relation to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in the service status page.
Purpose
Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
3.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-194
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the drum heater
Purpose
Whether or not to display the drum heater setting in the system menu, and perform the drum
heater setting
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
System Set whether the drum heater setting in the system menu is displayed.
Drum Heater Set the drum heater
Setting
1.Select items to set.
Items Contents
On Enabled
Off Disabled
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-195
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Allocate memory to ensure that there is sufficient memory available for the printer to use as a
working area.
Purpose
Modify the memory allocation if insufficient memory for transparency support or XPS direct print-
ing occurs.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Adj Memory The memory allocation setting
Adj Max Job No. of multiple job upper limit setting
* :The maximum [Printer] jobs should be (maximum jobs) – (maximum copy jobs).
2.Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-196
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the cassette to printer output only.
Purpose
Execute it when securing a cassette for printer. The cassette set to on is for printer only and it
cannot be used for copy.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Multiple cassettes can be selected.
Items Contents
Cassette1 Set cassette 1 as exclusive cassette for the printer output.
Cassette2 Set cassette 2 as exclusive cassette for the printer output.
Cassette3 *1 Set cassette 3 as exclusive cassette for the printer output (Paper
feeder).
Cassette4 *1 Set cassette 4 as exclusive cassette for the printer output (Paper
feeder).
Cassette5 *2 Set cassette 5 as exclusive cassette for the printer output (Paper
feeder).
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-197
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Switch between duplex copy or simplex copy for initial setting on copy mode.
Purpose
Set the frequently used settings depending on the usage of the user.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Select items to set.
Items Contents
On Duplex print priority is enabled
Off Duplex print priority is disabled
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Set how many prints in the maintenance cycle to display a message notifying that the mainte-
nance time is approaching.
When the maintenance count value reaches the number of pages minus the set value from the
maintenance cycle, a message near the maintenance will be displayed
Purpose
Execute to change the display timing of a message near the maintenance.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
3.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-198
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Contents
Change the sleep mode setting.
Purpose
Execute when switching the setting of sleep mode.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to setting screen
Items Contents
Timer/Sleep Level BAM conformity country setting
Auto sleep Switch Auto Sleep function setting
Fuser Power Mode Fuser Power Mode setting
Items Contents
More Energy Save BAM conformity setting On
Sleep mode is disabled (Quick Recovery setting is disabled)
Less Energy Save BAM conformity setting Off
Set Sleep Level (Quick Recovery or Energy Saver)
Items Contents
On The sleep mode is enabled from the system menu.
Off The sleep mode is disabled from the system menu.
6-199
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Items Contents
Auto If the Sleep Timer is set to "10 minutes" or less, the fuser heating is
turned off after passing 1 minute or 2 minutes (*1) since the engine drive
stops.
If the Sleep Timer is over 10 minutes, the fuser heating is not turned off
even if the engine drive stops after copying.
On The fuser heating is not turned off (continues ON) even if the engine
drive stops after copying.
Off The fuser heating is turned off after passing 1 minute or 2 minutes (*1)
since the engine drive stops after copying.
(The setting as before)
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-200
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjust the scan image margins.
Purpose
Adjust if each margin is improper.
* :There might be the possibility to occur paper jam at fuser section if the leading edge margin
is less than the specified value.
* :There might be the possibility to occur an image failure (image smudge) on the second page
in continuous print if there is no trailing edge margin.
Adjustment
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Press the [Start] key to output a test pattern.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Select items to set.
* :Initial setting value is a reference value as the value changes by the adjustment at the pro-
duction.
6.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :When the setting value is increased, the margin widens, and it narrows when the setting
value is decreased.
Printer leading edge margin
(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
Printer Printer
left margin right margin
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-201
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjust the margins for the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjust if each margin is improper.
Adjustment
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Select items to be adjusted.
6.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :When the setting value is increased, the margin widens, and it narrows when the setting
value is decreased.
Printer leading edge margin
(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
Printer Printer
left margin right margin
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
Figure 6-34
Note
Please check the copy image after completing this adjustment If proper images can not be
obtained even after adjustment, please adjust in the following maintenance mode
U034(P.6-39) > U402(P.6-201) > U403
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-202
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjust the margins for DP scanning.
Purpose
Adjust if each margin is improper.
Adjustment
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Select items to be adjusted.
Printer Printer
left margin right margin
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
6-203
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Note
Please check the copy image after completing this adjustment If proper images can not be
obtained even after adjustment, please adjust in the following maintenance mode
U034(P.6-39) > U402(P.6-201) > U403(P.6-202) > U404
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-204
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjust the writing timing when print duplex.
Purpose
Adjust when the back page image of duplex copying is printed in rotated 180 degrees from the
scanning image (image on the memory)
Note
This adjustment is executed after completion of the adjustment in the following maintenance
mode.
U034(P.6-39) > U402(P.6-201) > U66(P.6-64) >
U403(P.6-202) > U71(P.6-68) > U404(P.6-203) > U407
Adjustment
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Select [Adj Data].
Figure 6-36
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-205
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Acquire data necessary for executing halftone automatic adjustment and ID correction.
Purpose
Execute when the halftone density reproducibility is not good
Adjustment
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display the execution information screen.
* :Test pattern 1 and Test pattern 2 are output on the A4/Letter size paper.
2.Set the Test Pattern 1 output as the original. Place the edge with the arrows toward the back
and the printed side facing down on the platen.
* :Load about 20 sheets of the blank paper on Test Pattern 1.
Figure 6-37
3.Press the [Start] key.
* :The 1st auto adjustment is executed.
4.Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.
* :Load about 20 sheets of the blank paper on Test Pattern 2.
5.Press the [Start] key.
* :The 2nd auto adjustment is executed.
6.[Finish] appears after normal completion.
7.An error code appears when an error occurs.
6-206
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Error codes
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-207
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Adjust the scanner section or DP scanning section using the specific originals automatically.
Scanner section:Original size magnification, leading edge timing, center line, chromatic aberra-
tion in main/sub scanning direction, MTF correction, color/monochrome input gamma, color cor-
rection matrix automatic adjustment
DP scanning section: Original size magnification, leading edge timing and center line, MTF cor-
rection, Input gamma, automatic adjustment of color correction matrix
Purpose
Execute when adjusting the scanner section or DP scanning section automatically.
6-208
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
6-209
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
*: When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the table scanning and
the barcode can't be read, adjust by the following procedure after input the target value manually.
In case of the target value manual input
1.Enter the target values which are shown on the lower part of the front page of the adjustment
original (P/N: 7505000005) by executing the maintenance mode U425.
2.Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the table.
3.Enter maintenance mode U411.
4.Select [Target].
5.Select [U425].
6.Press the [Start] key.
7.Select [Table(ChartA)].
8.Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment.
9.When automatic adjustment has completed properly, [OK] will be displayed.
In the following DP adjustment, if the image position shifts large, an error might occur when
adjusting with ChartA, therefore, adjust the color with ChartB (image position) first and then,
adjust with ChartA (color).
Method: DP FU (Chart B)
* :Adjusting the first side of the DP duplex scanning
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) face-up on the DP.
*:DP adjustment original (ChartB)
5 mm
149 ± 1 mm
74 ± 1 mm
Figure 6-38
6-210
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: DP FU (Chart A)
In case of the target value auto input
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-up on the DP.
2.Enter maintenance mode U411.
3.Select [Target].
4.Select [Auto].
5.Press the [Start] key.
6.Select [DP FU(ChartA)].
7.Press the [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjust-
ment.
8.When automatic adjustment has completed properly, [OK] will be displayed.
*: When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and
the barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.
Method: DP FD (Chart A)
In case of the target value auto input
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-down on the DP.
2.Enter maintenance mode U411.
3.Select [Target].
4.Select [Auto].
5.Press the [Start] key.
6.Select [DP FD(ChartA)].
7.Press the [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjust-
ment.
8.When automatic adjustment has completed properly, [OK] will be displayed.
*: When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and
the barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.
6-211
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
* :When automatic adjustment has completed properly, [OK] will be displayed. If an error
occurs during auto adjustment, error code "NGXX" is displayed and operation stops. In this
case, check the error and execute the automatic adjustment again.
Error codes
6-212
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-213
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Scan the test pattern image distribution directly from the scanner and adjust LSU light intensity.
Purpose
Execute when the drum unit or laser scanner unit is replaced.
Correct uneven developer/transfer density in the main scanning direction.
* :After completing, execute maintenance mode U464 [Calibration].
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each execution screen
Items Contents
Normal Mode Normal Mode
On/Off Config Uneven density correction On/Off setting
1st retrial
8.[Retry] appears unless normally completed.
9.Execute Step 3 to 7
2nd retrial
10.[Retry] appears unless normally completed.
11.Execute Step 3 to 7
* :An error code appears when an error occurs.
6-214
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
On Enable the uneven density correction
Off Disable the uneven density correction
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-215
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Execute the automatic adjustment of the timing at the print engine
Adjust leading edge timing/center line/margin
Purpose
Execute when performing various adjustment on the print engine section automatically
* : * Execute this mode in a simplified manner when the Chart B(302AC68243) is not available.
Method
1.Set A3/Ledger paper.
* :Load A4/Letter when the large capacity feeder is used.
2.Press the [Start] key.
3.Select [Execute].
4.Press the [Start] key.
* :A test pattern is outputted.
5.Set the output Test Pattern as the original.
6.Press the [Start] key.
* :Automatically perform adjustment from the top to bottom cassettes.
7.When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
* :The error code is displayed when the error occurs
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-216
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Enter the Lab values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original (P/N:
7505000005).
Purpose
Enter data in order to correct for differences in originals during the automatic adjustment
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
ChartA Setting the adjustment value of the table scanning
ChartB Set the adjustment value of the DP scanning
Method: ChartA
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
White Setting the white patch for the adjustment original
Black Setting the black patch for the adjustment original
Gray1 Setting the Gray1 patch for the adjustment original
Gray2 Setting the Gray2 patch for the adjustment original
Gray3 Setting the Gray3 patch for the adjustment original
C Setting the cyan patch for the adjustment original
M Setting the magenta patch for the adjustment original
Y Setting the yellow patch for the adjustment original
R Setting the red patch for the adjustment original
G Setting the green patch for the adjustment original
B Setting the blue patch for the adjustment original
Adjust Original Setting the main scanning and sub-scanning directions
Setting: White
1.Select items to set.
2.Enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original by using [Left/
Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys.
6-217
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Setting: Black
1.Select items to set.
2.Enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original by using [Left/
Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys.
Setting: Gray1
1.Select items to set.
2.Enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original by using [Left/
Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys.
Setting: Gray2
1.Select items to set.
2.Enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original by using [Left/
Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys.
Setting: Gray3
1.Select items to set.
2.Enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original by using [Left/
Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys.
6-218
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Setting: C
1.Select items to set.
2.Enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original by using [Left/
Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys.
Setting: M
1.Select items to set.
2.Enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original by using [Left/
Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys.
Setting: Y
1.Select items to set.
2.Enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original by using [Left/
Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys.
6-219
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: R
1.Select items to set.
2.Enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original by using [Left/
Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys.
Setting: G
1.Select items to set.
2.Enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original by using [Left/
Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys.
Setting: B
1.Select items to set.
2.Enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original by using [Left/
Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys.
6-220
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Black
belt 2
D E
Left edge
[Dist1] = (A+B+C)/3
[Dist2] = F
[Dist3] = D/2+E/2
COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010
Black belt 3
Original for adjustment (P/N: 7505000005)
Figure 6-39
6-221
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: DP(ChartB)
* :This setting is usually unnecessary.
1.Measure the distance "A" from the leading edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment
original.
2.Enter the value measured in "Lead" using the [+] [-] keys.
3.Measure the distance "B" from the left edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original.
4.Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the [+] [-] keys.
5.Measure the distance "C" from the leading black belt (inside) to the trailing black belt (inside)
on the adjustment original.
6.Enter the values measured in "Sub Scan" using the [+] [-] keys.
7.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
Main Scan
Lead
Sub Scan
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-222
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Contents
Display and change the density of each color in various image quality mode.
Purpose
Execute to change each color's balance.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
1.Select the image mode to change the setting.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Text+Photo Density of each color in the text+photo mode
Photo Density of each color in the photo mode
Photo/Printout Density of each color in the printed photo mode
Text Density of each color in the text mode
Graphics/Map Density of each color in the map mode
Copy/Printout Density of each color in the printed document mode
Setting: Text+Photo
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the set-
ting value is decreased.
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
Setting: Photo
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the set-
ting value is decreased.
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
6-223
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Setting: Photo/Printout
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the set-
ting value is decreased.
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
Setting: Text
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the set-
ting value is decreased.
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
Setting: Graphics/Map
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the set-
ting value is decreased.
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
6-224
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Setting: Copy/Printout
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the set-
ting value is decreased.
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
Supplement
Test copy of the original is available by pressing the [System Menu] key as interruption copy
mode when executing this maintenance mode.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Set permission/prohibition of the ID correction operation (calibration). Execute each setting of the
calibration.
Purpose
Execute the calibration setting when an image failure occurs or depending on the user’s request.
Execute Calibration when replacing the maintenance kit.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Permission Permit/Prohibit Calibration
Time Interval Sets the time interval to execute calibration after completing printing.
Mode Set execution cycle of the calibration
On/Sleep Out Calibration operation setting (power-up/recovery from sleep mode)
AP/NE Calibration operation setting (AP/NE)
Leaving Time Set the reference time to determine whether to execute calibration from
sleep time when recovering from Sleep mode
Timing Setting the execution timing by drive time
Target Value Setting the sensor target value for the toner thick layer calibration and
light intensity calibration
Print Rate(B/W) Setting the B/W calibration target value
6-225
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
Calib Executing Calibration
Solid Image Edge reduction setting
Setting: Permission
1.Select [On] or [Off].
Items Contents
On 1: Permitting Calibration
Off 0: Prohibiting Calibration
Items Contents
Short 0: Calibration cycle setting: Short
Normal 1: Calibration cycle setting: Normal
Long 2: Calibration cycle setting: Long
Custom 3: Calibration cycle setting: Custom
Auto 4: Calibration cycle setting: Auto
Items Contents
On 1: Permitting Calibration
Off 0: Prohibiting Calibration
6-226
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Setting: AP/NE
1.Select [On] or [Off].
Items Contents
On 1: Permitting Calibration
Off 0: Prohibiting Calibration
Setting: Timing
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-227
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Calib
1.Select [Execute].
2.Press the [Start] key.
* :Calibration starts.
Items Contents
Execute Execute Full Calibration
Items Contents
On 1: Enable smoothing edges
Off 0: Disable smoothing edges
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-228
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Refers to the ID correction data.
Purpose
Execute to check the data.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to check
* :Move to the display screen
Items Contents
Laser Power Display the light intensity control value.
Laser Power(En) Display the exposure level (En)
Laser Power(Drum) Display the half exposure level of the drum (Drum)
Laser Power(Max) Display the maximum exposure level (Max)
Bias Calib Sensor value for the toner layer calibration
T7 CTD T7 control value
Stress Primary transfer belt durability
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan light intensity control value.
M Display the Magenta light intensity control value.
Y Display the Yellow light intensity control value.
K Display the Black light intensity control value.
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan exposure level
M Display the Magenta exposure level
Y Displays the Yellow exposure level
K Displays the exposure level
Items Contents
C Display the half exposure level of the drum (Cyan)
M Display the half exposure level of the drum (Magenta)
6-229
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
Y Display the half exposure level of the drum (Yellow))
K Display the half exposure level of the drum (Black)
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan maximum exposure level (Max)
M Display the Magenta maximum exposure level (Max)
Y Display the Yellow maximum exposure level (Max)
K Display the Black maximum exposure level (Max)
Items Contents
C Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (cyan)
M Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (Magenta)
Y Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (Yellow)
K Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (Black)
Method: T7 CTD
* :The current value is displayed.
Items Contents
C T7 control value (Cyan)
M T7 control value (Magenta)
Y T7 control value (Yellow)
K T7 control value (Black)
Method: Stress
* :The current value is displayed.
Items Contents
Front Primary transfer belt durability (Front)
Rear Primary transfer belt durability (Rear)
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-230
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Contents
Set the operation of the color registration correction
Also, set the execution condition of the color registration correction by the LSU temperature vari-
ation.
Purpose
If the color registration is unstable due to the sensor failure, etc., set it to off to temporarily fix the
control value.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to setting screen
Items Contents
Color Regist Set the color registration correction
Timing Execute the color registration correction if the LSU temperature changes
by the specified value after the previous correction
Items Contents
On 1: Permitting the color registration correction operation
Off 0: Prohibiting the color registration correction operation
Setting: Timing
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-231
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Display the color registration correction data and transfer belt speed correction data.
Purpose
Execute to check the data.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to refer
* :Move to each screen
Items Contents
V Correction Display the primary transfer belt speed adjustment value
Auto(C) Displaying color registration automatic correction value (Cyan)
Auto(M) Displaying color registration automatic correction value (Magenta)
Auto(Y) Displaying color registration automatic correction value (Yellow)
Manual(C) Displaying manual color registration correction value (Cyan)
Manual(M) Displaying manual color registration correction value (Magenta)
Manual(Y) Displaying manual color registration correction value (Yellow)
Reference: V Correction
* :The current value is displayed.
Items Contents
Status Primary transfer belt speed adjustment value
Items Contents
Main Scan Color registration automatic adjustment value in the main scanning
direction.
Sub Scan Color registration automatic adjustment value in the sub scanning direc-
tion.
Magnification Color registration automatic correction value for magnification
Items Contents
Main Scan Color registration manual adjustment value in the main scanning direc-
tion.
Sub Scan Color registration manual adjustment in the sub scanning direction.
Magnification 1-6 Color registration manual correction value 1 for magnification 1-6
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-232
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Set the operation of the color registration correction and transfer belt speed correction.
Purpose
Adjustment when the color registration shift (transfer shift) appears on print.
Execute when replacing the transfer belt unit or laser scanner unit.
* :Make sure to execute U464 Calib before executing the color registration correction.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Select [Auto] to output the automatic adjustment chart.
* :Once selecting [manual] then, move to setting screen
Items Contents
Auto Executing color registration automatic correction
Manual Executing color registration manual correction
Belt Initialize Executing the primary transfer belt speed correction
Method: Auto
1.Select items to be executed.
Items Contents
Print Output the automatic adjustment chart.
Execute Start scanning and execute the automatic adjustment.
Method: Print
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Output the automatic adjustment chart.
Method: Execute
1.Place an original on the table and press the [Start]
key.
* :Execute the automatic adjustment.
2.When adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is
displayed. Chart for adjustment
* :The error code is displayed when the error
occurs
Error codes list
6-233
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Manual
1.Select items to be executed.
* :Move to setting screen
Items Contents
Regist Set the color registration adjustment value
Print Output the manual adjustment chart.
Method: Print
1.Press the [Start] key to output the manual adjustment chart.
Chart sample
Charts of H - 1 to 7 (top) and V - 1, 3 and 5 (bottom) are printed for each color M (magenta), C
(cyan) and Y (yellow).
Figure 6-41
Find the positions where two lines are best matched on each chart.
* :Correction is not necessary if the range is within [1] to [A].
In case of the illustration, "B" (-2) is the value that should be set.
* :A to I supports for -1 to -9
Figure 6-42
6-234
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Regist
1.Select items to set.
2.Change settings with the [*] [#] key.
3.Switch pages with[▲][▼] key.
6-235
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-236
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Execute to set compression ratio for JPEG image by the image quality mode.
Purpose
Change the setting depending on the image desired by the user. For example, in case of
enlarged copy of 200% or more, increase the setting value to change the compression ratio in
order to eliminate the roughness of the image. If the set value is reduced, compression is high
and image quality is deteriorated. If the set value is increased, image quality is improved but pro-
cessing speed is slower.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to setting screen
Items Contents
Copy Compression ratio for copying
Send Compression ratio for sending
System Compression ratio when storing in the system temporary.
Print Compression ratio for printer
Method: Copy
1.Select items to set.
* :Move to setting screen
Items Contents
Photo Compression ratio for the photo mode
Text Compression ratio for the text mode
Setting: Photo
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Setting: Text
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-237
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Send
1.Select items to set.
* :Move to setting screen
Items Contents
Photo Compression ratio for the photo mode
Text Compression ratio for the text mode
HC-PDF(BG) Set the compression ratio for high compression PDF
HC-PDF(Char) Set the compression ratio for High compression PDF (text color).
HC-PDF(File Size) Set the compression ratio for High compression PDF (compression pri-
ority).
Setting: Photo
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Setting: Text
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-238
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: HC-PDF(Char)
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-239
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Setting: System
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Setting: Print
1.Select items to set.
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Supplement
Test copy of the original is available by pressing the [System Menu] key as interruption copy
mode when executing this maintenance mode.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-240
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Contents
Execute the LSU cleaning by operating the LSI cleaning motor. Also, set the cleaning operation
interval and timing to enter the operation.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to be executed.
Items Contents
Execute Execute the LSU cleaning operation.
Cycle Set the LSU cleaning operation.
Method: Execute
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :The LSU slit glass is cleaned.
Method: Cycle
1.Select items to set.
Setting: Cnt
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :Settable in 500-sheet increments
2.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-241
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the rotation processing method of PDF image rotation method. Also, change the color table
and execute installation.
Purpose
Execute when changing the rotation processing method of PDF image.
Execute when changing the color table for the copy and the printer.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to setting screen
Items Contents
Mode Set the image process mode
Color Table Set the color table
Setting: Mode
1.Select items to set.
Items Contents
PDF Rotation Rotate the PDF image
2.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Setting Contents
value
0 The image rotation is designated to the internal parameter
1 The image rotation is designated to the actual image
2 The image rotation is designated to the internal parameter
(CTM rotation)
Items Contents
Color Table 1(Prn) Setting the default printer color table
Color Table 2(Prn) Setting the custom printer color table
Color Table1(Copy) Setting the default copy color table
Color Table2(Copy) Setting the custom copy color table
Install Installing the color table
Uninstall(Prn) Uninstalling the printer color table
Uninstall(Copy) Uninstalling the copy color table
6-242
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting value
TYPE_CA
TYPE_FJ
TYPE_HE
TYPE_KO
TYPE_KY*1
TYPE_RH
TYPE_ST*2
TYPE_TO
Setting value
CTYPE_A1*1
CTYPE_CA
CTYPE_FJ
CTYPE_KO
TYPE_KY*2
CTYPE_SH
CTYPE_RH
CTYPE_TO
Method: Install
* :Insert the USB memory with the color table files before selecting them.
Check if there is the color table file in the root folder of a USB memory.
1.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Color table installation
6-243
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Code Contents
OK Normal completion
E001 Error in connecting a USB memory
E002 Error in handling a file
EFFF Other errors
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-244
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the operation mode after detecting color originals with color/BW mixed originals.
Purpose
Mode: when copying color/BW mixed originals in ACS mode, change the setting to Mode3 if you
want to prioritize the productivity. However, if setting it to Mode3, even when monochrome origi-
nals come after color originals, C/M/Y developer maintenance counts are counted up.
Permission: set in case of color background image when printing an envelope in BW half speed
mode processed as color printing.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to setting screen
Items Contents
Mode Color/BW mode setting
Permission Permit monochrome printing at half speed
Setting: Mode
1.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Mode1 For users mostly printing in monochrome mode and color/monochrome
mixed mode is not high during continuous printing.
Monochrome printing remains in the color process speed after switching
to color and other process is switched .
Mode2 For users mostly printing in monochrome mode and color/monochrome
mixed mode is high during continuous printing.
Even when receiving a monochrome print request during color printing,
color printing operation is continued until 9 pages and color mode is
switched to monochrome mode when starting printing of the 10th page
(Color process is stopped).
Mode3 Appropriate for users who mostly print in color.
Once switched to the color mode, monochrome printing after that
remains in the color process including the surface speed.
Auto Mode 1 to 3 is automatically selected depending on the user's usage.
Select Mode 1 to 3 based on color print ratio and switch rate from the
print volume during the specified period.
6-245
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Permission
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
On Permit: monochrome printing (three colors release)
Off Prohibit: color printing (four color pressing)
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-246
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Check/set the TDRS
Purpose
Execute to check/set the TDRS
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Registration Changes to the TDRS Manager registration dialog
Information Transition to the Device Agent description dialog
On/Off Config Changes to the TDRS features setting dialog
Setting: Registration
3.Select items to set.
Items Contents
TDRS User Registering process for user and password
Access Code Register Access Code
Setting: TDRS User / Access Code / TDRS User & Access Code
4.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Regist Registers in the TDRS Manager
TDRS Server Set the TDRS server URL
TDRS User Set the TDRS Username
Access Code Set the TDRS access code
Proxy Server Set the TDRS proxy server URL
Proxy Port Set the TDRS proxy port number
Proxy User Set the TDRS proxy username
Text Set the TDRS description
6-247
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Error codes
Setting: Information
1.Displays the set contents
Items Contents
Agent ID Agent ID
Agent Type Agent Type
Model Display of the model name
Serial No Display of the machine serial number
Offline Display of the TDRS connection state
Items Contents
On Enables TDRS
Off Disables TDRS
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-248
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Initializes software switches, and all data and image memory in the backup data on the FAX
PWB according to the destination and OEM setting.
Initializes the file system and then initializes the communication record and the registered con-
tents if the file system is checked and an error is detected there.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
* :Display the entry screen for the destination code and OEM code.
Items Contents
Execute Executing data initialization
3.Select [Country Code] and enter a destination code using the numeric keys.
* :Refer to the following destination code list.
Items Contents
Country Code Set the destination code
OEM Code Set the OEM code
Kind of error
Unknown Country (When Country Code is unknown)
Unknown OEM (When OEM Code is unknown)
Unknown Country (When both are unknown)
6-249
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-250
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Initializes software switches other than the machine data on the FAX PWB according to the des-
tination and OEM setting.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB without changing the user registration data and the factory defaults
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
* :Display the entry screen for the destination code and OEM code.
Items Contents
Execute Executing data initialization
Items Contents
Country Code Set the destination code
OEM Code Set the OEM code
6-251
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the line type for FAX use
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Line Type].
Items Contents
Line Type Line Type
Items Contents
DTMF DTMF
10PPS 10PPS
20PPS 20PPS
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-252
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the number of rings for the automatic FAX/telephone switching for FAX use
Purpose
Adjust the number of rings to longer or shorter at the automatic FAX/telephone switching
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Rings(F/T)].
3.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :If the default is set to "0", the main unit will start FAX reception without any ringing.
4.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
* :[Completed] is displayed.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Initialize data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history or various ID.
Purpose
Clear the communication history
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Clear Com.Rec.].
Items Contents
Clear Com.Rec. Delete data of communication history and protocol list of displayed port
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-253
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
U610 System 1
(Message: System Setting 1)
Contents
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification and in the auto
reduction mode.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Cut Line: 100% Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100%
magnification.
Cut Line: Auto Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction
mode.
Cut Line: A4 Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R/Let-
terR) in the auto reduction mode.
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :Increase the setting value if a blank second page is output in the full magnification reception.
Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
2.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with
the trailing edge margin. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
6-254
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
* :Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with
the trailing edge margin. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
2.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-255
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
U611 System 2
(Message: System Setting 2)
Contents
Set the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Purpose
Set the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
ADJ LINES Set the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
ADJ LINES(A4) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is
set.
ADJ LINES(LT) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size
paper is set.
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-256
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-257
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
U612 System 3
(Message: System Setting 3)
Contents
Set the FAX operation and automatic printing of the protocol list.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Auto reduct Select auto reduction in the sub-scanning direction
Protocol List Set the automatic protocol list printing.
Items Contents
On Auto reduction is executed if the received document is longer than the
FAX paper.
Off Auto reduction is not performed.
Items Contents
Off The protocol list is not printed out automatically.
Err Automatically printed if a communication error occurs.
On Automatically printed out after communication.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-258
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
U615 System 6
(Message: System Setting 6)
Contents
Set the record width capacity and process if 11 inch width paper is set for the inch specification
machine
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
RX WIDTH FOR 11"
Items Contents
LEDGER Transmits the A3 width to the destination machine
B4 Transmits the B4 width to the destination machine
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-259
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the signal detection method for remote switching.
Change the setting according to the type of telephone connected to the main unit.
Purpose
Set the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Remote Mode] and press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
Remote Mode Setting the remote switching mode
Items Contents
One Set the one-shot type detection
Cont Set the continuous type detection
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-260
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the auto redialing interval and the number of times of auto redialing.
Purpose
FAX transmission may not be available if redialing interval is short. If long, it takes much time to
complete transmission. Change the setting to prevent the following problems.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Interval Set the auto redialing interval
Times Set the number of times of auto redialing
Setting: Interval
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Setting: Times
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-261
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the FAX communication.
Purpose
Set the following to correspond to field claims
Reducing the transmission time to improve the accuracy of reception when using a low quality
line
Improving the accuracy of communication during the international communication
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
TX Speed Set the communication starting speed.
RX Speed Set the reception speed.
TX Echo Set the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender.
RX Echo Set the reception speed.
Setting: TX Speed
Set the transmission speed of the sender. When the destination unit has the V.34 capability, V.34
is selected for transmission regardless of this setting.
Items Contents
14400bps/V17 V.17 14400bps
9600bps/V29 V.29 9600bps
4800bps/V27ter V.27ter 4800bps
2400bps/V27ter V.27ter 2400bps
Setting: RX Speed
Set the reception capacity to advise the transmitter by the DIS/NSF signal. When the destination
unit has the V.34 capability, V.34 is selected for transmission regardless of this setting.
Items Contents
14400bps V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27ter
9600bps V.29, V.27ter
4800bps Set to V.27ter
2400bps V.27ter (fallback only)
6-262
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
* :[Completed] is displayed.
Setting: TX Echo
Set the time to send the DCS signal after the DIS signal is received. Execute when an error
occurs with echo at the transmitter side.
Items Contents
500 Send the DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS.
300 Send the DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS.
Setting: RX Echo
Set the time to send the NSF, CSI or DIS signal after the CED signal is received. Execute when
an error occurs with echo at the receiver side.
Items Contents
500 Send the NSF, CSI or DIS 500ms after receiving the CED.
75 Send the NSF, CSI or DIS 75ms after receiving the CED.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-263
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the FAX communication.
Purpose
Set the transmission and reception of ECM
Set the CED frequency
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
ECM TX Set ECM transmission.
ECM RX Set ECM reception.
CED Freq The frequency of CED is set up.
Setting: ECM TX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission cost is higher priority than the image quality.
* :Do not set it to Off when connecting to the IP telephone line.
Items Contents
On ECM transmission is enabled.
Off ECM transmission is disabled.
Setting: ECM RX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission cost is higher priority than the image quality.
* :Do not set it to OFF when connecting to the IP (Internet Protocol) telephone line.
Items Contents
On ECM reception is enabled.
Off ECM reception is disabled.
6-264
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
2100 2100Hz
1100 1100Hz
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-265
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the FAX communication.
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Correspond to field claims when automatic FAX/telephone switching
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
1.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
DIS 4Byte Set the DIS signal to 4 bytes.
Num OF CNG(F/T) Set the number of the CNG detection in the automatic FAX/telephone
switching mode.
Items Contents
On Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are not sent.
Off Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.
Items Contents
1Time Set no. of detection of CNG to 1 time.
2Time Set no. of detection of CNG to 2 time.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-266
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the FAX communication.
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
V.34 Enables or disables the V.34 communication.
V.34-3429Hz Set the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz).
DIS 2Res Set the number of times of DIS signal reception.
RTN Check Set the reference for the RTN signal output.
Setting: V.34
Set whether to enable/disable the V.34 communication individually for transmission and recep-
tion.
Items Contents
On V.34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception.
TX V.34 communication is enabled for transmission only.
RX V.34 communication is enabled for reception only.
Off V.34 communication is disabled for both transmission and reception.
Setting: V.34-3429Hz
Set if the V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
Items Contents
On V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
Off V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is not used.
6-267
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
Once Responds to the first signal.
Twice Responds to the second signal.
Items Contents
5% Error line rate of 5%
10% Error line rate of 10%
15% Error line rate of 15%
20% Error line rate of 20%
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-268
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal. Exe-
cute it as one of measures to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur.
Purpose
* :Relax the communication conditions
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [TCF Check].
3.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-269
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote switching.
Set the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching.
Purpose
Set the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
3.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-270
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the time-out time for the fax communication.
Purpose
Mainly, executed to improve the accuracy of communication for international communication
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
1.Select items to set.
Items Contents
T0 TIME OUT Set the T0 time-out time.
T1 TIME OUT Set the T1 time-out time.
T2 TIME OUT Set the T2 time-out time.
Ta TIME OUT Set the Ta time-out time.
Tb1 TIME OUT Set the Tb1 time-out time.
Tb2 TIME OUT Set the Tb2 time-out time.
Tc TIME OUT Set the Tc time-out time.
Td TIME OUT Set the Td time-out time.
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-271
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Rings
Tb1 Ta
Tb2
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-272
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
1.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-273
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
U650 Modem 1
(Message: Modem 1)
Contents
Set the G3 cable equalizer. Set the modem detection level.
Purpose
Adjust the equalizer to be compatible with the line characteristics
Set to Improve the accuracy of communication when using a low quality line
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
Reg G3 TX Eqr Set the G3 transmission cable equalizer.
Reg G3 RX Eqr Set the G3 reception cable equalizer.
RX Mdm Level Set the modem detection level.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-274
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
U651 Modem 2
(Message: Modem 2)
Contents
Set the modem output level.
Purpose
Adjust to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics when installing the main unit
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
3.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-275
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the NCU (network control unit).
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Exchange Setting the PBX/PSTN connection
Dial Tone Set the PSTN dial tone detection.
Busy Tone Set the busy tone detection.
PBX Setting Setting the PBX connection
DC Loop Set the loop current detection before dialing.
Setting: Exchange
Select if the FAX is connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network.
Items Contents
PSTN Connected to the public switched telephone network.
PBX Connecting to the PBX
Items Contents
On The dial tone is detected.
Off The dial tone is not detected.
6-276
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Items Contents
On Detect the busy tone.
Off Does not detect the busy tone.
Items Contents
Flash Flashing mode
Loop Code number mode
Setting: DC Loop
Set if the loop current is detected before dialing.
Items Contents
On Detect the loop current before dialing.
Off Do not detect the loop current before dialing.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-277
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Outputs the list of fax communication data.
* :Printing a list is disabled either when a job is remaining in the buffer or when [Pause All Print
Jobs] is pressed to halt printing.
Purpose
Check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of the FAX.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to be executed.
3.Press the [Start] key.
4.Output selected list.
Items Contents
Sys Conf Report Prints the list of software switches, local telephone number, confidential
boxes, firmware versions and other information.
Action List Prints the list of the error logs and communication lines.
Self Sts Report Prints the list of FAX communication settings only in the maintenance
mode (self-status report).
Protocol List Outputs a list of communication procedures.
Error List Output the error list.
Addr List(No.) Outputs address book in the IDs order
Addr List(Idx) Outputs address book in the order of names.
One-touch List Outputs a list of one-touch.
Group List Outputs the group list.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-278
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Clear the communication history information of FAX/Internet FAX which is backed up in MFP.
Purpose
Execute to prevent information disclosure of the backup data.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to output.
Items Contents
RECOVERY FAX Stor- Enable to use the DIMM used in another machine.
age
FAX Data CLEAR Clear all the data in the DIMM.
Change FAX Storage Change the storage destination of the backup data
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-279
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
FAX package transmission is set up. Changes print size priority when receiving small size.
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
1.Select items to set.
Items Contents
FAX Bulk TX Set ON/OFF of FAX bulk transmission
A5 Pt Pri Chg Change of print size priority at the time of small size reception.
Items Contents
On FAX batch transmission is enabled.
Off FAX batch transmission is disabled.
Items Contents
On At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >B5 >A4 >B4 >A3
Off At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >A4 >B5 >A3 >B4
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-280
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the port applicable to the maintenance mode.
Purpose
Set the maintenance mode target port when installing multiple ports .
Setting is unnecessary if the same contents are set for both ports. Set only when different items
are set for each port.
* :This maintenance mode only appears when the multiple ports are installed.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press [Port Select].
* :Current setting display is inverted.
3.Select items to set.
Items Contents
ALL All ports
PORT 1 Port 1 (FAX PWB port)
PORT 2 Port 2 (Optional multiple port)
Note
Since the setting contents of this item are cleared when exiting the maintenance mode or turning
off the power, it is necessary to make settings after entering the maintenance mode again
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-281
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the software switches on the FAX PWB individually.
Purpose
Change the setting when a problem such as split output of received originals occurs
* :Since the communication performance is largely affected, normally this setting is not neces-
sary to change.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [SW No.].
3.Enter the desired software switch number (3 digits) using the numeric keys and press the
[Start] key.
Items Contents
SW No. Specify the software switch number (2 to 3 digits)
Items Contents
Bit Set the software switch bit (8bit).
6-282
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Modem setting
NCU setting
6-283
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-284
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display and clear the counter value by each paper source.
Purpose
Check the maintenance parts replacement timing. Execute to clear counters when replacing the
maintenance parts.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display the counts by paper source.
Items Contents
MPT Display and clear the MP tray counter value
Cassette1 Display and clear Cassette 1 counter value
Cassette2 Display and clear Cassette 2 counter value
Cassette3 *1 Display Cassette 3 counter value
Cassette4 *1 Display Cassette 4 counter value
Cassette5 *2 Display Cassette 4 counter value
Duplex Display and clear the duplex unit counter value
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-285
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Contents
Display and clear the jam counter by paper jam type.
Purpose
Execute to check the paper jam status. Execute to clear counters when replacing the mainte-
nance parts.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to be executed.
Items Contents
Cnt Displaying/clearing the jam counts
Total Cnt Displaying the accumulate jam counts
Method: Cnt
1.Select [Cnt].
* :Number of occurrence is displayed by jam code.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.
2.Select [Clear] to clear the jam counts.
* :Individual counters cannot be cleared.
3.Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-286
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display and clears the number of times of service call errors by service call error type.
Purpose
Execute to check the service call error. Execute to clear counters when replacing the mainte-
nance parts.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to be executed.
Items Contents
Cnt Display and clears the service call error counter.
Total Cnt Display accumulate service call error counts.
Method: Cnt
1.Select [Cnt].
* :Number of occurrence is displayed by service call error.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.
2.Select [Clear] to clear the service call error counter.
* :Individual counters cannot be cleared.
3.Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-287
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display the counter values of the document processor, 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet finisher
and inner finisher.
Purpose
Execute to check the usage status of the document processor, 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet
finisher and inner finisher.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the device to check.
* :Switched to the counter screen.
Items Contents
DP *1 Display the counter value of the document processor.
DF *2 Display the counter value of the document finisher.
Method: DP
* :Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
ADP Simplex original count is displayed.
RADP Duplex original count is displayed.
CIS *1 Display the counter value of simultaneous duplex scanning
Method: DF
* :Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
Sorter Display the counter value of the sorter.
Staple Display the counter value of the staple.
Punch Display the counter value of the PH usage.
Stack *1 Display the main tray exit counter value.
Saddle *1 Display the saddle exit counter value.
Fold *1 Display the center folding counter value.
Three Fold *1 Display the tri-folding counter value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-288
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Release the service call error with partial operation.
Purpose
If the partial operation is executed with a broken cassette, etc., make sure to execute it after
repairing the parts.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Reset the partial operation.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Display the total counter value.
Purpose
Display the total counter value to check.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display the total counter value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-289
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Clear the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4/Letter size paper and its period of time
(as shown on the service status page).
Purpose
Clear data as required at the time such as maintenance
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Clear the print coverage data.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-290
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display feed counts by paper size.
Purpose
Display the counts to confirm when replacing the maintenance parts .
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display feed counts by paper size.
Items Contents
A3 *1 Display A3 feed counts
B4 *1 Display B4 feed counts
A4 *1 Display A4 feed counts
B5 *1 Display B5 feed counts
A5 *1 Display A5 feed counts
Folio *1 Display Folio feed counts
Ledger *2 Display Ledger feed counts
Legal *2 Display Legal feed counts
Letter *2 Display Letter feed counts
Statement *2 Display Statement feed counts
ETC Display other feed count.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-291
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Retrieve the backup data to a USB memory from the main unit, or write the data from the USB
memory to the main unit.
Purpose
Back up the main unit information, and import or export to restore the main unit information
Method
1.Turn the power switch off.
2.Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.
3.Turn the power switch on.
* :Wait for about 10 seconds until the main unit recognizes a USB memory.
4.Press the [Start] key.
5.Select the object item.
* :Since data are dependent with each other, data other than selected are also retrieved or
written.
6-292
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
Import Importing data from the USB memory to the main unit.
Export Retrieving data from the main unit to the USB memory.
Code Contents
e000 Unspecified error
e0001 Parameter error
e0002 Generating a dummy file has failed.
e0003 The XML file to import does not exist
e0004 The exported file does not exist
e0100 to e01ff Error in handling addressbook
e0200 to e02ff Error in handling One-touch
e0300 to e03ff Error in handling user management
e0400 to e04ff Error in handling panel program data
e0500 to e05ff Error in handling forwarding FAX data
e0600 to e06ff Error in handling the system configuration
e0700 to e07ff Error in handling network parameters
e0800 to e08ff Error in handling job accounting
e0900 to e09ff Error in handling short-cuts
e0a00 to e0aff Error in handling job information
e0b00 to e0bff Error in handling FAX data
e0c00 toe0cff Error in handling printer data
e0d00 to e0dff Error in handling panel data
e0e00 to e0eff Error in handling document boxes
e1000 to e1fff Error in the device-related process
e2000 to e2fff Error in handling SOAP IF
e3000 to e3fff Error in handling KM-WSDL IF
e4000 to e4fff Error in process for import
(e4002) A file mandatory for importing is missing
(e4008) Invalid file header
e5000 to e5fff Error in the SOAP data rewriting process
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-293
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display the setting value of the charge count.
Purpose
Execute to check the setting value of the charge count.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to display.
* :Switched to each display screen.
Items Contents
Main Function Main function counts
Sub Function Sub functions counts
Items Contents
Col Copy (H) Display color copy counts (Coverage: High)
Col Copy (M) Display color copy counts (Coverage: Middle)
Col Copy (L) Display color copy counts (Coverage: Low)
Mono Color Copy Display mono color copy count.
B/W Copy Display B/W copy counts.
Col Prn (H) Display color printer counts (Coverage: High)
Col Prn (M) Display color printer counts (Coverage: Middle)
Col Prn (L) Display color printer counts (Coverage: Low)
B/W Prn Display B/W printer counts.
B/W FAX Display FAX counts.
Items Contents
Simplex Display simplex print counts.
Duplex Display duplex print counts.
Combine(Off) Display no combine printer counts.
Combine(2in1) Display combine printer counts (2in1).
Combine(4in1) Display combine printer counts (4in1).
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-294
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Clear all charge counts and machine life counts.
Supplement
The total charge counts and the machine life counts can be cleared only once if all count values
are 1000 or less.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initialize the charge count and machine life count.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Display the machine life counter value.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine life counter value.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display the machine life counter value.
Items Contents
Cnt Display the machine life counter value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-295
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Contents
Display and set the MC roller counter value
Purpose
Execute to confirm the counter value after main charger unit replacement. And also, execute
when clearing the counter value after the replacement.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display the MC roller counter value for each color.
Items Contents
C Display the MC roller counter value for Cyan.
M Display the MC roller counter value for Magenta.
Y Display the MC roller counter value for Yellow.
K Display the MC roller counter value for Black.
Method: Clear
1.Select items to set.
1.Select [Clear].
2.Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-296
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the function to record the in/out date of the maintenance mode or date executing each main-
tenance item individually and output the log file.
Purpose
Record the maintenance mode history to analyze the cause when a problem occurs.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to set.
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Export Exports Maintenance Log.
Setting Maintenance log output setting
Method: Export
1.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Export maintenance log to USB memory
Setting: Setting
1.Select items to set.
* :Select the key including the number to set indicated by each block.
* :Move to setting screen
Items Contents
U000 to U019 Set the maintenance log output for U000 to U019.
U020 to U029 Set the maintenance log output for U020 to U029.
U030 to U059 Set the maintenance log output for U030 to U059.
U060 to U099 Set the maintenance log output for U060 to U099.
U100 to U129 Set the maintenance log output for U100 to U129.
U130 to U159 Set the maintenance log output for U130 to U159.
U160 to U199 Set the maintenance log output for U160 to U199.
U200 to U249 Set the maintenance log output for U200 to U249.
U250 to U349 Set the maintenance log output for U250 to U349.
U400 to U499 Set the maintenance log output for U400 to U499.
U500 to U599 Set the maintenance log output for U500 to U599.
U600-U699 Set the maintenance log output for U600 to U699.
U900 to U999 Set the maintenance log output for U900 to U999.
6-297
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Adjust the paper loop amount when using the document processor.
Purpose
Execute when original no-feed jam, skew or creases on the original appears.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Select items to be adjusted.
6.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-298
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Execute maintenance mode registered in workflow data of machine main unit or USB memory in
order
Purpose
Execute when you want to register routine maintenance mode work in advance.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select items to be executed.
* :Move to each execution screen
Items Contents
Continue Resume interrupted workflow.
Execute(USB) Execute the workflow in a USB memory.
Execute Execute the workflow saved in the main unit.
Entry(USB) Register the workflow in a USB memory to the main unit.
Entry Register the workflow in the main unit manually.
Log Display the latest workflow execution history.
Method: Continue
1.Select maintenance mode number to execute.
2.Press the [Start] key.
* :Selected maintenance mode is executed.
Method: Execute(USB)
1.Make sure to check that the LED display turns off before turning off the power switch
2.Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.
3.Turn the power switch on.
4.Enter maintenance mode U952.
5.Select [Execute(USB)].
6.Select [workflow].
Items Contents
WorkFlowData 01 - 07 Workflow data in a USB memory
Method: Execute
1.Select the place to save the data to execute.
Items Contents
Data 1 - 8 Workflow save area in the main unit
6-299
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Low-end model
Items Contents
SET UP 464,469,410,000,927,278
HIGH ALTITUDE 140,101,464
WARRANTY 089,000
MK-A 930,464,469,410,251
MK-B 930,464,469,410,251
MK-A MK-D 930,469,127,464,469,410,251
MK-B MK-E 930,464,469,410,251
EH SETUP 411,034,246,211
High-end model
Items Contents
SET UP 464,469,410,000,927,278
HIGH ALTITUDE 140,101,464
WARRANTY 089,000
MK-A 119,930,140,469,127,464,469,412,464,410,251
MK-B 119,930,140,464,469,412,464,410,251
EH SETUP 411,034,246,211
Method: Entry(USB)
1.Make sure to check that the LED display turns off before turning off the power switch
2.Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.
3.Turn the power switch on.
4.Enter maintenance mode U952.
5.Select [Entry(USB)].
6.Select [workflow].
Items Contents
WorkFlowData 01 - 07 Workflow data in a USB memory
Items Contents
Data 1 - 8 Workflow save area in the main unit
8.Select [Execute].
* :Register the workflow data in a USB memory to the main unit.
6-300
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Entry
1.Select [Entry].
2.Select the workflow save area.
Items Contents
Data 1 - 8 Workflow save area in the main unit
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, enter the maintenance number to register in the
workflow.
Items Contents
Flow 1 - 14 Registered maintenance numbers
e.g.
It is possible to register in case if USB memory with the following command and wording / main-
tenance number (changeable) is inserted
File format: xxx.mwf
1, SET UP,464,469,410,000,927,278
2, HIGH ALTITUDE, 140,101,464
3, WARRANTY,089,000
4, MK-A,119,930,140,469,127,464,469,412,464,410,251
5, MK-A,119,930,140,469,127,464,469,412,464,410,251
6, EH SETUP,411,034,246,211
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-301
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Transfer the log files stored in the HDD to a USB memory.
The data to be transferred includes a log and a panel display when acquiring logs.
Purpose
Transfer the log file stored in the HDD to a USB memory for investigation when a failure occurs.
Method
1.Make sure to check that the LED display turns off before turning off the power switch
2.Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.
3.Turn the power switch on.
4.Enter maintenance mode U964.
5.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Transfer the log file.
Supplement
How to retrieve the log when the operation panel freezes
Start retrieving the log when pressing and holding three keys on the operation panel (Status/Job
Cancel + System Menu/Counter + Stop) for 3 to 6 seconds.
The memory lamp is blinking during retrieving and turns on when completed.
The log retrieved this way can be saved in a USB memory.
Display Contents
No USB Storage The USB memory is not installed
No File No file
Mount Error USB memory mount error
File Delete Error Failed to delete existing files in the USB memory
Copy Error Failed to copy from HDD to USB memory
Unmount Error USB memory unmount error
Other Error Other error
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-302
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display the toner area code.
Purpose
Execute to check current setting of toner area code and model code.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display the toner area code and model code
Items Contents
Area Code Toner container area code
Model Code Model code
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Store the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory.
Purpose
In order to check the data, store the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Stores data in a USB memory.
Items Contents
1 USB memory is broken. USB memory was disconnected during data
processing or is write-protected.
4 USB memory is full.
50 Other error occurred
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-303
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Contents
Refer/Change the information about CBM (condition based maintenance) in KFS.
Purpose
Refer/Change the counter, threshold and setting current value about CBM (condition based
maintenance)
Execution
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
CBM Alert CBM Alert
Cassette Feed Timing Paper feed timing
Retard Retard
Image Quality Background image/Thin density
DP Feed Retry DP paper feed retry
Scan Image Image vertical streak has entered
Items Contents
Engine Engine
Scanner Scanner
Setting: Engine
1.Select the item to set.
2.Change the setting value by using [+] [-] key or the numeric keypad.
Setting: Scanner
1.Select the item to set.
2.Change the setting value by using [+] [-] key or the numeric keypad.
6-304
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
3.Press the [Start] key and then fix the setting value.
Items Contents
Total Error Cnt Total Error Counts threshold for market
Total Error Cnt(HQ) Total Error Counts threshold for development
Error Cnt Per Unit Error Counts Per Unit threshold for market
Notice 1K Cnt The number of Notice 1K Counts
Error Cnt Per 1K Error Counts Per 1K threshold for market
Error Cnt Per 1K(HQ) Error Counts Per 1K threshold for development
Condition Setting Condition Setting
6-305
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
3.Press the [Start] key and then fix the setting value.
6-306
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Items Contents
Background Of Print- Background Of Printing
ing
Thin Concentration Thin Concentration
Retry Setting Retry Setting
Calibration Calibration
6-307
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Method: Calibration
1.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Dot Cnt Dot counts when a calibration was succeeded last time
Developing Time Developing driving time when a calibration was succeeded last time
6-308
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
3.Press the [Start] key and then fix the setting value.
Items Contents
Cnt DP Feed Retry counts
Setting DP Feed Retry setting
Setting: Cnt
1.Select the item to set.
2.Change the setting value by using [+] [-] key or the numeric keypad.
6-309
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Setting: Setting
1.Select the item to set.
2.Change the setting value by using [+] [-] key or the numeric keypad.
Items Contents
Cnt Scan Image counts
Setting Scan Image setting
Setting: Cnt
1.Select the item to set.
2.Change the setting value by using [+] [-] key or the numeric keypad.
Setting: Setting
1.Select the item to set.
2.Change the setting value by using [+] [-] key or the numeric keypad.
6-310
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
Display the developer unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit number.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Display the developer unit number.
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan developer unit number.
M Display the Magenta developer unit number.
Y Display the Yellow developer unit number.
K Display the Black developer unit number.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-311
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display the machine serial number and developer counter history.
Purpose
Display the machine serial number and developer count to check.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Select color to refer to.
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan developer unit history.
M Display the Magenta developer unit history.
Y Display the Yellow developer unit history.
K Display the Black developer unit history.
Items Contents
Machine History 1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Cnt History 1 to 3 Developer counter history
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-312
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Apply Scandisk to the HDD for data recovery.
Purpose
There might be the possibility that HDD management information may become error when turn-
ing off the power while accessing the hard disk, HDD recovery is executed.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute HDD scan disk request
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
Contents
Display the accumulated DP CIS lighting time
Purpose
Execute to check the DP CIS usage.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :DP CIS accumulated lighting time is displayed in minutes.
Items Contents
CIS Display the accumulated DP CIS lamp lighting time
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-313
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Display the scanner operation counts.
Purpose
Display the number of scanner operation to check the usage status.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Current number of operation is displayed.
Items Contents
Copy Scan Display times of copy and scan operations.
Fax Scan Display times of FAX scan operations.
Other Scan Display times of other scan operations.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-314
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7 Troubleshooting
7-1 Image formation problems
(1) Isolate the place of image failure
<How to isolate the cause>
Print Test Page to check an image failure.
[System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Setting]
Yes: engine factor
No: Scanner factor
Check if image failure is enlarged or reduced in the zoom mode.
Yes: Scanner factor
Copying :
APC PWB
LED lamp CCD Engine PWB (LSU)
Sending :
7-1
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(2) Scanner Factors (When scanning the front side through DP, or scanning the back
side through the mechanically reversed DP)
7-2
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-3
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-4
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-5
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-6
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-7
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-8
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-9
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-10
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(2-5) Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image
(Front side)
(When scanning the front side through DP)
(2-6) Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image
(Back side)
(When scanning the back side through the mechanically reversed DP)
7-11
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-12
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-13
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-14
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(2-9) Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image
(Front side)
(When scanning the front side through DP)
(2-10) Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image
(Back side)
(When scanning the back side through the mechanically reversed DP)
7-15
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-16
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-17
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-18
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-19
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-20
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-21
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-22
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-23
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-24
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(3) Scanner Factors (Dual scan DP:When scanning the back side through DP)
7-25
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(3-9) Moiré
7-26
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-27
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-28
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-29
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-30
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(3-4) Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image
Object: Dual scan DP
(When scanning the back side through DP)
7-31
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-32
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-33
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(3-7) Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image
Object: Dual scan DP
(When scanning the back side through DP)
7-34
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-35
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(3-9) Moiré
Object: Dual scan DP
(When scanning the back side through DP)
7-36
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-37
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-38
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-39
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-40
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-41
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-42
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-43
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4-10) Moiré
7-44
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-45
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-46
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-47
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-48
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-49
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-50
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4-5) Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the original The original is not properly Reset the originals.
set on the contact glass.
2 Checking the contact glass The contact glass is not Reattach the contact glass. Detaching
properly attached. and reat-
taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
3 Executing U067 The scanner center line is Adjust U067 [Front]. Mainte-
not adjusted. nance
Mode List
4 Executing U411 The automatic table scan- Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
ning adjustment is not exe- A)]. nance
cuted. Mode List
7-51
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-52
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-53
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4-8) Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the original The original is not set Reset the originals.
properly. (The leading
edge of the original is not
set on the contact glass
properly)
2 Executing U066 The scanner leading edge Adjust U066 [Front]. Mainte-
timing is incorrect nance
Mode List
3 Executing U411 The scanner leading edge Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
timing is incorrect A)]. nance
Mode List
4 Checking the home posi- The home position sensor Reattach the home position
tion sensor is not properly attached. sensor.
5 Checking the scanner The scanner drive belt is Reattach the scanner drive
drive belt loose. belt.
6 Checking the scanner wire Installation of the scanner Retighten the screw of the
drums wire drum is loosen. scanner wire drums.
7 Checking the scanner The attachment of the Retighten the screw of the
drive gear scanner drive gear is scanner drive gear.
loose.
7-54
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-55
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4-10) Moiré
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Changing the setting The original image quality Set [Original Image] in [Sys- Function
is not set properly. (moiré tem Menu/Counter] key > Defaults
changes depending on the [Common Settings] > [Func- (Opera-
image quality.) tion Defaults]. tion Guide
- Section
6)
2 Checking the original The original is not set Rotate the originals in 90
properly. (moiré appears in degrees and reset them.
the original scanning direc-
tion.)
3 Executing U065 The ratio in the main scan- Change the value at U065 Mainte-
ning direction is large. [Main Scan] to reduce the nance
(This problem occurs when scanner magnification in the Mode List
the print ratio is set as main scanning direction.
100%.)
4 Executing U411 Each adjustment of the Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
scanner section is incor- A)]. nance
rect Mode List
7-56
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-57
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-58
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-59
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-60
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-61
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-62
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-63
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-64
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-65
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5) Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)
7-66
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5-13) Offset
7-67
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-68
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-69
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
Content of Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)
(5-1) Colored background
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the primary The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at Detaching
transfer unit dirty. the outer pitch (long period and reat-
that spans between papers) taching the
of the transfer belt, clean the Primary
transfer belt. After cleaning, Transfer
in case if it is not improved Unit
even performing the calibra-
tion and color adjustment,
replace the primary transfer
unit.
2 Checking the primary The primary transfer bias Correct the primary transfer
transfer bias contact contact is deformed. bias contact so that it
grounds securely.
3 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Correct the secondary trans-
transfer bias contact bias contact is deformed. fer bias contact so that it
grounds the shaft of the sec-
ondary transfer roller
securely.
4 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer If image failure occurs at the Detaching
transfer roller roller is dirty. circumferential pitch of the and reat-
secondary transfer roller, taching the
clean it. If it is not improved, Second-
replace the secondary trans- ary Trans-
fer roller. fer Roller
7-70
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-71
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-72
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5-5) Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width
guides or the MP paper width guides or the MP guides or the MP paper width
width guides paper width guides do not guides to fit them with the
fit with the paper size. paper size.
2 Executing U034 The center line when Adjust the center line at U034 Mainte-
image writing the data is [LSU Out Left]. nance
incorrect. Mode List
7-73
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-74
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-75
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-76
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-77
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5-11) Irregular errors at the leading edge of the original image and the copy image
(variation of paper leading edge timing)
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Executing U034 The leading edge timing is Adjust the leading edge tim- Mainte-
not properly adjusted. ing at U034 [LSU Out Top]. nance
Mode List
2 Executing U051 The paper loop amount Execute U051 to adjust the Mainte-
before registration is paper loop amount before nance
improper. registration. Mode List
3 Checking the clutch The feed conveying Execute U032. If the paper Mainte-
related clutch does not feed / conveying related nance
operate correctly. clutches (feed clutch, middle Mode List
clutch or registration clutch) Detaching
do not operate properly, reat- and reat-
tach them and reconnect the taching the
connectors. If not repaired, Feed Drive
replace the feed drive unit. Unit
7-78
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5-13) Offset
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are Replace with the paper within Cassette /
used. the specification, or change MP Tray
to the media type setting Settings
closest to the specified paper. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
2 Changing the setting The media type is not Change the settings accord- Cassette /
properly set. ing to the media type (paper MP Tray
weight). Settings
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Firmware upgrade The initial setting value Upgrade the engine firmware Firmware
change for the transfer belt to the latest version Update
cleaning bias by the
engine firmware is not
reflected. (Implemented in
the middle of production)
4 Executing U107 The setting value of the Reset the primary transfer Mainte-
primary transfer cleaning cleaning voltage to the nance
voltage at U107 is incor- default value at U107. Mode List
rect.
5 (If occurs only on the first The transfer belt is not Set [On] at U107 Mainte-
sheet after finishing contin- cleaned properly at the [1stSheetCLN B/W]. (Engine nance
uous monochrome print- time of the first sheet out- firmware version 002.007 or Mode List
ing) Execute U107 (35ppm put after finishing continu- after)
models and over) ous monochrome printing.
6 Checking the primary The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at Detaching
transfer unit dirty. the outer pitch (long period and reat-
that spans between papers) taching the
of the transfer belt, clean the Primary
transfer belt. Transfer
Unit
7 Checking the primary The primary transfer clean- Clean the primary transfer
transfer cleaning bias con- ing bias contact smudges cleaning bias contact. Or,
tact or is deformed. correct its shape so that it is
securely grounded.
8 Executing U106 The secondary transfer Reset the secondary transfer Mainte-
voltage is improperly set. voltage to the default value at nance
U106. Mode List
9 Cleaning the secondary The secondary transfer When the image failure
transfer roller roller is dirty. appears with the secondary
transfer roller pitch, clean the
secondary transfer roller.
7-79
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-80
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-81
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-82
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-83
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-84
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-85
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5-19) The vertical white streaks or bands appear on the image when scanning the
first or second side through DP
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the primary Surface of the transfer belt If the image failure occurs at Detaching
transfer unit is dirty or scratched. the outer pitch (long period and reat-
that spans between papers) taching the
of the transfer belt, clean the Primary
transfer belt. If it is not Transfer
improved, replace the pri- Unit
mary transfer unit.
2 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer If image failure occurs at the Detaching
transfer roller roller is dirty or has some circumferential pitch of the and reat-
scratches. secondary transfer roller, taching the
clean it. If it is not improved, Second-
replace the secondary trans- ary Trans-
fer roller. fer Roller
3 Checking the exit feedshift Paper contacts to the exit Check the deflection of paper Detaching
guide feedshift guide strongly. at the time of output and rein- and reat-
stall the exit feedshift guide. tachint the
Exit Unit
7-86
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-87
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-88
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-89
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-90
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(6-15) Offset
7-91
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-92
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-93
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-94
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-95
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-96
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-97
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-98
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-99
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-100
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-101
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-102
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-103
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-104
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-105
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-106
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-107
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-108
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-109
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-110
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-111
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-112
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-113
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-114
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-115
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-116
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-117
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(6-15) Offset
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh. Adjust-
ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Setting the drum heater Developing section is Set [ON] at U339 [Drum Mainte-
affected by the humidity Heater]. nance
Mode List
3 Drum unit replacement The drum surface is worn Replace the drum unit. Detaching
down or has some and reat-
scratches. taching the
Drum Unit
4 Cleaning the developing The developer roller is dirty Clean the developer roller.
roller
5 Developer unit replace- The developer roller sur- Replace the developer unit. Detaching
ment face is worn down or has and reat-
scratches. taching the
Developer
Unit
7-118
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-119
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(6-18) Light vertical black streaks at both edge of paper which is outside of the
image area
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Executing Developer Toner outside the develop- As a relief measure, execute Adjust-
Refresh ing area width (311mm) of Developer Refresh. ment/
the developing roller flies Mainte-
and is transferred to the nance
drum side. As a result, light Menu
vertical black streaks (Opera-
appears on both ends (out tion Guide
of the image area) of the - Section
SRA3 paper which is wider 10)
than the developing area
width.
2 Explanation for user Toner outside the develop- Explain to the user that it is a
ing area width (311mm) of vertical black streak which is
the developing roller flies outside the image area and
and is transferred to the can not be completely elimi-
drum side. As a result, light nated. (It will not be com-
vertical black streaks pletely eliminated by
appears on both ends (out exchanging the developing
of the image area) of the unit, etc.).
SRA3 paper which is wider "SRA 3 (450 x 320 mm) is the
than the developing area paper width that can be
width. printed in the margin" Line for
marking design work and
marking for cutting (registra-
tion mark) ". The location
where this vertical black
streak occurs is outside the
[registration mark] and it is
not an image area. therefore,
there is no problem in actual
use."
7-120
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-121
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-122
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-123
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-124
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Contents
(1-1) Paper jam due to the cover-open detection
(1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper
(1-3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl
(1-4) Paper jam due to the guide factor.
(1-5) Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette or the paper deck
(1-6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper
(1-7) Paper jam due to the conveying rollers or pulleys
(1-8) Paper jam due to the sensor
(1-9) Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure
(1-10) Paper jam due to the static electricity
(1-11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette are always
damp.)
7-125
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper The paper curls. Reload paper upside down.
2 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan the paper well and load it
enough. by reversing the paper direc-
tion
3 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace the paper.
7-126
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(1-3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the
paper curl
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a When the dog-ear occurs,
and the paper piece of paper, etc. Or the check if a piece of torn paper,
leading edge of the sheet foreign objects or the burrs
is bent. on the part do not exist on the
paper path, and remove
them.
2 Fuser temperature setting The paper curls since the Reset the fuser temperature Mainte-
fuser temperature is to the default value at U161 nance
improper. when the paper curls. Mode List
7-127
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(1-5) Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette or the paper deck
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width
guides width guides do not fit with guides or the MP paper width
the paper size. guides along the paper size
when the paper skew or the
paper creases occur.
2 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan paper and reload it in the
enough. paper source. If a part of the
paper is bent, remove it.
3 (When feeding the paper The paper is not properly When the paper is loaded
from the large capacity loaded. over the guide in the deck of
feeder) Checking the the large capacity paper
paper feeder,
reload the paper so the paper
edge is not on the corner of
the deck.
7-128
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-129
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-130
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(1-11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette
are always damp.)
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper stor- Papers have been stored Ask users to store paper in a
age place in the improper place. dry place.
2 Installing the cassette The paper is damp. Install the cassette heater Installing
heater and set the mode by execut- the
ing U327. optional
equip-
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
7-131
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
3DSHUMDP
2SHQFDVVHWWH
5HPRYHWKHSDSHU
7RUHPRYHSDSHUZKLFKLVGLIILFXOW
WRJHWDFFHVVWRWKHFDVVHWWH
FDQEHUHPRYHG
&ORVHWKHFDVVHWWH
-$0
H
K
M
Q L
O J H N
P P H N
N N
P P H
H
H G
A
H
B F
E C
R I
S D
7-132
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
20
21
M 23
32 22
K
28
Q 24 12
14 U
O
27 O O J 13
11 10
L
26 9
P 25
W H
O 3
8
4
V
30
7 6 G
1
19 F
A T 5
2 H
29
R B 17
31
18
I
E 16 C 15
Figure 7-45
1. Paper sensor 1 12. Upper exit full sensor 22. DP timing sensor
2. Paper sensor 2 13. BR conveying sensor 1 23. DP exit sensor
3. DU sensor 1 14. BR conveying sensor 2 24. DF entry sensor
4. DU sensor 2 15. PF paper sensor 1 25. DF middle sensor
5. Conveying sensor 16. PF paper sensor 2 26. DF exit sensor
6. MP conveying sensor 17. PF vertical conveying sensor 27. DF drum sensor
7. Registration sensor 18. PF horizontal conveying sen- 28. DF sub exit sensor
8. Belt roll-up sensor sor 29. BF entry sensor
9. Fuser sensor 19. PF feed sensor 30. BF vertical conveying sensor
10. Exit reversing sensor 20. DP feed sensor 31. BF exit sensor
11. Lower exit full sensor 21. DP backside timing sensor 32. MT tray exit sensor
7-133
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
19
20
32 M 22
21
N 23
N 12
N 14 13
Q U
25 11 10
N
24 LL J
9
W H
H
3
8
4
VV
6
7V G
G
G
1
T
A
A
A 5
2 HH
B
B
B
17
III
C
C
C 15
18
D 16
Figure 7-46
7-134
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-135
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM
Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi-
tion tion tion tion tion tion
J0000 - J1604 I J4215 W J4903 W J6070 O J7002 L
J0100 - J1614 I J4218 W J4904 W J6080 O J7100 R
J0101 - J4002 T J4219 W J4905 W J6100 O J7110 R
J0104 - J4003 T J4301 U J4908 W J6101 N J7200 R
J0105 - J4004 T J4302 U J4909 W J6102 L J7210 S
J0106 - J4005 T J4303 U J4911 J J6110 O J7300 R
J0107 - J4012 V J4304 U J4912 J J6111 N J7310 S
J0110 - J4013 V J4305 U J4913 J J6112 L J7400 R
J0111 - J4014 V J4309 U J4914 J J6200 O J7500 R
J0114 - J4015 V J4311 U J4915 J J6210 O J7600 R
J0212 - J4101 V J4312 U J4918 J J6300 O J7700 R
J0213 - J4102 V J4313 U J4919 J J6301 N J7710 R
J0300 - J4103 V J4314 U J5001 J J6310 O J7800 O
J0501 A J4104 V J4315 U J5002 J J6311 N J7810 K
J0502 B J4105 V J4319 U J5003 J J6400 O J7900 O
J0503 C J4108 V J4401 U J5004 J J6401 N J7901 N
J0504 D J4109 V J4402 U J5005 J J6402 L J7902 L
J0508 U J4111 W J4403 U J5008 J J6410 O J9000 M
J0509 G J4112 W J4404 U J5009 J J6411 N J9001 M
J0511 V J4113 W J4405 U J5011 J J6412 L J9002 M*1,*2
J0512 T J4114 W J4409 U J5012 J J6500 O J9004 M*1,*3
J0513 T J4115 W J4701 W J5013 J J6510 O J9005 M*1,*2
J0514 T J4118 W J4702 W J5014 J J6511 N J9006 M*1
J0518 V J4119 W J4703 W J5015 J J6512 L J9007 M*1
J0519 V J4201 W J4704 W J5018 J J6600 O J9008 M*2
J0523 C J4202 W J4705 W J5019 J J6610 O J9009 M*1,*2
J0524 E J4203 W J4709 W J6000 -*2 J6710 O J9010 M
J0533 C J4204 W J4711 U J6001 -*1 J6810 O J9011 M
J0534 E J4205 W J4712 U J6002 -*3 J6811 N J9110 M
J0545 F J4208 W J4713 U J6012 -*3 J6812 L J9200 M*1,*3
J0555 F J4209 W J4714 U J6020 O J6910 O J9210 M*1
J1403 C J4211 W J4715 U J6021 N J6911 N J9300 M*2
J1404 I J4212 W J4719 U J6041 N J6912 L J9310 M*2
J1413 I J4213 W J4901 W J6050 O J7000 P J9400 M
J1414 I J4214 W J4902 W J6060 O J7001 N J9410 M
7-136
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM
Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi-
tion tion tion tion tion tion
J9600 M*1,*2
J9610 M*1,*2
*1:DF-7100
*2:DF-7110
*3:DF-7120
7-137
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-138
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-139
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-140
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-141
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-142
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-143
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-144
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-145
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-146
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-147
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-148
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-149
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-150
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-151
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-152
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-153
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-154
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-155
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-156
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-157
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-158
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-159
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-160
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-161
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-162
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-163
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-164
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-165
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-166
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-167
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-168
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-169
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-170
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-171
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-172
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-173
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-174
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-175
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-176
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-177
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-178
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-179
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-180
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-181
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-182
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-183
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-184
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-185
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-186
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-187
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-188
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-189
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-190
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-191
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-192
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-193
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-194
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-195
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-196
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-197
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-198
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-199
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-200
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-201
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-202
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-203
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-204
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-205
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-206
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-207
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-208
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-209
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-210
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-211
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-212
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-213
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-214
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-215
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-216
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-217
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-218
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-219
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-220
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-221
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-222
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-223
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-224
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-225
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-226
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-227
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-228
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-229
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-230
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-231
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-232
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-233
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-234
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-235
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-236
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-237
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-238
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
J6102: DF conveying sensor does not turn on even predetermined time has passed after fuser sensor located
at the main unit turned on.
7-239
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-240
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-241
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-242
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-243
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-244
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-245
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-246
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-247
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-248
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-249
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-250
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
J6710: DF drum sensor stay jam during paper conveying into the BF unit
Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
The DF drum sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on when conveying the
paper to the folding unit.
7-251
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-252
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-253
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-254
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-255
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-256
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-257
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-258
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-259
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-260
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-261
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-262
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-263
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-264
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-265
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-266
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-267
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-268
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-269
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-270
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-271
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-272
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-273
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-274
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-275
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-276
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-277
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-278
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-279
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-280
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-281
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-282
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-283
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-284
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-285
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-286
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-287
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-288
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-289
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-290
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-291
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-292
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-293
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-294
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-295
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-296
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-297
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-298
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-299
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-300
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4-3) (When feeding the LetterR or Legal size paper in the main unit with the punch
unit for the inner finisher) Dog-ear at the corners of the paper leading edge being
caught by the PH cutter receiving holes
Condition: When feeding LetterR or Legal on the machine with the punch unit
installed for the inner finisher. (Inch specification only)
When feeding LetterR or Legal size paper from cassette 1-4 (except the large capacity feeder), duplex section
or the MP tray, the corners of paper leading edge is caught by the PH cutter receiving holes of the punch unit
and the dog-ear occurs
7-301
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4-4) Dog-ear
Object: Large capacity feeder
When feeding from the large capacity feeder, the dog-ear occurs at the primary feeding due to the downward
curl of paper.
7-302
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-303
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-304
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-305
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-306
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-307
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-308
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-309
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-310
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-311
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-312
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-313
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
2 Checking the machine The EEPROM for the dif- Check the machine serial U004 Exe-
serial No. in the EEPROM ferent main unit is Nos of MAIN and ENGINE at cution
on the engine PWB installed. U004, and install the correct
EEPROM on the engine
PWB if the ENGINE machine
serial No. differs.
Note: Be sure not to execute
U004 if the machine serial
No. differs from the machine
serial No. indicated on the
main unit to prevent the dif-
ferent machine serial No.
from over written. (Dontselect
[Execute] and press the
[Start] key.)
3 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. When the MAIN machine U004 Exe-
serial No. differs at U004, cution
replace the main PWB and
execute U004.
7-314
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-315
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-316
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
C0361: Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
The communication with the feed ASIC failed 10 times continuously.
7-317
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-318
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
C0362: Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
The communication with the feed ASIC failed 10 times continuously.
7-319
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-320
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-321
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-322
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-323
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-324
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-325
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-326
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-327
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-328
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-329
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-330
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-331
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-332
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-333
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-334
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-335
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-336
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-337
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-338
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-339
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-340
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-341
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-342
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-343
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-344
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-345
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-346
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-347
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-348
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-349
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-350
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-351
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-352
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-353
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-354
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-355
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-356
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-357
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-358
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-359
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-360
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-361
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-362
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-363
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-364
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-365
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-366
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-367
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-368
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-369
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-370
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-371
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-372
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-373
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-374
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-375
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-376
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-377
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-378
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-379
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-380
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-381
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-382
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-383
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-384
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-385
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-386
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-387
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-388
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-389
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-390
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-391
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-392
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-393
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-394
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-395
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-396
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-397
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-398
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-399
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-400
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-401
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-402
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-403
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-404
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-405
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-406
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-407
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-408
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-409
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-410
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-411
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-412
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-413
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-414
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-415
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-416
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-417
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-418
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-419
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-420
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-421
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-422
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-423
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-424
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-425
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-426
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-427
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-428
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-429
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-430
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-431
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-432
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-433
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-434
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-435
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-436
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-437
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-438
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-439
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-440
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-441
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-442
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-443
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-444
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-445
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-446
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-447
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-448
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-449
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-450
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-451
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-452
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-453
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-454
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-455
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-456
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-457
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-458
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-459
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-460
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-461
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
F020: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or CPU memory error)
The error appears during the reading/writing check of the RAM for the CPU when the main unit starts up.
F021: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or ASIC memory error)
Error occurred when checking read/write of RAM for main PWB ASIC at start up.
7-462
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
F022: System memory error (RAM read/write error, or ASIC memory error)
Error occurred when checking read/write of RAM for DP relay PWB ASIC at start up.
F040: Communication error between the main unit and CPU (Communication error
between the controller and the print engine)
There is an error in the communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB.
7-463
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
F041: Communication error between the main PWB and the scanner engine
There is an error in the communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB (Scanner).
7-464
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-465
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-466
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-467
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
*: Power is partially supplied to this machine when the power is turned off.
Unplug the power plug and check if the F-code error is not released when passing one minute or more after turning the power off and then on.
F12X Abnormality detecting in a Scan control section 1. Check the harness between Engine/DP<=>Main boards, and the connection state of a * Execution of U024 will vanish user data [Main <=> Engine]
connector, and perform an operation check. and the software installed. Main PWB: YC43
2. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Reinstallation is required. Engine PWB: YC35
(FULL of U024) *
3. U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is performed. [Main <=> DP I/F PWB
4. Exchange a DP I/F, Engine and SHD board and perform an operation check. [DP I/F <=> SHD]
5. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. *: DP-7110
6. Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters. DP I/F PWB: YC2
* Only HDD standard model SHD PWB: YC3
7-468
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
7-469
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
7-470
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
7-471
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
7-472
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
7-473
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Contents
(1) The login fails with other than the ID card
(2) C0030: FAX PWB system error
(3) C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error
(4) C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error
(5) C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
(6) C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error
(7) C0920: FAX file system error
(8) C0950: FAX job stay error
(9) F14D: Abnormal detection at the FAX control section
(10) The FAX cannot be sent
(11) The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished
(12) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is transmitted as the A4 size
data
7-474
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-475
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-476
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-477
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-478
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-479
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
Error code
EXXXXX
UXXXXX
Figure 7-47
7-480
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-481
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-482
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-483
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U00100/E00100
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Transmission was inter- Resend.
rupted by a press of the
stop/clear key.
U00200/E00200
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending Reception was interrupted Suspend resending from the FAX Oper-
by a press of the [Stop] destination unit or request the ation
key. destination unit to resend the Guide
data.
U00300/E00300
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request to the destination Recording paper on the Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit destination unit has run out to set the recording papers. ation
during transmission. Guide
U00430/E00430
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the permitted Polling or sub address bul- Register a valid permitted FAX Oper-
number letin board transmission number ation
were requested, but the Guide
communication was inter-
rupted because the permit-
ted ID did not match. (It
occurs in the transmitting
unit.)
7-484
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U00431/E00431
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request to the destination An sub address bulletin Register the sub address FAX Oper-
unit board transmission was password in the destination ation
interrupted because the unit. Guide
specified sub address
password was not regis-
tered.
U00432/E00432
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the sub address A sub address bulletin Send by using correct the sub FAX Oper-
password board transmission was address password. ation
interrupted because the Guide
sub address password did
not match.
U00433/E00433
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the sub address A sub address bulletin Set data in the sub address FAX Oper-
box board transmission box. ation
request was received but Guide
data was not present in the
sub address box.
U00440/E00440
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the sub address Sub address confidential Register the sub address FAX Oper-
password reception was interrupted password. ation
because the specified sub Guide
address password was not
registered.
U00450/E00450
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the permitted The reception was inter- Register the permitted num- FAX Oper-
number rupted because the permit- ber to be consistent at own ation
ted ID and FAX number did machine side. Guide
not match in the restricted
transmission (password
check transmission) in the
destination unit.
7-485
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U00460/E00460
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the encryption The encryption reception Register an encrypted box FAX Oper-
key was interrupted because number. ation
the specified encryption Guide
box number was not regis-
tered.
U00462/E00462
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the encryption Encrypted reception was Register an encryption key. FAX Oper-
key interrupted because the ation
encryption key for the Guide
specified encryption box
was not registered.
U00601/E00601
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the original Original jam Clear original feed jam and
resend.
2 Checking the original The original length Check if the original length
exceeds the maximum does not exceed 1.6 meter
allowed. and resend.
U00613/E00613
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the service call Image writing section error Check the service call error Event Log
error record record and perform the cor- Report
rective actions. Output
7-486
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U00656/E00656
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Transmission was inter- Resend.
rupted because there was
an error in the modem.
2 Resetting the main power Transmission was inter- Turn off the power switch and
rupted because there was pull out the power plug. After
an error in the modem. passing 5s, reattach the FAX
PWB and reinsert the power
plug. Then, turn on the power
switch.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the fax firmware to Firmware
est version. the latest version. Update
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the Mainte-
changed. FAX. nance
Mode List
5 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB. FAX Instal-
lation
Guide
U00690/E00690
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resetting the main power System error Turn off the power switch and
pull out the power plug. After
passing 5s, reinsert the
power plug and turn on the
power switch.
2 Measures for the system System error in the main Perform the corrective System
error unit actions for the system error in Error List
the main unit.
U00800/E00800
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the transmit start A page transmission error In case pages are not prop- Mainte-
speed occurred because of erly sent and resending does nance
reception of a RTN or PIN not solve it, reduce transmit Mode List
signal. start speed and resend the
data.
7-487
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U00811/E00811
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending A page reception error In case pages are not prop- Mainte-
remained after retry of erly sent and resending does nance
transmission in the ECM not solve it, reduce transmit Mode List
mode. start speed and resend the
data.
U00900/E00900
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending An RTN or PIN signal was Resend the page if there is a
transmitted because of a page not transmitted prop-
page reception error. erly.
U01000/E01000
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending An FTT signal was Resend.
received for a set number
of times after TCF signal
transmission at 2400 bps.
Or, an RTN signal was
received in response to a
Q signal (excluding EOP)
after transmission at 2400
bps.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
7-488
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01001/E01001
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Function as indicated by Resend.
DIS signal is not consistent
with the one of own
machine.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
U01016/E01016
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending T1 timeout occurs since Resend.
MBF signal is received but
DIS signal is not after
sending EOM signal.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
U01019/E01019
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Command send retrial Resend.
times exceeds since signif-
icant signal is not received
after sending CNC signal.
(between own machines)
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
7-489
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01020/E01020
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Command send retrial Resend.
times exceeds since signif-
icant signal is not received
after sending CTC signal.
(ECM)
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
U01021/E01021
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Command send retrial Resend.
times exceeds since signif-
icant signal is not received
after sending EOR•Q sig-
nal. (ECM)
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
U01022/E01022
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Command send retrial Resend.
times exceeds since signif-
icant signal is not received
after sending RR signal.
(ECM)
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
7-490
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01028/E01028
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending T5 timeout is detected Resend.
when sending in ECM
(ECM)
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
U01052/E01052
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending DCN signal is received Resend.
after sending RR signal
(ECM)
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
U01080/E01080
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending PIP signal is received after Resend.
sending PPS and NULL
signals.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
7-491
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01092/E01092
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Communication is stopped Resend.
since there are impossible
combination of symbol
speed and communication
speed at V.34 sending.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
U01093/E01093
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the modem detection Mainte-
detected since the level at U650 [RX Mm Level]. nance
received signal is attenu- (Initial setting: -43dBm) Mode List
ated with its frequency
response.
2 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the G3 reception cable Mainte-
detected since the equalizer in U650 [Rag G3 nance
received signal is attenu- RX Ear]. (Initial setting: Mode List
ated with its frequency 0dBm)
response.
U01094/E01094
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending DCS/NSS signal send Resend.
retrial time is exceeded at
phase B during transmis-
sion.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
7-492
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01096/E01096
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending DCN signal or invalid com- Resend.
mand is received at phase
D during transmission.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
U01097/E01097
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending The preset number of com- Resend.
mand retransfers was
exceeded after transmis-
sion of an RR signal or no
response.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
U01100/E01100
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending Function indicated by DCS Request the destination unit
signal is not consistent to resend the data.
with the one of own
machine.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
7-493
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01101/E01101
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending Function indicated by NSS Request the destination unit
signal except communica- to resend the data.
tion type is not consistent
with the one of own
machine.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
U01102/E01102
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending DTC (NSC) signal is Request the destination unit
received while own to resend the data.
machine has no transmis-
sion data.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
U01110/E01110
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending No response is received Request the destination unit
after sending DIS signal. to resend the data.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
U01111/E01111
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending No response is received Request the destination unit
after sending DTC (NSC) to resend the data.
signal.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
7-494
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01113/E01113
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the modem detection Mainte-
detected since the level at U650 [RX Mm Level]. nance
received signal is attenu- (Initial setting: -43dBm) Mode List
ated with its frequency
response.
2 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the G3 reception cable Mainte-
detected since the equalizer in U650 [Rag G3 nance
received signal is attenu- RX Ear]. (Initial setting: Mode List
ated with its frequency 0dBm)
response.
U01125/E01125
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending No response is received Request the destination unit
after sending CNS signal. to resend the data.
(between own machine)
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
U01129/E01129
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending No response after trans- Request the destination unit
mitting an SPA signal. to resend the data.
(Short protocol)
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
U01141/E01141
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received Request the destination unit
after sending DTC signal. to resend the data.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
7-495
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01143/E01143
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings DCN signal is received Set the G3 reception cable Mainte-
after sending FTT signal. equalizer in U650 [Rag G3 nance
RX Ear]. (Initial setting: Mode List
0dBm)
U01155/E01155
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received Request the destination unit
after sending SPA signal. to resend the data.
(simplified protocol)
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
U01160/E01160
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending Maximum transmission Request the destination unit
time per line is exceeded to resend the data.
while receiving message.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
U01162/E01162
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending Maximum transmission Request the destination unit
time per line is exceeded to resend the data.
while receiving message.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
7-496
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01191/E01191
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending Communication is stopped Request the destination unit
with error during image to resend the data.
data receipt sequence at
V.34.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
U01193/E01193
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings No response, DCN signal Extend T2 time-out time in Mainte-
or invalid command is U641 [T2 TIME OUT]. nance
received at phase C/D dur- (Change from the initial set- Mode List
ing reception. ting 69 to 150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures Mainte-
for echoes at the reception in nance
U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial set- Mode List
ting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting Mainte-
timing speed to "9600bps" or less. nance
Mode List
U01194/E01194
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received at Request the destination unit
phase B during reception. to resend the data.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
7-497
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01195/E01195
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings No message is received at Extend T2 time-out time in Mainte-
phase C during reception. U641 [T2 TIME OUT]. nance
(Change from the initial set- Mode List
ting 69 to 150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures Mainte-
for echoes at the reception in nance
U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial set- Mode List
ting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting Mainte-
timing speed to "9600bps" or less. nance
Mode List
U01196/E01196
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Error line control overflow Resend.
and decoding error
occurred in messages dur-
ing reception.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
U01400/E01400
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the telephone "#" exists in advance of "x" Delete "#" from the registered FAX Oper-
number on the phone numbers of numbers if "#" exists in ation
the destination unit, so it is advance of "x" on the phone Guide
processed as the invalid numbers of the destination
dial line. unit.
U01500/E01500
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the transmit start The communication line is Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed the poor condition. reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
2 Checking the transmit start The communication line Change the default value of Mainte-
speed condition is poor and an the transmit start speed by nance
error frequently occurs. executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
7-498
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01600/E01600
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request to the destination The communication line is Request the destination unit
unit the poor condition. to resend the data after
reducing the transmit start
speed.
2 Changing the transmit start The communication line Request the destination unit Mainte-
timing condition is poor and an to resend the data after low- nance
error frequently occurs. ering the reception start Mode List
speed.
U01700/E01700
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending A communication error Resend.
occurred in phase 2 (line
probing).
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
U01720/E01720
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending The communication error Resend.
appears at phase 4
(replacing the modem
parameter).
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
7-499
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01721/E01721
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending The communication was Resend.
interrupted because there
is no communication
speed commonly used
with the destination unit.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
U01800/E01800
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending A communication error Request the destination unit
occurred in phase 2 (line to resend the data after
probing). reducing the transmit start
speed.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
U01810/E01810
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending A communication error Request the destination unit
occurred in phase 3 (pri- to resend the data after
mary channel equivalent reducing the transmit start
device training). speed.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
U01820/E01820
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending A communication error Request the destination unit
occurred in phase 3 (pri- to resend the data after
mary channel equivalent reducing the transmit start
device training). speed.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
7-500
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01821/E01821
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending The communication was Request the destination unit
interrupted because there to resend the data after
is no communication reducing the transmit start
speed commonly used speed.
with the destination unit.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
U03000/E03000
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request to the destination No document was present Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit in the destination unit to set the originals. ation
when polling reception Guide
started.
U03200/E03200
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request to the destination There is no data in the sub Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit address box in the main to store the original data in ation
unit that are specified from the sub address box. Guide
the destination unit.
U03300/E03300
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request to the destination The permitted ID and FAX Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit number registered in the to register the own ID and the ation
destination unit are incor- own FAX number as the per- Guide
rect. mitted ID and the permitted
FAX number.
U03400/E03400
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination In polling reception, the Revise it so that the pass- FAX Oper-
unit operation was interrupted word input at the destination ation
because the password machine is consistent with Guide
input in the destination unit the receiversownFAXIDtore-
and the own FAX number ceiveagain.'
in the receiver did not
match.
7-501
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U03500/E03500
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination In polling reception, the Revise it so that the pass- FAX Oper-
unit operation was interrupted word input at the destination ation
because the password machine is consistent with Guide
input in the destination unit the receiversownFAXIDtore-
and the own FAX number ceiveagain.'
in the receiver did not
match.
U03600/E03600
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Sub address bulletin board Resend the data after input- FAX Oper-
reception was interrupted ting the sub address pass- ation
because the specified sub word registered in the Guide
address password did not destination unit.
match.
U03700/E03700
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination Destination machine has Check if the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit no sub address bulletin has a sub address bulletin ation
board communication board communication func- Guide
function or no originals are tion. If available, request the
stored in any original deliv- destination unit to save the
ery box (sub address box). original data in the sub
address box.
U04000/E04000
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request to the destination The original was transmit- Register the sub address FAX Oper-
unit ted to the sub address box, password in the destination ation
but the specified box was unit. Guide
not registered in the desti-
nation unit that is our own
model.
2 Checking the sub address The original was transmit- Match the sub address in the FAX Oper-
of the FAX transmission ted to the sub address box FAX forward condition ation
condition in the destination unit that Guide
is our own model, but the
sub address of the trans-
mission condition did not
match.
7-502
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U04100/E04100
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending The destination unit had no Transmit the data according FAX Oper-
sub address reception to the reception function in ation
capability while the sub the destination unit. Guide
address transmission was
executed.
U04200/E04200
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request to the destination In encrypted transmission, Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit the specified encryption to register the encrypted box. ation
box was not registered in Guide
the destination unit.
U04300/E04300
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending The encryption transmis- Transmit the data according FAX Oper-
sion was carried out, but to the reception function in ation
there is no encryption func- the destination unit. Guide
tion at the other machine.
U04400/E04400
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the encryption Encrypted transmission Request resending after FAX Oper-
key was interrupted because checking the encryption key ation
encryption keys did not registered in the receiving Guide
agree. and sending machines.
U04500/E04500
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the encryption Encrypted transmission Request resending after FAX Oper-
key was interrupted because checking the encryption key ation
encryption keys did not registered in the receiving Guide
agree. and sending machines.
7-503
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U05100/E05100
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the permitted The transmission was Resend after confirming the FAX Oper-
number interrupted because the authorization number that ation
permitted ID and FAX has been registered. Guide
number did not match in
the restricted transmission
(password check transmis-
sion).
U05200/E05200
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings The number does not Change the restricted recep- FAX Oper-
match a permitted FAX tion settings. ation
number / ID, or it matches Guide
a rejected FAX number.
2 Request to the destination The own telephone num- Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit ber is not informed from to register the own telephone ation
the destination unit. number. Guide
U05300/E05300
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request to the destination The number does not Ask the destination unit to FAX Oper-
unit match a permitted FAX change the restricted recep- ation
number / ID, or it matches tion settings. Guide
a rejected FAX number.
2 Request to the destination The main unit did not Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit acknowledge its phone to register the own telephone ation
number in question . number. Guide
U14000/E14000
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the memory The reception to the FAX Print documents stored in
box was interrupted due to memory and make room in
memory overflow in its memory. Or stop receiving in
unit. the FAX box.
7-504
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U14100/E14100
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request to the destination Transmission was inter- Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit rupted due to the memory to release memory. ation
overflow in the destination Guide
unit when transmitting into
the sub address box.
U19000/E19000
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the memory The reception was inter- Release memory by printing
rupted due to the memory originals stored in memory.
overflow in the main unit
during memory reception.
U19100/E19100
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
interrupted because there
is an error in the data dur-
ing transmission.
2 Resetting the main power The transmission was Turn off the power switch and
interrupted because there pull out the power plug. After
is an error in the data dur- passing 5s, reattach the FAX
ing transmission. PWB and reinsert the power
plug. Then, turn on the power
switch.
7-505
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U19300/E19300
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
interrupted because there
is an error in the data dur-
ing transmission.
2 Resetting the main power The transmission was Turn off the power switch and
interrupted because there pull out the power plug. After
is an error in the data dur- passing 5s, reattach the FAX
ing transmission. PWB and reinsert the power
plug. Then, turn on the power
switch.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the fax firmware to Firmware
est version. the latest version. Update
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the Mainte-
changed. FAX. nance
Mode List
5 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB. FAX Instal-
lation
Guide
7-506
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Contents
(1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or the security soft-
ware settings
(2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear
(3) The scanning data from the contact glass is automatically sent
(1-3) The scanning data from the contact glass is automatically sent
7-507
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-508
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-509
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-510
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-511
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-512
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-513
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-514
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-515
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-516
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-517
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-518
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-519
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-520
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-521
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-522
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-523
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-524
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-525
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(2) The data is output with color from Excel even if the monochrome mode is set
7-526
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-527
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-528
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-529
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-530
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(10)PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or [Printer unavailable] is indicated
on the printer properties
The main unit is not ready to print
(11)Processing and Memory lamps are lit while the printer standby message is
indicated
The main unit locks up.
(12)Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main unit startup error
Processing/Memory lamp is turned on
The main unit locks up.
7-531
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(13)Print stops after printing several pages and locks up Processing and Memory
lamps on operation panel are lit
The image processing fails due to the insufficient memory, so the main unit locks up.
7-532
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-533
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-534
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-535
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-536
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(21)Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (1)
Condition: PC OS: Windows 7 Print file: Test page Connecting method: Wireless LAN
[Not connected] is displayed on PC and print job cantbeperformedduetotheerror.(Can'tprint)'
7-537
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(22)Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (2)
Condition: PC OS: Windows 7 Print file: Test page Connecting method: Wireless LAN
[Preparing the printer] is displayed on the operation panel. The printing document is not output and the job is
held.
(23)Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (3)
A PC does not recognize the main unit.
(24)Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (4)
PC operation does not stabilize.
7-538
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(25)Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (5)
Check if the issue occurs when printing the data from all PCs in the network or from a certain PC. Then, print
out the data from another PC if it occurs at a certain PC.
(26)Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (6)
The incorrect printer driver was selected.
(27)Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (7)
Installed printer driver shows "Deleting" and it remains when reinstalling it
7-539
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-540
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Contents
(1) "Check the document processor" appears
(2) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 1, 2) even after removing/inserting the
cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit
(3) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 3, 4) even after removing/inserting the
cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit
(4) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover
(5) The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or the maintenance front cover
(6) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray
(7) The message [Waste toner box is full] is wrongly displayed
(8) When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor] is wrongly displayed
(9) When DP is used, document no-feed occurs and [Replace all originals.] is displayed
(10) When turning on the power, the display [Network device is running] does not disappear
7-541
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(2) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 1, 2) even after
removing/inserting the cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the
main unit
7-542
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(3) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 3, 4) even after
removing/inserting the cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the
main unit
Object: Paper feeder or Large capacity feeder
7-543
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover
(5) The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or the
maintenance front cover
7-544
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(6) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray
7-545
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(8) When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor] is wrongly
displayed
7-546
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(9) When DP is used, document no-feed occurs and [Replace all originals.] is
displayed
(10)When turning on the power, the display [Network device is running] does not
disappear
7-547
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-548
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-549
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-550
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-551
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-552
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(9) Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser eject section
Rubbing sound between the bushing and the stop ring of the fuser eject roller due to the smudges / foreign
objects adhesion
(10)Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser eject section
Rubbing sound between the fuser exit sub roller and the shaft caused by the dirt or adhesion of the foreign
objects.
7-553
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-554
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-555
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-556
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(17)The metallic sound from the PF horizontal conveying section (Squeak sound)
Object: Large capacity feeder
7-557
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(18)Abnormal sound when driving the transfer belt (Tooth jumping sounds)
7-558
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-9 Malfunction
Content of Malfunction
(1) The size of paper set in the cassette is misdetected or not displayed
Object: Main unit, Paper feeder
7-559
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-560
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-561
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-562
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5) The main unit malfunctions even if turning on the power switch
7-563
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-564
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-565
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(8) The operation panel remains displaying "WELCOME" and does not change
Communicate between the main PWB and the operation panel main PWB cantbedone.'
7-566
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(11)The operation panel remains displaying [Close the waste toner box cover].
The waste toner box cover is closed but opening/closing is not detected.
7-567
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-568
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Engine YC6 Feed Drive PWB C0361(Engine CPU-IO ASIS No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) Since the communication line with ASIC is not connected, communication error
communication error) call error, C7601 (ID sensor call error, but abnormal oper- occurs.
error *D rank) ation (2) Since the machine front side of ID sensor signal line is shut off, C7601 error (D
rank) occurs
(3) Since the power is not supplied the sensor which detects to the cassette open/
close, the cassette open/close can be detected.
YC40 Feed Image PWB C0362(Engine CPU-IO ASIS C6770(IH fuser lower power No occur JAM and C call, but (1) Since the communication line with ASIC is not connected, communication error
communication error) error) abnormal operation occurs
(2) Since the power line of IH power control signal is shut off, IH lower power error
occurs
(3) Since the drum heater power line is shut off, drum heater is not activated. Since
eraser power line is shut off, density reduction occurs while being unable to discharge
drum
YC42 Feed Image PWB C7901 (Drum K EEPROM C2760 (Transfer belt motor C2203 (Drum motor Color (1) The communication line with unit EEPROM is not shut off and communication
error) error) error) error occurs
(2) The transfer belt motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The drum motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
YC9 APC PWB When printing, C4001 (Poly- No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) Since the polygon motor control signal is shut off, motor error occurs.
gon motor synchronization call error, but abnormal call error, but abnormal (2) Since the Magenta image signal is shut off, abnormal Y images are output.
error) image image (3) Since the K image signal line is shut off, abnormal K images are output.
YC27 APC PWB, lower power C0980(24V power shutoff C0980(24V power shutoff No occur JAM and service (1) Since the 24V power output permission signal to low voltage PWB is shut off, 24V
PWB, waster toner motor and detection) detection) call error power is not generated and 24V power error occurs.
weight detection sensor (2) Since the 24V power output permission signal to low voltage PWB is shut off, 24V
power is not generated and 24V power error occurs.
YC16 DP, sensor, drive motor C3100(Carriage error) C3100(Carriage error) C3100(Carriage error) (1) Since the carriage drive motor control signal is shut off, carriage error occurs.
(2) Since power to the carriage position sensor is shut off, carriage error occurs.
(3) Since the carriage drive motor control signal is shut off, carriage error occurs.
YC36 CCD PWB C3800(AFE error) No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) Since CPU-AFE device communication line is shut off, no communication is
call error call error established and AFE error occurs.
YC34 Transfer High Voltage PWB No occur JAM and service No jam and service call error No occur JAM and service (1) The transfer high voltage control signal is shut off and images become faint with-
call error, but abnormal call error, but abnormal out transfer
image image (3) Transfer belt cleaning high voltage control signal is shut off and cleaning failure
occurs
YC33 Main High Voltage PWB No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) The main charge and developer high voltage control signal is shut off and blank
call error, but abnormal call error call error, but abnormal pages are output
image image (3) A developer control signal is disconnected and images become faint
YC1 Lower voltage power Source System error F040 (1) The power line to Engine PWB is shut off and no communication with Main PWB
PWB is established without Engine PWB start-up
YC29 IH PWB C6950(IH CPU communica- C6950(IH CPU communica- C6950(IH CPU communica- (1) No power is supplied to IH PWB and no communication is established
tion error) tion error) tion error) (2) No power is supplied to IH PWB and no communication is established
(3) Ground is disconnected and no communication is established
7-569
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Engine YC43 Main PWB System error F040 No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) ASIC-CPU communication line is shut off and no communication is established
call error call error, but abnormal oper- (3) The signal to control "Job separator" LED on the operation panel is shut off and no
ation LED is lit when ejected to the job separator
YC35 Main PWB F186 at printing F186 at printing F186 at printing (1) to (3) A job does not start while continuing Copy scans display
YC38 Temperature and humidity No occur JAM and service (1) The outer temperature/humidity sensor signal is shut off and C7800 (D rank) error
sensor, power source fan call error, C7800 (Broken occurs Temperature is kept at 23°C and no temperature correction functions
motor outer thermistor wire *D rank)
7-570
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Feed YC24 Drum motor, Developer motor C2201(Drum motor K steady- When printing, C2103(Devel- C2201(Drum motor K steady- (1) Since the control signal to the drum motor K is shut off, motor error occurs.
image state error) oper motor Color error) state error) (2) Since the control signal to developer color motor is shut off, motor error occurs.
(3) Since the control signal to the drum motor K is shut off, motor error occurs.
YC23 Sensor, belt separation motor C2700(Primary and second- C2700(Primary and second- C2700(Primary and second- (1) Since the control signal to the motor which controls primary and secondary trans-
ary transfer pressure release ary transfer pressure release ary transfer pressure release fer pressure is shut off, pressure error occurs.
error) error) error) (2) Since the control signal to the motor which controls primary and secondary trans-
fer pressure is shut off, pressure error occurs.
(3) Since the signal to the sensor which detects primary and secondary transfer pres-
sure position is shut off, pressure error occurs.
YC19 Toner motor, sensor When printing, C7301(Hop- When printing, C7301(Hop- When printing, C7302(Hop- (1) The hopper motor K control signal is shut off and motor error occurs.
per motor K error) per motor K error) per motor C error) (2) The hopper motor K control signal is shut off and motor error occurs.
(3) The hopper motor C control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
YC2 The right cover switch "Main unit cover is open" the
front cover open is displayed.
YC35 Transfer High Voltage PWB, No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) No power is supplied to Main High Voltage PWB and blank pages are output
Main High Voltage PWB call error, but abnormal call error, but abnormal call error (2) No power is supplied to the transfer high voltage and images become faint without
image image transfer
YC3 Feed Drive PWB C2500(Conveying motor (1) No power is supplied to Feed Drive PWB and motor error occurs
error)
YC1 Lower voltage power source C2700(Primary and second- (1) No power is supplied to Feed Image PWB and motor error occurs
PWB ary transfer pressure release
error)
YC22 Fuser PWB sensor, thermistor C6980(Fuser EEPROM C6030(Breaking detection on No occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with the fuser EEPROM is shut off and communication
error) fuser thermistor) call error error occurs
(2) The fuser thermistor wire is broken and thermistor error occurs
YC30 BR Main PWB, DF Main PWB When copying, "Inner tray is No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service *AK, 4K finisher installation
full. Remove the paper. " call error, but abnormal oper- call error, but abnormal oper- (1) Since the signal which detects AK connection is shut off, controls while judging no
message is displayed. ation ation AK. In case of no AK, though the parts which attached to the eject section turns on
the sensor there,as they are taken off when AK is installed, the mismatch occurs,
inner tray mis-detection occurs.
(2) The communication line with the finisher is shut off and communication error
occurs to cause the finisher partial operation. Not entering into Finisher but staying
between AK and Finisher. No jam indication
(3) No power is supplied to the paper sensor for the AK eject and [Job separator] LED
on the operation panel is not lit
YC25 DF Feed drive No occur JAM and service *AK, 4K finisher installation
call error, but abnormal oper- (1) The communication line with the finisher is shut off and communication error
ation occurs to cause the finisher partial operation. Not entering into Finisher but staying
between AK and Finisher. No jam indication
Feed YC3 Engine PWB C0361(Engine CPU-IO ASIS No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
drive communication error) call error, but abnormal oper- call error, C7601 (ID sensor occurs
ation error *D rank) (2) No power is supplied to the cassette open/close sensor and the cassette open/
close cannot be detected
(3) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
7-571
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Feed YC2 Feed Image PWB C2840(Transfer belt cleaning C2840(Transfer belt cleaning No occur JAM and service (1) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
drive motor error) motor error) call error (2) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
YC7 Conveying cover JAM0000(Initial JAM) "Main unit cover is open" the No occur JAM and service (1) The signal of the paper sensor on the conveying path is shut off and jam occurs
right cover open is displayed. call error, but C6900 while detecting paper at power-up
(2) The right cover open/close sensor signal is shut off and right cover open is
detected constantly
(3) The MPF paper size detection signal is shut off and size error occurs. For exam-
ple: A4 side to indefinite size, A3 to A4 side When continuous A4L printing, occurs
Fuser edge cooling fan error(C6900).
YC8 Conveying cover C1000(MPF lift motor error) No occur JAM and service No jam and service call error (1) MPF lift motor sensor signal is shut off and motor error occurs without detecting
call error, but when executing the position
the MPF paper feeding, (2) The primary and secondary transfer pressure control signal is shut off and motor
C1000 (MPF lift motor error). error occurs when feeding from MPF
YC10 Fuser motor C6610(Fuser pressure C7490(Eject cooling fan No jam and service call error (1) The fuser pressure motor control signal is shut off and fuser pressure position
releasing detection sensor error) sensor error occurs
error) (2) The eject fan control signal is shut off and fan error occurs
YC11 Feed motor C2500(Conveying motor C2500(Conveying motor JAM0501 at printing (1) The feed motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
error) error) (2) The feed motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The feed motor rotation direction control signal is shut off and jam occurs with the
reverse rotation
YC4 Feed clutch JAM0501 at printing(CAS1 No occur JAM and service JAM0501 at printing(CAS1 (1) Cassette 1 feed clutch control signal is shut off and no paper feed jam occurs
no paper feed JAM) call error. no paper feed JAM) (2) Cassette 2 paper feed clutch control signal is shut off and no paper feed jam
occurs
(3) Cassette 1 paper feed clutch control signal is shut of and no paper feed jam
occurs
YC5 Main unit (cassette) Cassette paper size is not Cassette bottom plate is not Cassette 1 and Cassette 2 (1) Since the cassette paper size sensor is shut off, the size cannot be detected.
displayed at the copy screen lifted up are displayed (2) Since the sensor signal which detects Cassette 1 open/close sensor is shut off,
which the error doesn't occur. the lift-up operation is not executed without detecting the cassette open/close
(3) Cassette 1 and 2 lift-up motor control signal is shut off and Cassette 1 and 2 error
occurs
YC9 Registration clutch, ID sensor When printing, JAM4101(belt No occur JAM and service When printing, JAM4101(belt (1) The registration clutch control signal is shut off and no paper is conveyed to cause
roll-up sensor is non-arrival). call error, C7601 (ID sensor roll-up sensor is non-arrival). jam
error *D rank) (2) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
(3) The registration clutch control signal is shut off and paper cannot be conveyed to
cause jam
YC6 Paper feed conveying sensor, JAM0000(Initial JAM) JAM0000(Initial JAM) No occur JAM and service (1) The paper conveying path sensor signal is shut off and jam occurs while detecting
clutch call error. However if execut- paper
ing cassette 2 feed, JAM0502 (1) The paper conveying path sensor signal is shut off and jam occurs while detecting
occurs. paper
(3) The power to the sensor on the paper conveying path passing through when feed-
ing from Cassette 2 is shut off and jam occurs if feeding from Cassette 2
YC1 Feed Image PWB C2500 or C6610(Conveying (1) No power is supplied to Feed Drive PWB and motor error occurs
motor error or Fuser pressure
releasing detection sensor
error)
7-572
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Main YC42 Lower voltage power source The operation panel is not (1) No power is supplied to Main PWB and Panel does not start up
PWB activated
YC6 Panel Main PWB The operation panel is acti-
vated but nothing appears
(White screen)
YC12 Panel Main PWB The operation panel is not The error doesn't occur. No The error doesn't occur. * but (1) Since the power is not supplied to Panel, the Panel doesn't start up.
activated response when pressing the CF000 occurs when recover- (2) Since the machine front side of power button signal is shut off, nothing is
main switch. ing from the sleep mode. responded.
(3) Since the signal for Panel recovery from sleep mode is shut off, when attempting
to recover by pressing the Energy Saver key in sleep mode, the operation panel side
cannot be recovered with the communication error, abnormal communication occurs
the service call error.
(Or when receiving FAX during sleep mode, the service call error appears while the
panel cannot return)
YC60 USB Hub PWB No error has occurred USB memory is not recognized when inserting it into the front side USB port
YC59 USB Hub PWB No error has occurred USB memory is not recognized when inserting it into the front side USB port
YC63 Engine PWB System error F040 No jam and service call error No jam and service call error
YC43 Engine PWB F186 at printing F186 at printing F186 at printing (1) to (3) Scanner scans Copy but Scan display does not finish
YC23 Cooling fan No error has occurred
YC8 KUIO Relay PWB No error has occurred
YC9 KUIO Relay PWB No error has occurred No error has occurred No error has occurred
7-573
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon occurring at contact failure of the FFC (YC35) between the engine PWB and main PWB
7-574
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Engine YC6 Feed Drive PWB C0361(Engine CPU-IO ASIS No Occur JAM and service No Occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
communication error) call error, C7601 (ID sensor call error, but abnormal oper- occurs
error *D rank) ation (2) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
(3) No power is supplied to the cassette open/close sensor and no cassette open/
close can be detected
YC40 Feed Image PWB C0362(Engine CPU-IO ASIS C6770(IH fuser lower power It doesn't occur JAM and C (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
communication error) error) call, but abnormal operation occurs
(2) The IH power control signal power line is shut off and IH low power error occurs
(3) The drum heater power line is shut off and drum heater is not activated
YC42 Feed Image PWB C7901 (Drum K EEPROM C2760 (Transfer belt motor C2203 (Drum motor Color (1) The communication line with unit EEPROM is not shut off and communication
error) error) error) error occurs
(2) The transfer belt motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The drum motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
YC9 APC PWB When printing, C4001 (Poly- No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) Since the polygon motor control signal is shut off, motor error occurs.
gon motor synchronization call error, but abnormal call error, but abnormal (2) Since the Magenta image signal is shut off, abnormal M images are output.
error) image image (3) Since the K image signal line is shut off, abnormal K images are output.
YC10 APC PWB When printing, C4101(BD When printing, C4101(BD No occur JAM and service (1) BD emitting signal is shut off and BD error occurs
signal initialization error) signal initialization error) call error, but abnormal (2) The BD emitting control signal is shut off and BD error occurs
image output (3) The Cyan image signal is shut off and abnormal C images are output
YC27 APC PWB, lower power C0980(24V power shutoff C0980(24V power shutoff No occur JAM and service (1) Since the 24V power output permission signal to low voltage PWB is shut off, 24V
PWB, waster toner motor and detection) detection) call error power is not generated and 24V power error occurs.
weight detection sensor (2) Since the 24V power output permission signal to low voltage PWB is shut off, 24V
power is not generated and 24V power error occurs.
YC16 DP, sensor, scanner motor C3100(Carriage error) C3100(Carriage error) C3100(Carriage error) (1) Since the carriage drive motor control signal is shut off, carriage error occurs.
(2) Since power to the carriage position sensor is shut off, carriage error occurs.
(3) Since the carriage drive motor control signal is shut off, carriage error occurs.
YC36 CCD PWB C3800(AFE error) No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) CPU-AFE device communication line is shut off and no communication is estab-
call error call error lished to cause AFE error
YC34 Main High Voltage PWB, C5104 (Main high voltage Y No occur JAM and service C5104 (Main high voltage Y (1) Since Yellow output monitor signal is shut off, Yellow high voltage error occurs.
Transfer high Voltage PWB error) call error, but abnormal error) (2) Since the high voltage BK control signal is shut off, K images are not output.
image (3) Since Yellow output monitor signal is shut off, Yellow high voltage error occurs.
YC33 Main High Voltage PWB C5104 (Main high voltage Y No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) A Y charge control signal is disconnected and high voltage error occurs
error) call error call error, but abnormal (3) A high voltage control signal is disconnected and images become faint
image
YC1 Lower voltage power Source System error F040 (1) The power line to Engine PWB is shut off and no communication with Main PWB
PWB is established without Engine PWB start-up
YC29 IH PWB C6950(IH CPU communica- C6950(IH CPU communica- C6950(IH CPU communica- (1) No power is supplied to IH PWB and no communication is established
tion error) tion error) tion error) (2) No power is supplied to IH PWB and no communication is established
(3) Ground is disconnected and no communication is established
7-575
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Engine YC43 Main PWB System error F040 No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) ASIC-CPU communication line is shut off and no communication is established
call error call error, but abnormal oper- (3) The signal to control "Job separator" LED on the operation panel is shut off and no
ation LED is lit when ejected to the job separator
YC35 Main PWB F186 at printing F186 at printing F186 at printing (1) to (3) A job does not start while continuing Copy scans display
YC38 Temperature and humidity No occur JAM and service (1) The outer temperature/humidity sensor signal is shut off and C7800 (D rank) error
sensor, power source fan call error, C7800 (Broken occurs Temperature is kept at 23°C and no temperature correction functions
motor outer thermistor wire *D rank)
7-576
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Feed YC24 Drum motor, Developer motor C2201(Drum motor K steady- When printing, C2103(Devel- C2201(Drum motor K steady- (1) Since the drum motor K control signal is shut off, motor error occurs
image state error) oper motor Color error) state error) (2) Since the control signal to developer color motor is shut off, motor error occurs.
(3) Since the drum motor K control signal is shut off, motor error occurs.
YC23 Sensor, belt separation motor C2700(Primary and second- C2700(Primary and second- C2700(Primary and second- (1) The primary and secondary transfer pressure motor control signal is shut off and
ary transfer pressure release ary transfer pressure release ary transfer pressure release pressure error occurs
error) error) error) (2) The primary and secondary transfer pressure control signal is shut off and pres-
sure error occurs
(3) The primary and secondary transfer pressure sensor control signal is shut off and
pressure error occurs
YC19 Toner motor, sensor When printing, C7301(Hop- When printing, C7301(Hop- When printing, C7302(Hop- (1) Since the hopper motor K control signal is shut off, motor error occurs.
per motor K error) per motor K error) per motor C error) (2) Since the hopper motor K control signal is shut off, motor error occurs.
(3) Since the hopper motor C control signal is shut off, motor error occurs.
YC2 The right cover switch "Main unit cover is open" the
front cover open is displayed.
YC35 Transfer High Voltage PWB, C5104 (Main high voltage Y No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) No power is supplied to Main High Voltage PWB and high voltage error occurs
Main High Voltage PWB error) call error, but abnormal call error (2) No power is supplied to the transfer high voltage and images become faint without
image transfer
YC3 Feed Drive PWB C2500(Conveying motor (1) No power is supplied to Feed Drive PWB and motor error occurs
error)
YC1 Lower voltage power source C2700(Primary and second- (1) No power is supplied to Feed Image PWB and motor error occurs
PWB ary transfer pressure release
error)
YC22 Fuser PWB, sensor, thermis- C6980(Fuser EEPROM C6030(Broken upper fuser No jam and service call error (1) The communication line with the fuser EEPROM is shut off and communication
tor error) thermistor detection) error occurs
(2) The fuser thermistor wire is broken and thermistor error occurs
YC30 BR Main PWB, DF Main PWB When copying, "Inner tray is No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service *AK, 4K finisher installation
full. Remove the paper. " call error, but abnormal oper- call error, but abnormal oper- (1) AK detection signal is shut off and control is turned off while judging no AK. The
message is displayed. ation ation part attached to the eject section turns on the sensor there when no AK is installed
but it is turned off to cause mismatch when AK is installed and inner tray mis-detec-
tion occurs
(2) The communication line with the finisher is shut off and communication error
occurs to cause the finisher partial operation. Not entering into Finisher but staying
between AK and Finisher. No jam indication
(3) No power is supplied to the paper sensor for the AK eject and [Job separator] LED
on the operation panel is not lit
YC25 DF Main PWB No occur JAM and service *AK, 4K finisher installation (1) The communication line with the finisher is shut off,
call error, but abnormal oper- communication error causes to be finisher separation state. Not entering into Finisher
ation but staying between AK and Finisher. No jam indication
YC37 Developer motor C2102(Developer motor CY No occur JAM and service C2102(Developer motor CY (1) The developer motor YC control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
error) call error error) (3) The developer motor YC control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
Feed YC3 Engine PWB C0361(Engine CPU-IO ASIS No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
drive communication error) call error, but abnormal oper- call error, C7601 (ID sensor occurs
ation error *D rank) (2) No power is supplied to the cassette open/close sensor and the cassette open/
close cannot be detected
(3) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
7-577
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Feed YC2 Feed Image PWB C2840(Transfer belt cleaning C2840(Transfer belt cleaning No occur JAM and service (1) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
drive motor error) motor error) call error (2) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
YC7 Conveying cover JAM0000(Initial JAM) "Main unit cover is open" the No occur JAM and service (1) The signal of the paper sensor on the conveying path is shut off and jam occurs
right cover open is displayed. call error, but C6900 while detecting paper at power-up
(2) The right cover open/close sensor signal is shut off and right cover open is
detected constantly
(3) The MPF paper size detection signal is shut off and size error occurs. For exam-
ple: A4 side to indefinite size, A3 to A4 side When continuous A4L printing, occurs
Fuser edge cooling fan error(C6900).
YC8 Conveying cover C1000(MPF lift motor error) No occur JAM and service No jam and service call error (1) MPF lift motor sensor signal is shut off and motor error occurs without detecting
call error, but when executing the position (2) The primary and secondary transfer pressure control signal is shut off
the MPF paper feeding, and motor error occurs when feeding from MPF
C1000 (MPF lift motor error).
YC10 Fuser motor C6610(Fuser pressure C7490(Eject cooling fan No jam and service call error (1) The fuser pressure motor control signal is shut off and fuser pressure position
releasing detection sensor error) sensor error occurs (2) The eject fan control signal is shut off and fan error occurs
error)
YC11 Feed motor C2500(Conveying motor C2500(Conveying motor JAM0501 at printing (1) The feed motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs (2) The feed
error) error) motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs (3) The feed motor rotation
direction control signal is shut off and jam occurs with the reverse rotation
YC4 Feed clutch JAM0501 at printing(CAS1 No occur JAM and service JAM0501 at printing(CAS1 (1) Cassette 1 feed clutch control signal is shut off and no paper feed jam occurs
no paper feed JAM) call error. no paper feed JAM) (2) Cassette 2 paper feed clutch control signal is shut off and no paper feed jam
occurs
(3) Cassette 1 paper feed clutch control signal is shut of and no paper feed jam
occurs
YC5 Main unit (cassette) Cassette paper size is not Cassette bottom plate is not Cassette 1 and Cassette 2 (1) The cassette paper size sensor is shut off and size cannot be detected
displayed at the copy screen lifted up are displayed (2) Cassette 1 open/close sensor signal is shut off and the lift-up operation is not exe-
which the error doesn't occur. cuted without detecting the cassette open/close
(3) Cassette 1 and 2 lift-up motor control signal is shut off and Cassette 1 and 2 error
occurs
YC9 Registration clutch, ID sensor When printing, JAM4101(belt No occur JAM and service When printing, JAM4101(belt (1) The registration clutch control signal is shut off and no paper is conveyed to cause
roll-up sensor is non-arrival). call error, C7601 (ID sensor roll-up sensor is non-arrival). jam
error *D rank) (2) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
(3) The registration clutch control signal is shut off and paper cannot be conveyed to
cause jam
YC6 Paper feed conveying sensor, JAM0000(Initial JAM) JAM0000(Initial JAM) No occur JAM and service (1) The paper conveying path sensor signal is shut off and jam occurs while detecting
clutch call error. However if execut- paper
ing cassette 2 feed, JAM0502 (1) The paper conveying path sensor signal is shut off and jam occurs while detecting
occurs. paper
(3) The power to the sensor on the paper conveying path passing through when feed-
ing from Cassette 2 is shut off and jam occurs if feeding from Cassette 2
YC1 Feed Image PWB C2500 or C6610(Conveying (1) No power is supplied to Feed Drive PWB and motor error occurs
motor error or Fuser pressure
releasing detection sensor
error)
7-578
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Main YC42 Power Source PWB The operation panel is not (1) No power is supplied to Main PWB and Panel does not start up
activated
YC6 Panel Main PWB The operation panel is acti-
vated but nothing appears
(White screen)
YC12 Panel Main PWB The operation panel is not The error doesn't occur. No No error has occurred (1) Since the power is not supplied to Panel, the Panel doesn't start up.
activated response when pressing the (2) Since the machine front side of power button signal is shut off, nothing is
main switch. responded.
(3) Since the signal for Panel recovery from sleep mode is shut off, when attempting
to recover by pressing the Energy Saver key in sleep mode, the operation panel side
cannot be recovered with the communication error, abnormal communication occurs
the service call error.
(Or when receiving FAX during sleep mode, the service call error appears while the
panel cannot return)
YC60 USB Hub PWB No error has occurred USB memory is not recognized when inserting it into the front side USB port
YC59 USB Hub PWB No error has occurred USB memory is not recognized when inserting it into the front side USB port
YC63 Engine PWB System error F040 No jam and service call error No jam and service call error
YC43 Engine PWB F186 at printing F186 at printing F186 at printing Scanner scans Copy but Scan display does not finish
YC23 Cooling fan No error has occurred
YC2 HDD
YC32 HDD
YC8 KUIO Relay PWB No error has occurred
YC9 KUIO Relay PWB No error has occurred No error has occurred No error has occurred
7-579
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon occurring at contact failure of the FFC (YC35) between the engine PWB and main PWB
7-580
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
2.Error 1030 is dis- Timeout for Fiery Printing system is not pow- Check power cable connection or
played. Ready signal not ered. replace.
*: 1 received.
DVI cable between Fiery Re-insert/replace DVI cable.
Print Controller and MFP is
disconnected.
3.Error 1031 is dis- Receiving VIDEO DVI cable between Fiery Re-insert/replace DVI cable.
played. from Fiery fails. Print Controller and MFP is
(IP Exchange fail- disconnected.
ure)
Bridge board error. Replace Bridge Board.
4.Error 1040 is dis- LINKLOCAL con- Network cable between Re-insert/replace network cable.
played. nection fails. Fiery Print Controller and
MFP is disconnected.
Network setting failure. Check network settings.
IPv6: ON
HTTP: ON
Enhanced WSD: ON
5.Error 2000 is dis- Mismatch of Prod- Unsupported Fiery Print Install supported Fiery Print Con-
played. uct ID from Fiery. Controller is installed. troller. (Use with correct combi-
nation)
6.Error 2010 is dis- Comet FPGA ver- Unsupported Bridge Board Replace Bridge Board.
played. sion mismatch. is installed.
7.Error 3000 is dis- Timeout of ERPD Bad data in IP Exchange. Turn on MFP power again.
played. Server boot-up of Replace Bridge Board.
External RIP Proto-
Replace Main Board.
col.
Replace Fiery Print Controller.
7-581
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Defective main Main board mounting error. Replace the main board and
board. check for correct operation.
7-582
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
10.Printing is not Defective bridge Bridge board mounting Replace the bridge board.
possible with Com- board. error.
mand Work Station.
Defective main Main board mounting error. Replace the main board.
*: 3
board.
Defective Printing Board mounting failure in Replace the Printing system.
system. the Printing system.
7-583
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
The image data is Engine board mounting Replace the engine board and
not entered. error. check for correct operation.
Defective main Main board mounting error. Replace the main board and
board. check for correct operation.
Defective Printing Board mounting failure in Replace the Printing system and
system. the Printing system. check for correct operation.
7-584
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
7-12 Others
(1) Adjusting the center position for the punch unit and the paper width guides
(1-1) Adjusting the center position for the punch unit
Adjust the center position of the punch unit (A) based on the MP tray.
Procedures
1. Pull out the inner finisher from the main
unit.
Figure 7-48
2. Remove the screw (B) and detach the punch unit cover (C).
3. Perform the test copy by feeding paper from the MP tray.
4. Loosen the screw (1).
When the punch holes shift toward the machine front side, relocate the punch unit (A) toward the
machine rear side ().
When the punch holes shift toward the machine rear side, relocate the punch unit (A) toward the
machine front side ().
5. Repeat Step2-3 till the punch holes are located within the reference value.
[Reference value (d)] (The reference value (e) cannot be adjusted.)
• For Metric: d=40.0mm±2mm, e=80mm±0.5mm
• For Inch: d=34.93mm±2mm (1.38in±0.08in), e=69.85mm±0.5mm (2.75in±0.02in)
6. Tighten the screw (1).
d
e
Figure 7-49
7-585
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
B(M3x8)
Figure 7-50
(1-2) Adjusting the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray)
Adjusting the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray)
Adjust the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray) based on the center position for the
punch unit after finishing the adjustment at Step 1).
[Adjusting the center position for the cassettes in the main unit / PF-7100]
1. Perform the test copy by feeding paper from each paper source.
2. Loosen the fixing screw (E) of the pinion gear (D) that secures the center position for the paper width
guides when the punch holes shift.
3. Relocate the paper width guide (F) of the machine rear side in the counter direction of the punch holes
shifted.
When the punch holes shift in the machine rear direction, relocate the paper width guides (F) in
the machine front direction.
When the punch holes shift in the machine front direction, relocate the paper width guides (F) in
the machine rear direction.
4. Tighten the fixing screw (E).
5. Put paper on the cassette, and relocate the paper width guides at the machine front and rear sides along
the paper width.
D
F
Figure 7-51
7-586
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Figure 7-52
7-587
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
(2) Alignment for affixing PARTS SHEET DECK FEED SP (For PF-7110)
[Part]
Part No: 303RC94080 (3RC94080)
Part name: PARTS SHEET DECK FEED SET SP
Q'ty / 1 unit: 1
Remark
For the PF feed frame in the left cassette: Film A with PORON® x 2 pcs
For the PF feed frame in the right cassette: Film B with PORON® x 2 pcs
A B
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
40 mm
39 mm
Figure 7-53
[Affixing location]
Following PF feed frames for the left and right cassettes in PF-7110 (Large capacity feeder)
• Left cassette: FRAME FEED LOWER (303RC0603_)
• Right cassette: FRAME FEED LOWER B (303RC0613_)
B a
A B
A
Figure 7-54
7-588
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
b
e
d
a
Figure 7-55
A 0.5 mm
0 mm
0 mm
0.5 mm
B
0.5 mm
0 mm
Figure 7-56
7-589
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8 PWBs
8-1 PWB description (High-end model)
(1) Main PWB (High-end model)
(1-1) Connector position
YC58 1 1 7 1 13 1 6
YC6
B15 1 B1 20 YC11 YC63 YC9
1 YC60 60
1 6 15
A1 YC12 A15 5 YC8 1
YC59
YC43
1
1
YC5
1
10
YC10
40
YC2 1
YC51 1
52
1
YC33
10
YC32 YC42
YC23 3
1 10
3 1 1
Figure 8-1
Figure 8-2
8-1
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-2
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-3
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-4
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-5
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-6
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-7
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-8
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-9
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
B16 B1 10 B11 B1
40 1 1 8
YC36 5 YC1 1 YC29
YC16 1
YC38
A11 A12
A16 4 5
1 YC43 A1 A1 B1
14 1 YS1
1 YC6
YC35 A1
B12
YC42 A20
B1
5
60
YC31
1 18
YC40
B20 A1
20 20 4
YC33 YC23
YC39 1
1 1
6 1
A15 A1 YC22
YC9 YC10 YC4 YC27 YC34 YC21
1 50 1 40 1 41 1 17 B1 B15 1 12
Figure 8-3
Figure 8-4
8-10
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-11
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-12
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-13
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-14
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-15
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-16
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-17
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-18
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-19
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-20
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-21
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-22
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-23
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-24
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8-25
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-26
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-27
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-28
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC6
YC28 1
B18 A1
1
2
18
YC23 20
1 A20
YC2 1 1 YC1 B1
7 YC30
1 YC3 4 YC29 YC35
14 1 8 1 10
Figure 8-5
Figure 8-6
8-29
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-30
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-31
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-32
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-33
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-34
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-35
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8-36
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-37
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-38
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8-39
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8-40
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-41
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 YC10 1
YC9 11
14
A1 4
B17
YC11
1 6 YC1
1
YC6
11
B1 YC2
A17
1
1
YC8 B1 A12
12 YC3
A1 B14
B12 A1
YC7
YC4
A16 A1
1
A14 B1 YC5
B1 B16
Figure 8-7
Figure 8-8
8-42
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-43
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-44
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-45
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-46
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-47
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-48
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8
1
YC5 YC13 YC4 YC12 YC3 YC11 YC2 YC10
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
YC1
YC9 YC8 YC7 YC6
1 20
YC14
8
Figure 8-9
Figure 8-10
8-49
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-50
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-51
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-52
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-53
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-54
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6
YC3
1 1
YC1 YC2
20
1 17
Figure 8-11
Figure 8-12
8-55
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-56
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-57
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 13
YC1
Figure 8-13
Figure 8-14
8-58
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-59
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8
YC2 12
1 2 3 1 1 1 2
YC9 YC6
YC8 YC7 1
YC5
YC3
1 3
YC1
1 4
TB1 TB2
TB3
1 6
YC4
Figure 8-15
8-60
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Figure 8-16
(220-240V)
Figure 8-17
8-61
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-62
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-63
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-64
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC9
50 1
YC11
1 5
2
7 1 YC6
1
YC8
4
2 B1 A15 YC7
1
YC4
1
1
YC5 5 1
YC2
5 1
YC1
10 B15 A1
YC10
20
1
YC3
Figure 8-18
Figure 8-19
8-65
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-66
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-67
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-68
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-69
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-70
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3
YC5
1 YC3
YC2
1 2
7
YC1 YC6
1
Figure 8-20
Figure 8-21
(220-240V)
Figure 8-22
8-71
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-72
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
FSR1
1 3
YC1
Figure 8-23
Figure 8-24
8-73
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 6 15
A1 YC12 A15 5 YC8 1
YC59
YC43
1
1
YC5
1
10
YC10
40
13 YC2 1
YC51 1
52
1
YC33
10
YC32 YC42
YC23 3
1 10
3 1 1
Figure 8-25
Figure 8-26
8-74
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-75
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-76
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-77
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-78
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-79
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-80
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-81
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-82
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-83
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
B16 B1 10 B11 B1
40 1 1 8
YC36 5 YC1 1 YC29
YC16 1 YC38
4 5 A11 A12
1 YC43 A1 A16 A1 B1
14 1
YS1
1 YC6
YC35 B12 A1
YC42 A20
B1
5
60 YC31 18
1
YC40
B20 A1
20 4
YC33 YC23
YC39 1 20 1
1 6 1
YC22
YC9 YC4 YC27 YC34 YC21
1 50 1 41 1 17 1 11 1 12
Figure 8-27
Figure 8-28
8-84
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-85
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-86
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8-87
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-88
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-89
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-90
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-91
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-92
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-93
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-94
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-95
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-96
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-97
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8-98
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-99
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
B1 B18 1
YC33 1 18
14 YC36
B20 YC22 B1 6
A18 YC19 A1
8 1
A1 A20 YC12
YC17 4
1 B1 A18 YC25
YC24 A1 B20 1
26
1
YC32
YC6
YC28 1
B18 A1
1
2
18
YC23 20
1 A20
YC2 1 1 YC1 B1
7 YC30
1 YC3 4 YC29 YC35
14 1 8 1 10
Figure 8-29
Figure 8-30
8-100
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 +24V3_IL_F2_FE O 24V DC 24V DC power output
T2
8-101
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8-102
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-103
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-104
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-105
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-106
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-107
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-108
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-109
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-110
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-111
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-112
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 YC10 1
YC9 11
14
A1 4
B17
YC11
1 6 YC1
1
YC6
11
B1 YC2
A17
1
1
YC8 B1 A12
12 YC3
A1 B14
B12 A1
YC7
YC4
A16 A1
1
A14 B1 YC5
B1 B16
Figure 8-31
Figure 8-32
8-113
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-114
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-115
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-116
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-117
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-118
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-119
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8
1
YC5 YC13 YC4 YC12 YC3 YC11 YC2 YC10
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
YC1
YC9 YC8 YC7 YC6
20
Figure 8-33
Figure 8-34
8-120
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8-121
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-122
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-123
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-124
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4
YC2 1
17
YC1
1
Figure 8-35
Figure 8-36
8-125
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-126
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 13
YC1
Figure 8-37
Figure 8-38
8-127
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-128
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
12 8
1 2 1 1 2
3 1 YC8 1 4 1
YC2 YC9 YC7 YC6 YC5
YC1
1 4
TB1 TB2
TB3
1 6
YC4
Figure 8-39
Figure 8-40
8-129
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(220-240V)
Figure 8-41
8-130
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-131
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-132
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-133
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC9
50 1
YC11
1 5
2
7 1 YC6
1
YC8
4
2 B1 A15 YC7
1
YC4
1
1
YC5 5 1
YC2
5 1
YC1
10 B15 A1
YC10
20
1
YC3
Figure 8-42
Figure 8-43
8-134
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-135
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-136
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-137
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-138
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-139
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3
YC5
1 YC3
YC2
1 2
7
YC1 YC6
1
Figure 8-44
Figure 8-45
(220-240V)
Figure 8-46
8-140
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-141
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
FSR1
1 3
YC1
Figure 8-47
Figure 8-48
8-142
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC9
YC4
1
1
12 YC2 5 YC1 1
4
20
YC6
4 1
1
YC12
YC14
6 11
1
1
YC8 YC13
6
10
1
17 1
YC3 YC5
16
Figure 8-49
Figure 8-50
8-143
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-144
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-145
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-146
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-147
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC9
YC4
1
1
12 YC2 5 YC1 1
4
20
YC6
4 1
1
YC12
YC14
6 11
1
1
YC8 YC13
6
10
1
15 1
YC3 YC5
16
Figure 8-51
Figure 8-52
8-148
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-149
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-150
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-151
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-152
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 1
YC14
2
1
YC17
4
YC5
1 YC15 1
2
YC2 19
4
1
1
YC8 YC4
2
1
YC10 12
2
1 1
YC7
YC13
4
12
1 1
YC16 YC1
6 5
8 1 13 1
Figure 8-53
Figure 8-54
8-153
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-154
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-155
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-156
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4
1 YC5 3
1 YC10
5 1
5 YC11
16 YC2
YC1
1 12
YC3
4
1 YC12
4
1
YC4 YS1
1
YC17
6 1 16
3 YC8 1 YC7 1 YC6 8 YC16 1 3 1 YC9
12
Figure 8-55
Figure 8-56
8-157
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-158
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-159
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-160
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-161
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3
1 YC6
YC5
12
16
YS1 8
YC1 YC14
1
1
14 1 2 1 2
A1
8 A13 YC2 YC3 YC7
YC10
1
YC11 YC4 1
14 B1 1 3
1
B13
YC8
Figure 8-57
Figure 8-58
8-162
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-163
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-164
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-165
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-166
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7
YC2
1
YC1
1 40
Figure 8-59
Figure 8-60
8-167
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-168
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-169
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 3 1 3 1 4 1 3 1 15
5 YC12 1 YC3 YC2 YC4 YC6 YC5
1
YC11
5
YS11
YC1
16
1 3 1 4 1 8
YC7 YC8 YC9
Figure 8-61
1 3 1 3 1 4 1 3 1 15
5 YC12 1 YC3 YC2 YC4 YC6 YC5
1
YC11
5
YS11
YC1
16
1 3 1 4 1 8
YC7 YC8 YC9
Figure 8-62
8-170
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-171
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-172
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-173
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 YC4 4
YC8 YC9
1 4 20 1 3 1 12 1
YC21 YC13
1 2
YC7
1
YC17
1
6
1 YC20 3
YC5 1
1 8 YC11 2
1 13 1
YC15 YC10
9
1 YC6
1 5
YC14 12
2 4 YC1 A1 A15
YC18 YC16 YC19
YC3 1 5
1 YC2 U3 B15 B1
3 1 4 1
Figure 8-63
Figure 8-64
8-174
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-175
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-176
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-177
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-178
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-179
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-180
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6 1 11 3 1 1 4
1
YC6 YC8 YC7 YC9
13
3
YC1
YC5
1
1 1
YC2
3
Figure 8-65
8-181
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-182
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-183
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
11 1
1 18
YC6
YC16
6
YC23
1
1
YC17
13
YC18
13
1
5
YC1
1
8
YC12
YC2
1
6 1 10 1
20
YC20 YC4
4
12 1
5 1
YC3 YC7
7 1
YC9
1
19 1
YC11 8 1
Figure 8-66
8-184
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 8-67
8-185
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-186
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-187
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC13 1 MTRY U SENS K I 0V/3.3V DC Tray paper full sensor 1_LED: On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
3 MTRY U SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Tray paper full sensor 2: On/Off
SIG
4 3.3V O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
YC14 1 SFT RELS MOT O 0V/24V DC Shift release motor control signal
2B (pulse)
2 SFT RELS MOT O 0V/24V DC Shift release motor control signal
1B (pulse)
8-188
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-189
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-190
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-191
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-192
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-193
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-194
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(11)MT PWB
(11-1) Connector position
YC1
YC7 1
13 1
5 1
YC2
20
11
YC6
1 7
YC3
YC4
1
YC5
1 4
Figure 8-68
8-195
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Destination
YC1: MT tray sensor 1/2/3, MT exit sensor 2
YC2: MT tray sensor 4/5/6/7, MT exit sensor 1, MT home position sensor
YC3: DF main PWB
YC4: MT right cover switch
YC5: MT conveying motor
8-196
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
8-197
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(12)BF PWB
(12-1) Connector position
30 1 5 YC2 1 5 YC1 1
16
15 YC20 YC18 YC8
1 1
9
1
1 1
YC5
YC7 4
YC11 7
12
1
12
YC3
4
7
1
YC16 YC19
7
1
1
YC4
6 2
1
YC15 YC9
2
1
10 YC13 1
20
Figure 8-69
8-198
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-199
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-200
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-201
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-202
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC5 YC3
YC4
11 1 4 1
1 3
1
3
YC2
YC6 2
1
2
YC7 1
6 1
YC8 YC10
1 4
1 YC1
2
YC9
1 12
5 YC11 1
Figure 8-70
Figure 8-71
8-203
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-204
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-205
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 YC4 4
YC8 YC9
1 4 20 1 3 1 13 1
YC21 YC13
1 2
YC7
1
YC17
1
9
1 YC20 3
YC5 1
1 8 YC11 2
1 13 1 1
YC15 YC10
9 YC12
1 YC6
1 5 6
YC14 12
2 4 YC1 A1 A15
YC18 YC16 YC19
YC3 1 5
1 YC2 U3 B15 B1
3 1 6 1
Figure 8-72
Figure 8-73
8-206
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-207
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-208
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-209
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-210
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-211
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-212
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
9 Appendixes
9-1 Repetitive defects gauge
9-1
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Note: Before changing any FRPO parameters, recommend to print out a service status page, so you will know
the parameter values before the changes are made. It is possible to return all FRPO parameters to the default
condition with the FRPO INIT command.
(!R! FRPO INIT; EXIT;)
FRPO parameters
9-2
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
9-3
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
9-4
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
9-5
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9-6
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9-7
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9-8
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9-9
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9-10
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
9-11
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Adjust- Item and adjustment contents Image Maintenance mode Reference Setting procedures Remark
ment pro- page
No. Mode Procedure Adjustment
cedure
6 Adjusting the trailing edge margin U402 Trail P.6-201 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
(Adjustment of writing) $
1. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, get longer.
[Trail] change the setting value.
Changes the LSU illumination end 2. Press the System Menu key. 2. Press the Start key to set the
timing. 3. Press the Start key. setting value.
(Test pattern output)
4. Press the System Menu key. Press the [Stop] key.
5. Execute the adjustment.
7 Adjusting the left and right margins U402 A Margin P.6-201 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
(Adjustment of writing) A
C Margin 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, get longer.
Select [A Margin] or [C Margin]. change the setting value.
Changes the LSU illumination start/ A C 3. Press the System Menu key. 2. Press the Start key to set the
end timing. 4. Press the Start key. setting value.
(Test pattern output)
5. Press the System Menu key. Press the [Stop] key.
6. Execute the adjustment.
8 Adjusting magnification of the U065 Main Scan P.6-62 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U065: When using on the contact glass
scanner in the main scanning direc- 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, *When the setting value is increased, the image
tion [Main Scan] change the setting value. get larger.
3. Press the System Menu key. 2. Press the Start key to set the
Processes data. 4. Place an original and press the Start key. setting value.
(Test copy output) (Test copy output)
5. Press the System Menu key. Press the [Stop] key.
6. Execute the adjustment.
9 Adjusting magnification of the U065 Sub Scan P.6-62 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U065: When using on the contact glass
scanner in the sub scanning direc- P.6-67 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, *When the setting value is increased, the image
tion (scanning adjustment) U070 Sub Scan(F) U065: [Sub Scan] change the setting value. get larger.
Sub Scan(B) U070: [Sub Scan(F)], [Sub Scan(B)] or 2. Press the Start key to set the
Changes the original scanning Sub Scan(CIS) [Sub Scan(CIS)] setting value. U070: When using document processor
speed. 3. Press the System Menu key. *When the setting value is increased, the image
4. Place an original and press the Start key. Press the [Stop] key. get longer.
(Test copy output) (Test copy output)
5. Press the System Menu key.
6. Execute the adjustment.
10 Adjusting the center line U067 Front P.6-65 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U067: When using on the contact glass
(Adjustment of reading) P.6-70 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, *When the setting value is increased, the image
U067: [Front] change the setting value. moves leftward.
Scan data is processed. U072 Front U072: [Front], [Back] or [CIS] 2. Press the Start key to set the
Back 3. Press the System Menu key. setting value. U072: When using document processor
CIS 4. Place an original and press the Start key. *Back adjustment selects [Back] at the time of
(Test copy output) (Test copy output) Press the [Stop] key. duplex mode.
5. Press the System Menu key. *When the setting value is increased, the image
6. Execute the adjustment. moves rightward.
9-12
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
Adjust- Item and adjustment contents Image Maintenance mode Reference Setting procedures Remark
ment pro- page
No. Mode Procedure Adjustment
cedure
11 Adjusting the leading edge registra- U066 Front P.6-64 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U066: When using on the contact glass
tion P.6-68 2. Press the System Menu key. cursor or the numeric keys, *When the setting value is increased, the image
(Adjustment of reading) 3. Place an original and press the Start key. change the setting value. moves forward.
U071 Front Head (Test copy output) (Test copy output) 2. Press the Start key to set the
Changes the original scan start tim- Back Head 4. Press the System Menu key. setting value. U071: When using document processor
ing. 5. Select the adjustment content. *Back adjustment selects [Back Head] at the
U066: [Front] Press the [Stop] key. time of duplex mode.
U071: [Front Head] or [Back Head] *When the setting value is increased, the image
moves forward.
Image quality
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 7505000005), the fol-
lowing adjustments are automatically made: Items Specifications
Scanner magnification adjustment in the sub scanning direction (U065)
Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration (U066) 100% magnification Printer: ±0.8%
Adjusting the scanner center line (U067) Copy: ±1.5%
Chromatic aberration in the main scanning direction Using DP: ±2.0%
Chromatic aberration in the sub scanning direction Magnification Copy: ±2.0%
MTF correction Using DP: ±2.5%
Input gamma in color mode
Color correction matrix Lateral squareness Copy: ±2.0mm/200mm
Input gamma in monochrome mode Using DP: ±2.5mm/200mm
Leading edge timing Print: 2.0 mm or less
Copy: 2.0mm or less
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 302AC68243), the fol-
lowing adjustments are automatically made: Using DP: 2.5mm or less
*: When running this test chart, you first must clean the feed rollers with alcohol and ensure the DP width guides are correctly posi- Skewed paper feed Print: 1.0mm /100mm or less
tioned against the original. (left-right difference) Copy: 1.0mm /100mm or less(table)
1.5mm/100mm or less(document processor)
*: (ChartB)
Lateral image shifting Print: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)
±3.0mm or less(MP tray)
5 mm Copy: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)
±3.0mm or less(MP tray)
Using DP: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)
149 ± 1 mm ±3.0mm or less(MP tray)
74 ± 1 mm
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner: DP Auto Adj) is run using the specified original, the following adjustments are automatically made:
Adjusting the DP sub scanning magnification (U070)
Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071)
Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original the following adjustments are automatically made: (Refer to P.6-208)
Adjusting the printer leading edge registration (U034)
Adjusting the printer center line (U034)
Adjusting the printer margin (U402)
9-13
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
A
(A/C side is downward.)]
B
(B/D side is downward.)]
A B
c
by + 0.26 mm on the A / C side and -
0.25 mm on the B / D side.
When A / C side goes down (output
image pattern A) d
C D C D
→Lower the ISU adjustment plate (d) by
shifting it in the direction of the arrow X
Compare the original with the output image and check the When B / D side goes down (output
side (A / C side or B / D side) where image shift occurs image pattern B)
→Raise the ISU adjustment plate (d) by e
*: Please use A3 original. X
shifting it in the direction of the arrow Y. Y
5. Tighten the screw (e) after the adjust-
ment is completed
6. Attach upper right cover (b) to the main
unit and fixed it with two screws (a).
9-14
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC2 YC29
NC 11 11 GND 3 3 1 3 1 1 GND
NC 10 10 Waste toner full sensor Vout 2 2 2 Relay 2 2 2 WTNR_LOCK_SENS
NC 9 9 5V 1 1 3 1 3 3 5V
TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 8 4 4 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM
TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 7 7 5 5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA
NC 6 6 1 2 6 6 3.3V2
NC 5 5 2 Relay 1 7 7 D_VIB_MOT
EXSOL1_REM 4 4 8 8 EXSOL1_REM
EXSOL1_KEEP 3 3 9 9 EXSOL1_KEEP
EXSOL2_REM 2 2 10 10 EXSOL2_REM
EXSOL2_KEEP 1 1 11 11 EXSOL2_KEEP
ALM 1 3 12 12 TN_FAN_LOCK
Toner absorption fan motor GND
24V
2
3
Relay 2
1
13
14
13
14
GND
TN_FAN_REM
2 2
Vibration motor K 1 1
2 2
Vibration motor M 1 1 Feed image PWB (1/6)
2 2
Vibration motor C 1 1
2 2
Vibration motor Y 1 1
Main drive
9-15
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC9 YC1
DATAP2_K 1 1 1 1 DATAP2_K
DATAN2_K 2 2 2 2 DATAN2_K
GND 3 3 3 3 GND DP PWB 16 1 B16
YC16
B16 DP_SDI(DP to ENG)
DATAP1_K 4 4 4 4 DATAP1_K YC6
15 2 B15 B15 DP_SEL(ENG to DP)
DATAN1_K 5 5 5 5 DATAN1_K
+24V4 16 16 14 3 B14 B14 +24V4
GND 6 6 6 6 GND
+24V4 15 15 13 4 B13 B13 +24V4
LSU_TH 7 7 7 7 LSU_TH
+24V4 14 14 12 5 B12 B12 +24V4
GND 8 8 8 8 GND
GND 13 13 11 6 B11 B11 GND
POL_CLK 9 9 9 9 POL_CLK
GND 12 12 10 7 B10 B10 GND
POL_RDY 10 10 10 10 POL_RDY
GND 11 11 9 8 B9 B9 GND
POL_REM 11 11 11 11 POL_REM
3.3V3_FUSE 10 10 8
Relay 9 B8 B8 3.3V3_FUSE
BD 12 12 12 12 BD
DP_ORG_SET 9 9 7 10 B7 B7 DP_ORG_SET
P4_BK 13 13 13 13 P4_BK
DP_FD_SW 8 8 6 11 B6 B6 DP_FD_SW
P2 14 14 14 14 P2
5 12 B5 B5 DP_RDY(DP to ENG)
P0 15 15 15 15 P0
DP_CO(DP to ENG) 7 7 4 13 B4 B4 DP_CO(DP to ENG)
CSI_K 16 16 16 16 CSI_K
DP_SDI(DP to ENG) 6 6 3 14 B3 B3 DP_TMG(DP to ENG)
GND 17 17 17 17 GND
DP_SDO(ENG to DP) 5 5 2 15 B2 B2 DP_SOO(ENG to DP)
DATAP4_K 18 18 18 18 DATAP4_K
DP_CLK(ENG to DP) 4 4 1 16 B1 B1 DP_CLK(ENG to DP)
DATAN4_K 19 19 19 19 DATAN4_K
DP_SEL(ENG to DP) 3 3
GND 20 20 20 20 GND
DP_RDY(DP to ENG) 2 2
DATAP3_K 21 21 21 21 DATAP3_K
DP_TMG(DP to ENG) 1 1
DATAN3_K 22 22 22 22 DATAN3_K
GND
SD_CLK
23
24
23
24
23
24
23
24
GND
SD_CLK
DP
P4_M 25 25 25 25 P4_M
CSI_M 26 26 26 26 CSI_M
NC 27 27 27 27 NC YC4 YC1
INT_ST_KM 28 28 28 28 INT_ST_KM +5V4IL_LSU 4 4 1 1 +5V4IL_LSU
SET_KM 29 29 29 29 SET_KM BD 3 3 2 2 BD A16 A16 GND
NC 30 30 30 30 NC NC 2 2 3 3 NC PD PWB A15 A15
Relay A14
GND
GND 31 31 31 31 GND GND 1 1 4 4 GND 3.3V 3 3 A14 3.3V2
DIO_KM 32 32 32 32 DIO_KM Home position sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
A13
A12
A13
A12
GND
HP_SENS
GND 33 33 33 33 GND
DOI_KM 34 34 34 34 DOI_KM
GND 35 35 35 35 GND
SKOI_KM 36 36 36 36 SKOI_KM YC5 GND 3 3 A11 A11 GND
GND 37 37 37 37 GND +24V4 1 1 5 5 +24V4 Original size sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
A10
A9
A10
A9
ORG_SENS
5V2
CS0_KM 38 38 38 38 CS0_KM PGND 2 2 4 4 PGND
GND 39 39 39 39 GND
DATAP2_M 40 40 40 40 DATAP2_M
POL_REM
POL_RDY
3
4
3
4
3
2
3
2
START/STOP
LOCKED
Polygon motor 3.3V 3 3 A8 A8 3.3V2
DATAN2_M
GND
41
42
41
42
41
42
41
42
DATAN2_M
GND
POL_CLK 5 5 1 1 EXT.CLOCK Original size timing sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
A7
A6
A7
A6
GND
PLT_OPEN
DATAP1_M 43 43 43 43 DATAP1_M
DATAN1_M 44 44 44 44 DATAN1_M
GND 45 45 45 45 GND YC6 B/ 1 6 A5 A5 SCAN_MOT_1_B
DATAP4_M 46 46 46 46 DATAP4_M CLN_MOT_A 1 1 3 1 5 A4 A4 SCAN_MOT_1_A
B 3 4 A3 A3 SCAN_MOT_2_A
DATAN4_M
GND
47
48
47
48
47
48
47
48
DATAN4_M
GND
NC 2 2 2 2 LSU cleaning motor Scanner motor A 4 3 A2 A2 SCAN_MOT_2_B
CLN_MOT_B 3 3 1 3
DATAP3_M 49 49 49 49 DATAP3_M 2 A1 A1 GND
DATAN3_M 50 50 50 50 DATAN3_M A/ 6 1
YC7
YC10 YC2
TH 1 1 2 2 TH
GND 1 1 1 1 GND
DATAP4_C 2 2 2 2 DATAP4_C
NC 2 2 LSU thermistor
GND 3 3 1 1 GND
DATAN4_C 3 3 3 3 DATAN4_C
GND 4 4 4 4 GND
DATAP3_C 5 5 5 5 DATAP3_C YC1 YC36
DATAN3_C 6 6 6 6 DATAN3_C +12V5 40 40 1 1 +12V5
GND 7 7 7 7 GND +12V5 39 39 2 2 +12V5
DATAP2_C 8 8 8 8 DATAP2_C +12V5 38 38 3 3 +12V5
DATAN2_C 9 9 9 9 DATAN2_C +12V5 37 37 4 4 +12V5
GND 10 10 10 10 GND NC 36 36 5 5 NC
DATAP1_C 11 11 11 11 DATAP1_C LED_PWM 35 35 6 6 LED_PWM
DATAN1_C 12 12 12 12 DATAN1_C GND 34 34 7 7 GND
GND 13 13 13 13 GND DSI_CIS_5P 33 33 8 8 DSI_CIS_5P
INT_ST_YC 14 14 14 14 INT_ST_YC DSI_CIS_5N 32 32 9 9 DSI_CIS_5N
SET_YC 15 15 15 15 SET_YC GND 31 31 10 10 GND
CSI_C 16 16 16 16 CSI_C DSI_CIS_4P 30 30 11 11 DSI_CIS_4P
GND 17 17 17 17 GND DSI_CIS_4N 29 29 12 12 DSI_CIS_4N
DIO_YC 18 18 18 18 DIO_YC GND 28 28 13 13 GND
GND 19 19 19 19 GND DSI_CIS_3P 27 27 14 14 DSI_CIS_3P
DOI_YC 20 20 20 20 DOI_YC DSI_CIS_3N 26 26 15 15 DSI_CIS_3N
GND 21 21 21 21 GND GND 25 25 16 16 GND
SKOI_YC 22 22 22 22 SKOI_YC DSI_CIS_CKP 24 24 17 17 DSI_CIS_CKP
GND 23 23 23 23 GND DSI_CIS_CKN 23 23 18 18 DSI_CIS_CKN
CSO_YC 24 24 24 24 CSO_YC GND 22 22 19 19 GND
GND 25 25 25 25 GND DSI_CIS_2P 21 21 20 20 DSI_CIS_2P
DATAP4_Y 26 26 26 26 DATAP4_Y DSI_CIS_2N 20 20 21 21 DSI_CIS_2N
DATAN4_Y 27 27 27 27 DATAN4_Y GND 19 19 22 22 GND
GND 28 28 28 28 GND DSI_CIS_1P 18 18 23 23 DSI_CIS_1P
DATAP3_Y 29 29 29 29 DATAP3_Y DSI_CIS_1N 17 17 24 24 DSI_CIS_1N
DATAN3_Y 30 30 30 30 DATAN3_Y GND 16 16 25 25 GND
GND 31 31 31 31 GND AFE_RD 15 15 26 26 AFE_RD
DATAP2_Y 32 32 32 32 DATAP2_Y GND 14 14 27 27 GND
DATAN2_Y 33 33 33 33 DATAN2_Y AFE_WD 13 13 28 28 AFE_WD
GND 34 34 34 34 GND GND 12 12 29 29 GND
DATAP1_Y 35 35 35 35 DATAP1_Y AFE_CLK 11 11 30 30 AFE_CLK
DATAN1_Y 36 36 36 36 DATAN1_Y GND 10 10 31 31 GND
GND 37 37 37 37 GND AFE_CS 9 9 32 32 AFE_CS
CSI_Y 38 38 38 38 CSI_Y GND 8 8 33 33 GND
P4_YC
BD
39
40
39
40
39
40
39
40
P4_YC
BD
APC PWB AFE_MCLK_P
AFE_MCLK_N
7
6
7
6
34
35
34
35
AFE_MCLK_P
AFE_MCLK_N
GND 5 5 36 36 GND
NC 4 4 37 37 NC
YC27 YC3
+5V2 3 3 38 38 +5V2
+5V4IL_LSU 1 1 8 8 +5V4IL_LSU +5V2 2 2 39 39 +5V2
+5V4IL_LSU 2 2 7 7 +5V4IL_LSU +5V2 1 1 40 40 +5V2
GND 3 3 6 6 GND
GND 4 4 5 5 GND
CLN_MOT_A 5 5 4 4 CLN_MOT_A
CLN_MOT_B 6 6 3 3 CLN_MOT_B
+24V4
PGND
7
8
7
8
2
1
2
1
+24V4
PGND Laser scanner unit YC1 YC2
㸦4 beam㸧 +12V
+12V
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
+12V
+12V
NC 3 3 3 3 NC
LED PWB LED_PWM
LED_ENA
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
LED_PWM
LED_ENABLE
WTNR_MOT_A 9 9 5 1 3 1 GND 6 6 6 6 GND
2 2 Waste toner motor GND 7 7 7 7 GND
WTNR_MOT_B 10 10 4 2 1 3
Relay
4 4 TH
WTNR_WEIGHT 11 11 3 3 3 3 OUT
Weight sensor CCD PWB
GND 12 12 2 4 2 2 GND
+5V2 13 13 1 5 1 1 5V
9-16
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Relay
GND 3 3 B1 B1 GND
+24V3_IL_F2_FET2 2 2 B2 B2 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2
FSR_OFFSET_CNT 1 1 B3 B3 FSR_OFFSET_CNT
B4 B4 PWM
Fuser high voltage PWB B5 B5 CW/CCW
3.3V 3 3 B6 B6 3.3V2_LED
IH position sensor GND 2 2 B7 B7 GND
Vout 1 1 B8 B8 IH_CORE_HP
B/ 1 4 B9 B9 IHMOT_2B
B 2 3 B10 B10 IHMOT_2A
IH core motor A 3
Relay
2 B11 B11 IHMOT_1A
A/ 4 1 B12 B12 IHMOT_1B
Eject unit 1
2
12
11
3 10
4 9 YC17
A/ 1 4 5 8 A1 A1 EXMOT_1B
A 2 3 6 7 A2 A2 EXMOT_1A
Exit reversing motor B/ 3 2 7 6 A3 A3 EXMOT_2B
B 4 1 8 5 A4 A4 EXMOT_2A
Feed image PWB (2/6)
3.3V 3 3 9 4 A5 A5 +3.3V2_LED
Lower exit full sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
10
11
3
2
A6
A7
A6
A7
GND
EXMAIN_FULL
12 1
Relay
3.3V 3 3 1 12 A8 A8 +3.3V2_LED
Upper exit full sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
11
10
A9
A10
A9
A10
GND
EXINNER_FULL
IHCOIL_FAN1 6 6 3 1 24V
Relay GND
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_F
7
8
7
8
2
1
Relay 2
3
GND
ALM
Exit/IH front fan motor
YC1
VIB_MOT_REM 20 20 B1 B1 VIB_MOT_REM
DLP_FAN_HARF 19 19 B2 B2 DLP_FAN_HARF
IHCOIL_FAN1 9 9 3 1 24V
DLP_FAN_REM 18 18 B3 B3 DLP_FAN_REM
5V0_FUSE 17 17 B4 B4 5V0_FUSE
GND 10 10 2 Relay 2 GND Exit/IH middle fan motor
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_C 11 11 1 3 ALM
DRM_HEAT_REM 16 16 B5 B5 DRM_HEAT_REM
ERASER_COL 15 15 B6 B6 ERASER_COL
ERASER_BK 14 14 B7 B7 ERASER_BK
+24V2 13 13 B8 B8 +24V2_F1
IHCOIL_FAN1 12 12 3 1 24V
GND 12 12 B9 B9 GND
Drum/Developer TPC_Y 11 11 B10 B10 TPC_Y
GND
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_R
13
14
13
14
2 Relay 2 GND Exit/IH rear fan motor
1 3 ALM
TPC_C 10 10 B11 B11 TPC_C
relay PWB (1/2) TPC_M
TPC_BK
9
8
9
8
B12
B13
B12
B13
TPC_M
TPC_BK
DLP_TH 7 7 B14 B14 DLP_TH
EEP_SDA 6 6 B15 B15 EEP_SDA
EEP_SCL 5 5 B16 B16 EEP_SCL
DRM_EEP_SEL1 4 4 B17 B17 DRM_EEP_SEL1
DRM_EEP_SEL0 3 3 B18 B18 DRM_EEP_SEL0
3.3V2 2 2 B19 B19 3.3V2
GND 1 1 B20 B20 GND
9-17
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
TNMOT_BK_OUT2 A2 A2 8 2
2
1
2
3
Toner motor K
6 6 CONT_RECOG
3.3V2 A6 A6 4 6 Collector
THOP_FULL_BK
THOP_LED_BK
A7
A8
A7
A8
3
2
7
8
Emitter
Cathode
Toner level sensor K
YC36 3.3V2_LED A9 A9 1 9 Anode
+24V 1 6 1 6 24V
GND 2 5 2 5 GND
START/STOP 3 4 3 4 CONT_MOT_REM
Container motor CLOCK 4 3 4 3 CONT_MOT_CLK
LD 5 2 5 2 CONT_MOT_LD TNMOT_M_OUT1 A10 A10 9 1 3 1
CW/CCW 6 1 6 1 CONT_MOT_DIR
TNMOT_M_OUT2 A11 A11 8 2
2
1
2
3
Toner motor M
Relay
YC24
TNMOT_C_OUT1 B1 B1 9 1 3 1
26 25 N.C.
+24V 1 1 25 25 +24V3_IL_F1_FET1 TNMOT_C_OUT2 B2 B2 8 2
2
1
2
3
Toner motor C
GND 2 2 24 24 GND
START/STOP 3 3 23 23 DLP_COL_MOT_REM
Developer motor M CLOCK 4 4 22 22 DLP_COL_MOT_CLK
LD 5 5 21 21 DLP_COL_MOT_LD 3.3V2_LED B3 B3 7 3 3 3 3.3V
CW/CCW 6 6 20 20 DLP_COL_MOT_DIR GND B4 B4 6 Relay 4 2 2 GND Toner motor rotation sensor C
THOP_PLS_C B5 B5 5 5 1 1 Vout
3.3V2 B6 B6 4 6 Collector
THOP_FULL_C
THOP_LED_C
B7
B8
B7
B8
3
2
7
8
Emitter
Cathode
Toner level sensor C
+24V1 1 11 19 19 +24V3_IL_F1_FET1 3.3V2_LED B9 B9 1 9 Anode
PGND 2 10 18 18 GND
START/STOP 3 9 17 17 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_REM
VM 4 8 16 16 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_CLK
FG 5 7 15 15 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_FG
Developer K CW/CCW 6 6 14 14 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_DIR
DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_BRK TNMOT_Y_OUT1 B10 B10 9 1 3 1
BRAKE 7 5 13 13
/ Transfer belt motor +5V 8 4
TNMOT_Y_OUT2 B11 B11 8 2
2
1
2
3
Toner motor Y
SGND 9 3
SIG1 10 2
SIG2 11 1
3.3V2_LED B12 B12 7 3 3 3 3.3V
GND B13 B13 6 Relay 4 2 2 GND Toner motor rotation sensor Y
THOP_PLS_Y B14 B14 5 5 1 1 Vout
+24V 1 6 6 6 +24V4
GND 2 5 5 5 GND
START/STOP 3 4 4 4 DRM_BK_MOT_REM
Drum motor K CLOCK 4 3 3 3 DRM_BK_MOT_CLK
LD 5 2 2 2 DRM_BK_MOT_LD
CW/CCW 6 1 1 1 DRM_BK_MOT_DIR
3 3 1 5 3 3 +24V2_F1
Developer clutch 2
1
2
1 2 4 4 4 DLP_BK_CLT_REM
Relay
3.3V 3 3 3 3 5 5 3.3V2_LED
Belt release sensor GND 2 2 4 2 6 6 GND
Vout 1 1 5 1 7 7 BLT_4RELEASE_SENS
9-18
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
3.3V 3 3 3 6 A9 A9 3.3V2_LED
Upper paper gauge sensor 1 GND 2 2 4 Relay 5 A10 A10 GND 3.3V2_LED B10 B10 B5 B10 5 1 3 3 3.3V
Vout 1 1 5 4 A11 A11 CAS1_QUANT1 GND B11
DU_SENS1 B12
B11
B12
B4
B3
B11
B12
4
3
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
DU sensor 1
Relay
3.3V 3 3 6 3 A12 A12 3.3V2_LED
Lower paper gauge sensor 1 GND 2 2 7 2 A13 A13 GND RCOVER_OPEN B13
GND B14
B13
B14
B2
B1
B13
B14
2
1
4
5
2
1
2
1 Conveying open/close sensor
Vout 1 1 8 1 A14 A14 CAS1_QUANT2
Relay Relay
2 2 1 2 A15 A15 LIFTMOT1_OUT1 DU_CL1 A1 A1 A14 A1 3 3
Relay
Lift motor 1 1 1 2 1 A16 A16 LIFTMOT1_OUT2 2 2 DU clutch 1
+24V2 A2 A2 A13 A2 1 1
Relay
DUCL2 A3 A3 A12 A3 3 3
MPFCL_REM A5 A5 A10 A5 3 3
SIZE_WS 2 2 1 8 B3 B3 CAS2_WSIZE 2 2 MP clutch
Paper width sensor 2 GND 1 1 2 7 B4 B4 GND +24V2_FUSE A6 A6 A9 A6 1 1
3.3V 3 3 3 6 B5 B5 3.3V2_LED
Upper paper gauge sensor 2 GND 2 2 4 Relay 5 B6 B6 GND
Vout 1 1 5 4 B7 B7 CAS2_QUANT1
3.3V2_LED A7 A7 A8 A7 8 1 3 3 3.3V
3.3V 3 3 6 3 B8 B8 3.3V2_LED MPF_WSIZE A8 A8 A7 A8 7 2 2 2 Vout MP paper width sensor
Lower paper gauge sensor 2 GND 2 2 7 2 B9 B9 GND GND A9 A9 A6 A9 6 3 1 1 GND
Vout 1 1 8 1 B10 B10 CAS2_QUANT2
MPF_TRAY A10 A10 A5 A10 5 4 2 2
CAS_OP 2 2 1 6 B11 B11 CAS2_LSIZE3 GND A11 A11 A4 A11 4
Relay
5 1 1 MP tray sensor
Cassette sensor 2 GND 1 1 2 5 B12 B12 GND
LED_3.3V2 A12 A12 A3 A12 3 6 3 3 3.3V
CN-3 4 4 3 Relay 4 B13 B13 CAS2_LSIZE3 GND A13 A13 A2 A13 2 7 2 2 GND MP paper length sensor
Paper length sensor 2 GND 3 3 4 3 B14 B14 GND MPF_LSIZE A14 A14 A1 A14 1 8 1 1 Vout MP tray
CN-2 2 2 5 2 B15 B15 CAS2_LSIZE2
CN-1 1 1 6 1 B16 B16 CAS2_LSIZE1
YC8
MPFLIFT_OUT1 1 1 12 1 2 1
YC6 MPFLIFT_OUT2 2 2 11 2 1
Relay
2 MP lift motor
GND 3 3 1 5 A1 A1 GND
Registration sensor Vout 2 2 2 4 A2 A2 REGIST_SENS
MPFLIFT_HP 3 3 10 3 2 2
3.3V 1 1 3
Relay
3 A3 A3 3.3V2
GND 4 4 9 4 1 1 MP position sensor
3 3 4 2 A4 A4 MIDCL N.C. 5 5 8 5
Middle clutch 2 2
N.C. 6 6 7 Relay 6
1 1 5 1 A5 A5 +24V2_F2
3.3V3 7 7 6 7 6 1 3 3 3.3V
1
2
12
11
GND
MPF_SET
8
9
8
9
5
4
8
9
5
4
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
MP paper sensor
3 10 Relay
3.3V2 10 10 3 10 3 4 3 3.3V
3.3V 3 3 4 9 A6 A6 3.3V2_LED MPF_FEED 11 11 2 11 2 5 2 Vout MP conveying sensor
Retard sensor 1 Vout 2 2 5
6
8
7
A7 A7 TDRS1_SENS GND 12 12 1 12 1 6 1 GND
GND 1 1 A8 A8 GND
Relay
3.3V 3 3 7 6 A9 A9 3.3V2_LED Coveying cover
Retard sensor 2 Vout
GND
2
1
2
1
8
9
5
4
A10
A11
A10
A11
TDRS2_SENS
GND
24V 1 2 1 2 1 2
Container left fan motor GND 2
Relay
1 2
Relay
1 2
Relay
1
YC10
+3.3V2 5 5 1 12 1
YC9
1 3.3V2
FSRMOT_DIR 1 1 1 11 1 6 CW/CCW Fuser drive
FSRMOT_LD 2 2 2 10 2 5 LD
LEDREF 4 4 2 11 2 2 REG_F_LED
FSRMOT_CLK 3 3 3 9 3 4 CLOCK
Front ID sensor GND 3 3 3 10 3 3 GND
FSRMOT_REM 4 4 4 8 4 3 START/STOP Fuser motor
IDS 2 2 4 9 4 4 ID_SENS_F_S
GND 5 5 5 7 5 2 GND
IDP 1 1 5 8 5 5 ID_SENS_F_P
+24V2IL2_FUSE 6 6 6 6 6 1 +24V
+3.3V2 5 5 6 7 6 6 3.3V2
LEDREF 4 4 7 Relay 6 7 7 REG_R_LED
Relay
Rear ID sensor GND 3 3 8 5 8 8 GND FSR_RLSMOT_OUT2 7 7 7 5 1 3
IDS 2 2 9 4 9 9 ID_SENS_R_S
IDP 1 1 10 3 10 10 ID_SENS_R_P FSR_RLSMOT_OUT1
2 2 Fuser pressure release motor
8 8 8 4 3 1
COM 1 2 11 2 11 11 +24V2_F2
Cleaning solenoid ACT 2
Relay
1 12 1 12 12 ID_SOL
EXFAN_LOCK 9 9 9 3 1 3 ALM
GND
EXFAN
10
11
10
11
10
11
2
1
2
3
Relay 2
1
GND
24V
Exit fan motor
3 3 13 13 REG_CL
Registration clutch 2 2
1 1 14 14 +24V2_F2 Feed drive PWB (2/3)
9-19
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC10 YC2 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
+24V2 1 1 +24V2 ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
ERASE1 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
Eraser K ERASE2 3 3 Erase2 24V2/5V0 4 3 24V2/5V0 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
ERASE3 4 4 Erase3 ERASER1 3 4 ERASER1 DLP_TH or N.C. 4
Relay 3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0 T/C sensor K
EEP_SCL 6 Relay 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2 5 6 3.3V2 3.3V2 6 6 3 3 3.3V2
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2 8 7 3.3V2 EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB K GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
VIB_MOT 9 9 1 1
YC6 Developer PWB K 3.3V2 10 10 2 2 Vibration motor
Drum unit K Drum heater 2
1
1
2
5V0_FUSE
SCL Developer unit K
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC11 YC3 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
+24V2 1 1 +24V2 ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
ERASE1 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
Eraser M ERASE2 3 3 Erase2 24V2/5V0 4 3 24V2/5V0 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
ERASE3 4 4 Erase3 ERASER1 3
Relay 4 ERASER1 N.C. 4
Relay 3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0 T/C sensor M
EEP_SCL 6 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2 5 6 3.3V2 3.3V2 6 6 3 3 3.3V2
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2 8 7 3.3V2 EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB M GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
VIB_MOT 9 9 1 1
YC7 Developer PWB M 3.3V2 10 10 2 2 Vibration motor
Drum heater 2 1 5V0_FUSE
Developer unit M
Drum unit M 1 2 SCL
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC12 YC4 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
+24V2 1 1 +24V2 ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
ERASE1 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
Eraser C ERASE2 3 3 Erase2 24V2/5V0 4 3 24V2/5V0 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
ERASE3 4 4 Erase3 ERASER1 3
Relay 4 ERASER1 N.C. 4 3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0 T/C sensor C
EEP_SCL 6 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2 5 Relay 6 3.3V2 3.3V2 6 6 3 3 3.3V2
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2 8 7 3.3V2 EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB C GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
VIB_MOT 9 9 1 1
YC8 Developer PWB C 3.3V2 10 10 2 2 Vibration motor
Drum unit C Drum heater 2
1
1
2
5V0_FUSE
SCL Developer unit C
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC13 YC5 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
+24V2 1 1 +24V2 ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
ERASE1 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
Eraser Y ERASE2 3 3 Erase2 24V2/5V0 4 3 24V2/5V0 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
ERASE3 4 4 Erase3 ERASER1 3 4 ERASER1 N.C. 4 3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0
T/C sensor Y
EEP_SCL 6 Relay 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2 5 Relay 6 3.3V2 3.3V2 6 6 3 3 3.3V2
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2 8 7 3.3V2 EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB Y GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
VIB_MOT 9 9 1 1
YC9 Developer PWB Y 3.3V2 10 10 2 2 Vibration motor
Drum unit Y Drum heater 2
1
1
2
5V0_FUSE
SCL Developer unit Y
YC14
GND 1 2 1 1 REM
Developer fan motor K 24V 2
Relay
1 2 2 +24V2
GND 1 2 3 3 REM
Developer fan motor M 24V 2
Relay
1 4 4 +24V2
9-20
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Transfer high-voltage
PWB Feed image PWB (4/6)
YC1
+24V4 1 1
+24V3 2 2
YC35 +24V3 3 3
YC1 1 1 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 +24V2 4 4 YC6 TB1
PGND 13 13 1 13 2 2 GND +24V2 5 5 1 1 +24V2 LIVE 1 1 AC_LIVE
+24V2IL 12 12 2 12 GND 6 6 2 2 +24V2 Black Black
3 3 GND GND 7 7 3 3 +24V3 TB2 Inlet 1
4 4 GND GND 8 8 4 4 +24V3 NEUTRAL 1 1 AC_NEUTRAL
5 5 GND GND 9 9 5 5 GND White White
6 6 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 GND 10 10 6 6 GND
7 7 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 7 7 GND
8 8 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 8 8 GND
TB3
DH_LIVE 1 1 Blue 1 CH_LIVE
Triac
SP_CNT 4 4 10 4 A12 A12 SP_CNT
T2_CNT 3 3 11 3 A13 A13 T2_CNT
T_REM 2 2 12 2 A14 A14 T_REM
SGND 1 1 13 1 A15 A15 SGND
YC2 YC1
LIVE
NEUTRAL
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
LIVE
NEUTRAL
IH PWB (1/2)
YC3
PGND 1 1
PGND 2 2
PGND 3 3 Relay
+24V2IL 4 4
+24V2IL 5 5
+24V2IL 6 6
Fuse
YC1
B_BK_SLV_AC_CLK
B_BK_MAG_AC_CLK
17
16
17
16 Engine PWB (3/7) YC4
M_Y_I_SENS 15 15 B1 B1 M_Y_I_SENS CH_LIVE 1 1 1 1
M_C_I_SENS 14 14 B2 B2 M_C_I_SENS CH_LIVE 2 2 2 2 Cassette heater
M_M_I_SENS 13 13 B3 B3 M_M_I_SENS NC 3 3
DISCHARGE 12 12 B4 B4 DISCHARGE NC 4 4
B_COL_SLV_AC_CLK 11 11 B5 B5 B_SLV_AC_CLK CH_NEUTRAL 5 5
B_COL_MAG_AC_CLK 10 10 B6 B6 B_MAG_AC_CLK 1 2
B_K_MAG_AC_CNT
B_K_SLV_AC_CNT
9
8
9
8
B7
B8
B7
B8
B_K_MAG_AC_CNT
B_K_SLV_AC_CNT
CH_NEUTRAL 6 6 PF drawer
M_AC_CLK 7 7 B9 B9 M_AC_CLK (for Cassette heater)
M_K_AC_CNT 6 6 B10 B10 M_K_AC_CNT 1 3
M_K_I_SENS
M_K_DC_CNT
5
4
5
4
B11
B12
B11
B12
M_K_I_SENS
M_K_DC_CNT
Low power voltage PEB (2/2)
B_K_SLV_DC_CNT 3 3 B13 B13 B_K_SLV_DC_CNT YC5
B_K_MAG_DC_CNT 2 2 B14 B14 B_K_MAG_DC_CNT +24V2 1 1 1
SGND 1 1 B15 B15 SGND GND 2 2 2
PF drawer (PF power supply㸧
YC2 YC33
HV_REM 20 20 1 1 HV_REM
M_M_AC_CNT 19 19 2 2 M_M_AC_CNT YC8
M_C_AC_CNT 18 18 3 3 M_C_AC_CNT 12 12 5V0
M_Y_AC_CNT 17 17 4 4 M_Y_AC_CNT 11 11 GND
B_M_SLV_DC_CNT 16 16 5 5 B_M_SLV_DC_CNT
B_M_SLV_AC_CNT 15 15 6 6 B_M_SLV_AC_CNT
B_C_SLV_DC_CNT 14 14 7 7 B_C_SLV_DC_CNT
B_C_SLV_AC_CNT 13 13 8 8 B_C_SLV_AC_CNT YC42
B_C_MAG_AC_CNT 12 12 9 9 B_C_MAG_AC_CNT 5V0 1 1 10 10 5V0
B_Y_SLV_DC_CNT 11 11 10 10 B_Y_SLV_DC_CNT GND 2 2 9 9 GND
B_Y_SLV_AC_CNT 10 10 11 11 B_Y_SLV_AC_CNT 5V0 3 3 8 8 5V0
B_Y_MAG_AC_CNT 9 9 12 12 B_Y_MAG_AC_CNT GND 4 4 7 7 GND
B_M_MAG_AC_CNT 8 8 13 13 B_M_MAG_AC_CNT 5V0 5 5 6 6 5V0
M_C_DC_CNT 7 7 14 14 M_C_DC_CNT GND 6 6 5 5 GND
M_Y_DC_CNT 6 6 15 15 M_Y_DC_CNT 5V0 7 7 4 4 5V0
M_M_DC_CNT 5 5 16 16 M_M_DC_CNT GND 8 8 3 3 GND
B_C_MAG_DC_CNT 4 4 17 17 B_C_MAG_DC_CNT 5V0 9 9 2 2 5V0
B_M_MAG_DC_CNT 3 3 18 18 B_M_MAG_DC_CNT GND 10 10 1 1 GND
B_Y_MAG_DC_CNT 2 2 19 19 B_Y_MAG_DC_CNT
SGND 1 1 20 20 SGND
Main PWB (1/3)
Main high-voltage
PWB
9-21
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC2
3.3V2_LED 1 1 3 3 3.3V
GND 2 2 2 2 GND Front belt rotation sensor
Fuser PWB FSR_ROLL_F 3 3 1 1 Vout
3.3V2_LED 4 4 3 3 3.3V
YC22 YC1
GND 5 5 2 2 GND Fuser sensor
FSR_JAM_SENS 6 6 1 1 Vout
GND 1 1 1 1 1 1 GND
FUSER_SDA 2 2 2 2 2 2 EEP_SDA FSR_TH_EDGE 7 7
FUSER_SCL 3 3 3 3 3 3 EEP_SCL GND 8 8 Fuser thermistor 3 (edge)
+3.3V2 4 4 4 4 4 4 3.3V2
FSR_TH_PRESS 5 5 5 5 5 5 FSR_TH_PRESS 3.3V2_LED 9 9 3 3 3.3V
FSR_PRESS_SENS 6 6 6 6 6 6 FSR_PRESS_SENS GND 10 10 2 2 GND Fuser pressure release sensor
FSR_TH_EDGE 7 7 7 7 7 7 FSR_TH_EDGE FSR_PRESS_SENS 11 11 1 1 Vout
FSR_JAM_SENS 8 8 8 8 8 8 FSR_JAM_SENS
FSR_ROLL_F_SENS 9 9 9 9 9 9 FSR_ROLL_F FSR_TH_PRESS 12 12
10 10 10 10 NC GND 13 13 Fuser thermistor 4 (press)
11 11
+3.3V2_TH_CUT 10 10 12 12 3 1
+3.3V2 11 11 13 Relay 13
2
1
Relay 2
3
Fuser thermostat
GND 12 12 14 14 2 1
FSR_TH_MIDDLE 13 13 15 15 1
Relay
2 Fuser thermistor 1 (middle)
3.3V2_LED 14 14 16 16 3 3 3.3V
GND 15 15 17 17 2 2 GND Rear belt rotation sensor
FSR_ROLL_R_SENS 16 16 18 18 1 1 Vout
GND 17 17 19 19 2 1
FSR_TH_CENTRAL 18 18 20 20 1
Relay
2 Fuser thermistor 2 (center)
Fuser IH coil
YC2
VS 1 1
YC3
COIL_COM 1 1
FSR1
Fuser discharger needle 1 1 1 CHARGE
IH PWB (2/2)
YC4 YC29
GND 7 7 1 1 GND
3.3V2_FUSER 6 6 2 2 3.3V2_FUSER
IH_IGBT_CLK_HIGH 5 5 3 3 IH_IGBT_CLK_HI
IH_IGBT_CLK_LOW 4 4 4 4 IH_IGBT_CLK_LOW
IH_ERROR 3 3 5 5 IH_ERROR
IH_TXD 2 2 6 6 IH_TXD
IH_RXD 1 1 7 7 IH_RXD Engine PWB (4/7)
YC5
GND 3 3 8 8 GND
IH_RELAY 2 2 9 9 IH_RELAY
+24V2 1 1 10 10 +24V2
9-22
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC43
YC9 YC63 1 1 24V2
1 1 VGH GND 13 13 2 2 GND
2 2 VDD YC8 YC6 DP_WAKEUP_REQ 12 12 3 3 DP_WAKEUP_REQ
3 3 VGL GND 1 1 1 1 GND HLD_SCN_N(E_M) 11 11 4 4 HLD_SCN_N(E_M)
4 4 VCOM LCD_OFF 2 2 2 2 LCD_OFF ENG_POWOFF_N(E_M) 10 10 5 5 ENG_POWOFF_N(E_M)
5 5 VCOM LOCKN 3 3 3 3 LOCKN E2C_SDIR(E_M) 9 9 6 6 E2C_SDIR(E_M)
6 6 AGND GND 4 4 4 4 GND E2C_IR(E_M) 8 8 7 7 E2C_IR(E_M)
7 7 AVDD TX0N 5 5 5 5 TX0N E2C_SBSY(E_M) 7 7 8 8 E2C_SBSY(E_M)
8 8 GND TX0P 6 6 6 6 TX0P C2E_SCLK(M_E) 6 6 9 9 C2E_SCLK(M_E)
9 9 GND GND 7 7 7 7 GND C2E_SDAT(E_M) 5 5 10 10 C2E_SDAT(E_M)
10 10 V1 E2C_SDAT(E_M) 4 4 11 11 E2C_SDAT(E_M)
11 11 V2 HLD_ENG_N(M_E) 3 3 12 12 HLD_ENG_N(M_E)
12 12 V3 ENG_WAKEUP_REQ(M_E) 2 2 13 13 ENG_WAKEUP_REQ(M_E)
13 13 V4 JS_LED_REM 1 1 14 14 JS_LED_REM
14 14 V5 YC12
15 15 V6 2 2 B1 B1 POWER_ON
16 16 V7 Power switch 1
Relay
1 B2 B2 GND
17 17 HSD YC43 YC35
18 18 GND_LVDS GND 60 60 1 1 GND
19 19 RxIN3+ YC5 OS_SAD4P 59 59 2 2 OS_SAD4P
20 20 RxIN3- NC B15 B15 OS_SAD4N 58 58 3 3 OS_SAD4N
21 21 GND GND B14 B14 GND 57 57 4 4 GND
22 22 RxIN2+ JOB_LED B13 B13 B3 B3 JOB_LED OS_SACKP 56 56 5 5 OS_SACKP
23 23 RxIN2- GND B12 B12 B4 B4 GND OS_SACKN 55 55 6 6 OS_SACKN
24 24 GND GND B11 B11 B5 B5 GND GND 54 54 7 7 GND
25 25 RxIN1+ GND B10 B10 B6 B6 GND OS_SAD3P 53 53 8 8 OS_SAD3P
26 26 RxIN1- BEEP_POWERON B9 B9 B7 B7 BEEP_POWERON OS_SAD3N 52 52 9 9 OS_SAD3N
27 27 GND LED_MEMORY B8 B8 B8 B8 LED_MEMORY GND 51 51 10 10 GND
LCD 28 28 RxIN0+ LED_ATTENTION B7 B7 B9 B9 LED_ATTENTION OS_SAD2P 50 50 11 11 OS_SAD2P
29 29 RxIN0- LED_PROCESSING B6 B6 B10 B10 LED_PROCESSING OS_SAD2N 49 49 12 12 OS_SAD2N
30 30 GND AUDIO B5 B5 B11 B11 AUDIO GND 48 48 13 13 GND
31 31 RxINCK+ PNL_WKUP_REQ B4 B4 B12 B12 PNL_WKUP_REQ OS_SAD1P 47 47 14 14 OS_SAD1P
32 32 RxINCK- INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY B3 B3 B13 B13 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY OS_SAD1N 46 46 15 15 OS_SAD1N
33 33 GND NIRQ B2 B2 B14 B14 NIRQ GND 45 45 16 16 GND
34 34 VDD_LVDS I2C_SDA_NFC B1 B1 B15 B15 I2C_SDA_NFC SAT_2_HSYNC_A_P 44 44 17 17 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_P
35 35 V8 Relay SAT_2_HSYNC_A_N 43 43 18 18 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_N
36 36 V9 Relay SAT_2_HSYNC_B_P 42 42 19 19 SAT_2_HSYNC_B_P
37 37 V10 I2C_SCL_NFC A15 A15 A1 A1 PNL_WKUP_REQ SAT_2_HSYNC_B_N 41 41 20 20 SAT_2_HSYNC_B_N
38 38 V11 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY A14 A14 A2 A2 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY SAT_2_HSYNC_C_P 40 40 21 21 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_P
39 39 V12 FPRST A13 A13 A3 A3 FPRST SAT_2_HSYNC_C_N 39 39 22 22 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_N
40 40 V13 P2C_SDAT A12 A12 A4 A4 P2C_SDAT SAT_2_HSYNC_D_P 38 38 23 23 SAT_2_HSYNC_D_P
41 41 V14 C2P_SDAT A11 A11 A5 A5 C2P_SDAT SAT_2_HSYNC_D_N 37 37 24 24 SAT_2_HSYNC_D_N
42 42 AGND P2C_SDIR A10 A10 A6 A6 P2C_SDIR SAT_2_VSYNC_A_P 36 36 25 25 SAT_2_VSYNC_A_P
43 43 AVDD P2C_SBSY A9 A9 A7 A7 P2C_SBSY SAT_2_VSYNC_A_N 35 35 26 26 SAT_2_VSYNC_A_N
44 44 VDD C2P_SCK A8 A8 A8 A8 C2P_SCK SAT_2_VSYNC_B_P 34 34 27 27 SAT_2_VSYNC_B_P
45 45 MODE DISPLAY_POWERON A7 A7 A9 A9 DISPLAY_POWERON SAT_2_VSYNC_B_N 33 33 28 28 SAT_2_VSYNC_B_N
46 46 GBR INT_ANYKEY A6 A6 A10 A10 INT_ANYKEY SAT_2_VSYNC_C_P 32 32 29 29 SAT_2_VSYNC_C_P
47 47 SHLR GND A5 A5 A11 A11 GND SAT_2_VSYNC_C_N 31 31 30 30 SAT_2_VSYNC_C_N
48 48 UPDN +5.0V6 A4 A4 A12 A12 +5.0V6 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_P 30 30 31 31 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_P
49 49 COM +5.0V6 A3 A3 A13 A13 +5.0V6 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_N 29 29 32 32 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_N
50 50 COM +5.0V6 A2 A2 A14 A14 +5.0V6 GND 28 28 33 33 GND
+5.0V6 A1 A1 A15 A15 +5.0V6 SAR_2_VCLK1_P 27 27 34 34 SAR_2_VCLK1_P
SAR_2_VCLK1_N 26 26 35 35 SAR_2_VCLK1_N
GND 25 25 36 36 GND
YC6 YC4
SAR_2_CH13_P 24 24 37 37 SAR_2_CH13_P
1 1 LED_A SPEAKER_N 2 2 1 2 -
Backlight 2 2 LED_C SPEAKER_P 1 1 2
Relay
1 㸩 Speaker SAR_2_CH13_N
GND
23
22
23
22
38
39
38
39
SAR_2_CH13_N
GND
SAR_2_CH12_P 21 21 40 40 SAR_2_CH12_P
SAR_2_CH12_N 20 20 41 41 SAR_2_CH12_N
GND 19 19 42 42 GND
YC7
SAR_2_CH11_P 18 18 43 43 SAR_2_CH11_P
TOP 1 1 YN_Bottom SAR_2_CH11_N 17 17 44 44 SAR_2_CH11_N
Touch panel LEFT
BOTTOM
2
3
2
3
XN_Left
YP_Top
GND
SAR_2_VCLK2_P
16
15
16
15
45
46
45
46
GND
SAR_2_VCLK2_P
RIGHT 4 4 XP_Right SAR_2_VCLK2_N 14 14 47 47 SAR_2_VCLK2_N
GND 13 13 48 48 GND
SAR_2_CH23_P 12 12 49 49 SAR_2_CH23_P
SAR_2_CH23_N 11 11 50 50 SAR_2_CH23_N
GND 10 10 51 51 GND
SAR_2_CH22_P 9 9 52 52 SAR_2_CH22_P
Operation panel sub PWB SAR_2_CH22_N 8 8 53 53 SAR_2_CH22_N
GND 7 7 54 54 GND
YC1 YC3
SAR_2_CH21_P 6 6 55 55 SAR_2_CH21_P
+5V6 1 1 1 1 +5V6 SAR_2_CH21_N 5 5 56 56 SAR_2_CH21_N
LED0 2 2 2 2 LED0 GND 4 4 57 57 GND
LED1 3 3 3 3 LED1 GND 3 3 58 58 GND
LED2 4 4 4 4 LED2 AC_DETECT 2 2 59 59 AC_DETECT
NC 5 5 5 5 NC GND 1 1 60 60 GND
INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY_N 6 6 6 6 INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY_N
ENERGYSAVERLED 7 7 7 7 ENERGYSAVERLED
ATTENTION 8 8 8 8 ATTENTION
MEMORY 9 9 9 9 MEMORY Engine PWB (5/7)
PROMISSING 10 10 10 10 PROMISSING
JOB_LED 11 11 11 11 JOB_LED Main PWB (2/3)
SCAN0 12 12 12 12 SCAN0
SCAN1 13 13 13 13 SCAN1
SCAN2 14 14 14 14 SCAN2 YC5 YC60
SCAN3 15 15 15 15 SCAN3 +5V7 1 6 1 1 +5V7
KEY0 16 16 16 16 KEY0 +5V7 2 5 2 2 +5V7
KEY1 17 17 17 17 KEY1 +5V7 3 4 3 3 +5V7
KEY2 18 18 18 18 KEY2 GND 4 3 4 4 GND
KEY3 19 19 19 19 KEY3 GND 5 2 5 5 GND
GND 20 20 20 20 GND GND 6 1 6 6 GND
YC3 YC59
YC1 YC11 VBUS 1 1 1 1 VBUS
VDDDX 5 5 1 1 VDDDX DATA- 2 2 2 2 DATA-
GND 4 4 2 2 GND DATA+ 3 3 3 3 DATA+ YC23
NFC PWB CLK
DATA
3
2
3
2
3
4
3
4
CLK
DATA
ID
GND
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
ID
GND
SPEED CONTROL 1 3 1 3 ALM
NIRQ 1 1 5 5 NIRQ
GND
5V2
2
3
2
1
2
3
Relay 2
1
GND
5V
Controller fan motor
Operation unit
9-23
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC2 YC29
NC 11 11 GND 3 3 1 3 1 1 GND
NC 10 10 Waste toner full sensor Vout 2 2 2 Relay 2 2 2 WTNR_LOCK_SENS
NC 9 9 5V 1 1 3 1 3 3 5V
TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 8 4 4 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM
TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 7 7 5 5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA
NC 6 6 6 6 3.3V2
NC 5 5 7 7 D_VIB_MOT
EXSOL1_REM 4 4 8 8 EXSOL1_REM
EXSOL1_KEEP 3 3 9 9 EXSOL1_KEEP
EXSOL2_REM 2 2 10 10 EXSOL2_REM
EXSOL2_KEEP 1 1 11 11 EXSOL2_KEEP
12 12 TN_FAN_LOCK
13 13 GND
14 14 TN_FAN_REM
9-24
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC9 YC1
DATAP2_K 1 1 1 1 DATAP2_K YC16
DATAN2_K 2 2 2 2 DATAN2_K DP PWB 16 1 B16 B16 DP_SDI(DP to ENG)
GND 3 3 3 3 GND YC16 15 2 B15 B15 DP_SEL(ENG to DP)
DATAP1_K 4 4 4 4 DATAP1_K +24V4 16 16 14 3 B14 B14 +24V4
DATAN1_K 5 5 5 5 DATAN1_K +24V4 15 15 13 4 B13 B13 +24V4
GND 6 6 6 6 GND +24V4 14 14 12 5 B12 B12 +24V4
LSU_TH 7 7 7 7 LSU_TH GND 13 13 11 6 B11 B11 GND
GND 8 8 8 8 GND GND 12 12 10 7 B10 B10 GND
POL_CLK 9 9 9 9 POL_CLK GND 11 11 9 8 B9 B9 GND
POL_RDY 10 10 10 10 POL_RDY Relay
3.3V3_FUSE 10 10 8 9 B8 B8 3.3V3_FUSE
POL_REM 11 11 11 11 POL_REM DP_ORG_SET 9 9 7 10 B7 B7 DP_ORG_SET
BD 12 12 12 12 BD DP_FD_SW 8 8 6 11 B6 B6 DP_FD_SW
P4_BK 13 13 13 13 P4_BK 5 12 B5 B5 DP_RDY(DP to ENG)
P2 14 14 14 14 P2 DP_CO(DP to ENG) 7 7 4 13 B4 B4 DP_CO(DP to ENG)
P0 15 15 15 15 P0 DP_SDI(DP to ENG) 6 6 3 14 B3 B3 DP_TMG(DP to ENG)
CSI_K 16 16 16 16 CSI_K DP_SDO(ENG to DP) 5 5 2 15 B2 B2 DP_SOO(ENG to DP)
GND 17 17 17 17 GND DP_CLK(ENG to DP) 4 4 1 16 B1 B1 DP_CLK(ENG to DP)
DATAP2_M 18 18 18 18 DATAP2_M DP_SEL(ENG to DP) 3 3
DATAN2_M 19 19 19 19 DATAN2_M DP_RDY(DP to ENG) 2 2
GND 20 20 20 20 GND DP_TMG(DP to ENG) 1 1
DATAP1_M 21 21 21 21 DATAP1_M
DATAN1_M 22 22 22 22 DATAN1_M DP
GND 23 23 23 23 GND
SD_CLK 24 24 24 24 SD_CLK
P4_Col 25 25 25 25 P4_Col
CSI_C 26 26 26 26 CSI_C
CSY_Y 27 27 27 27 CSY_Y YC4 YC1
A16 A16 GND
INT_ST 28 28 28 28 INT_ST +5V4IL_LSU 4 4 1 1 +5V4IL_LSU A15 A15 GND
SET
CSI_M
29
30
29
30
29
30
29
30
SET
CSI_M
BD
NC
3
2
3
2
2
3
2
3
BD
NC
PD PWB 3.3V 3 3 A14 Relay A14 3.3V2
GND 31 31 31 31 GND GND 1 1 4 4 GND Home position sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
A13
A12
A13
A12
GND
HP_SENS
DIO 32 32 32 32 DIO
GND 33 33 33 33 GND
DOI 34 34 34 34 DOI
GND 3 3 A11 A11 GND
GND 35 35 35 35 GND
SKOI 36 36 36 36 SKOI YC5 Original size sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
A10
A9
A10
A9
ORG_SENS
5V2
GND 37 37 37 37 GND +24V4 1 1 5 5 +24V4
CSO 38 38 38 38 CSO PGND 2 2 4 4 GND 3.3V 3 3 A8 A8 3.3V2
GND 39 39 39 39 GND
DATAP2_C 40 40 40 40 DATAP2_C
POL_REM
POL_RDY
3
4
3
4
3
2
3
2
START/STOP
LOCKED
Polygon motor Original size timing sensor GND 2 2 A7 A7 GND
Vout 1 1 A6 A6 PLT_OPEN
DATAN2_C 41 41 41 41 DATAN2_C POL_CLK 5 5 1 1 EXT.CLOCK
GND 42 42 42 42 GND
DATAP1_C 43 43 43 43 DATAP1_C
B/ 4 4 A5 A5 SCAN_MOT_1_B
DATAN1_C 44 44 44 44 DATAN1_C
A4 A4 SCAN_MOT_1_A
GND 45 45 45 45 GND YC6
DATAP2_Y 46 46 46 46 DATAP2_Y CLN_MOT_A 1 1 3 1 Scanner motor A/ 3 3
DATAN2_Y
GND
47
48
47
48
47
48
47
48
DATAN2_Y
GND
NC 2 2 2 2 LSU cleaning motor B 2 2 A3 A3 SCAN_MOT_2_A
CLN_MOT_B 3 3 1 3 A 1 1 A2 A2 SCAN_MOT_2_B
DATAP1_Y 49 49 49 49 DATAP1_Y A1 A1 GND
DATAN1_Y 50 50 50 50 DATAN1_Y
YC7
TH 1 1 2 2 TH
NC 2 2 LSU thermistor
GND 3 3 1 1 GND
YC1 YC36
+12V5 40 40 1 1 +12V5
+12V5 39 39 2 2 +12V5
+12V5 38 38 3 3 +12V5
+12V5 37 37 4 4 +12V5
NC 36 36 5 5 NC
LED_PWM 35 35 6 6 LED_PWM
GND 34 34 7 7 GND
DSI_CIS_5P 33 33 8 8 DSI_CIS_5P
DSI_CIS_5N 32 32 9 9 DSI_CIS_5N
GND 31 31 10 10 GND
DSI_CIS_4P 30 30 11 11 DSI_CIS_4P
DSI_CIS_4N 29 29 12 12 DSI_CIS_4N
GND 28 28 13 13 GND
DSI_CIS_3P 27 27 14 14 DSI_CIS_3P
DSI_CIS_3N 26 26 15 15 DSI_CIS_3N
GND 25 25 16 16 GND
DSI_CIS_CKP 24 24 17 17 DSI_CIS_CKP
DSI_CIS_CKN 23 23 18 18 DSI_CIS_CKN
GND 22 22 19 19 GND
DSI_CIS_2P 21 21 20 20 DSI_CIS_2P
DSI_CIS_2N 20 20 21 21 DSI_CIS_2N
GND 19 19 22 22 GND
DSI_CIS_1P 18 18 23 23 DSI_CIS_1P
DSI_CIS_1N 17 17 24 24 DSI_CIS_1N
GND 16 16 25 25 GND
Relay
4 4 TH CCD PWB
WTNR_WEIGHT 11 11 3 3 3 3 OUT
GND 12 12 2 4 2 2 GND Weight sensor
+5V2 13 13 1 5 1 1 5V
9-25
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Relay
GND 3 3 B1 B1 GND
+24V3_IL_F1_FET1 2 2 B2 B2 +24V3_IL_F2_EFT2
FSR_OFFSET_CNT 1 1 B3 B3 FSR_OFFSET_CNT
B4 B4 PWM
Fuser high voltage PWB (1/2) B5 B5 CW/CCW
B6 B6 3.3V2_LED
B7 B7 GND
B8 B8 IH_CORE_HP
Exit unit
A/ 1 4 1 12 B9 B9 IHMOT_2B
A 2 3 2 11 B10 B10 IHMOT_2A
Rear exit motor B/ 3 2 3 10 B11 B11 IHMOT_1A
B 4 1 4 9 B12 B12 IHMOT_1B
YC17
A/ 1 4 5 8 A1 A1 EXMOT_1B
A 2 3 6 7 A2 A2 EXMOT_1A
Exit reversing motor B/ 3 2 7 6 A3 A3 EXMOT_2B
B 4 1 8 5 A4 A4 EXMOT_2A
Feed image PWB (2/6)
3.3V 3 3 9 4 A5 A5 +3.3V2_LED
Lower exit full sensor GND 2 2 10 3 A6 A6 GND
Vout 1 1 11 2 A7 A7 EXMAIN_FULL
12 1
Relay
3.3V 3 3 1 12 A8 A8 +3.3V2_LED
Upper exit full sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
11
10
A9
A10
A9
A10
GND
EXINNER_FULL
IHCOIL_FAN1 6 6 3 1 24V
Relay GND 7 7 2 Relay 2 GND Exit/IH front fan motor
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_F 8 8 1 3 ALM
YC1 B1 B1 VIB_MOT_REM
DLP_FAN_HARF 19 19 B2 B2 DLP_FAN_HARF
IHCOIL_FAN1 9 9 3 1 24V
DLP_FAN_REM
5V0_FUSE
18
17
18
17
B3
B4
B3
B4
DLP_FAN_REM
5V0_FUSE
GND 10 10 2 Relay 2 GND Exit/IH middle fan motor
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_C 11 11 1 3 ALM
DRM_HEAT_REM 16 16 B5 B5 DRM_HEAT_REM
ERASER_COL 15 15 B6 B6 ERASER_COL
ERASER_BK 14 14 B7 B7 ERASER_BK
+24V2 13 13 B8 B8 +24V2
IHCOIL_FAN1 12 12
GND 12 12 B9 B9 GND
Drum/Developer TPC_Y
TPC_C
11
10
11
10
B10
B11
B10
B11
TPC_Y
TPC_C
GND
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_R
13
14
13
14
9-26
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-4
TNMOT_BK_OUT2 A2 A2 8 2
2
1
2
3
Toner motor K
6 6 CONT_RECOG
TNMOT_C_OUT1 B1 B1 9 1 3 1
TNMOT_C_OUT2 B2 B2 8 2
2
1
2
3
Toner motor C
+24V1 1 11 19 19 +24V3_IL_F1_FET1
PGND 2 10 18 18 GND
START/STOP 3 9 17 17 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_REM
VM 4 8 16 16 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_CLK 3.3V2_LED B3 B3 7 3 3 3 3.3V
FG 5 7 15 15 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_FG GND B4 B4 6
Relay
4 2 2 GND Toner motor rotation sensor C
Developer K CW/CCW 6 6 14 14 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_DIR
DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_BRK
THOP_PLS_C B5 B5 5 5 1 1 Vout
BRAKE 7 5 13 13
/ Transfer belt motor +5V 8 4 3.3V2 B6 B6 4 6 Collector
SGND 9 3 THOP_FULL_C
THOP_LED_C
B7
B8
B7
B8
3
2
7
8
Emitter
Cathode
Toner level sensor C
SIG1 10 2
SIG2 11 1 3.3V2_LED B9 B9 1 9 Anode
CW/CCW
LD 5
6
2
1
2
1
2
1
DRM_BK_MOT_LD
DRM_BK_MOT_DIR
Toner Hopper
YC23
1 3 1 1 BLT_PRESS_OUT1
Belt release motor 2
3
2
1 2 2 BLT_PRESS_OUT2
3 3 1 5 3 3 +24V2_F1
Developer clutch 2
1
2
1 2 4 4 4 DLP_BK_CLT_REM
Relay
3.3V 3 3 3 3 5 5 3.3V2_LED
Belt release sensor GND 2 2 4 2 6 6 GND
Vout 1 1 5 1 7 7 BLT_4RELEASE_SENS
9-27
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
3.3V 3 3 3 6 A9 A9 3.3V2_LED
Upper paper gauge sensor 1 GND 2 2 4
Relay
5 A10 A10 GND 3.3V2_LED B10 B10 B5 B10 5 1 3 3 3.3V
Vout 1 1 5 4 A11 A11 CAS1_QUANT1 GND B11
DU_SENS1 B12
B11
B12
B4
B3
B11
B12
4
3
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
DU sensor 1
Relay
3.3V 3 3 6 3 A12 A12 3.3V2_LED
Lower paper gauge sensor 1 GND 2 2 7 2 A13 A13 GND RCOVER_OPEN B13
GND B14
B13
B14
B2
B1
B13
B14
2
1
4
5
2
1
2
1 Rear ID sensorFront ID sensor
Vout 1 1 8 1 A14 A14 CAS1_QUANT2
Relay Relay
2 2 1 2 A15 A15 LIFTMOT1_OUT1 DU_CL1 A1 A1 A14 A1 3 3
Lift motor 1 1 1 2
Relay 1 A16 A16 LIFTMOT1_OUT2 2 2 DU clutch 1
+24V2 A2 A2 A13 A2 1 1
Relay
DUCL2 A3 A3 A12 A3 3 3
MPFCL_REM A5 A5 A10 A5 3 3
SIZE_WS 2 2 1 8 B3 B3 CAS2_WSIZE 2 2 MP clutch
Paper width sensor 2 GND 1 1 2 7 B4 B4 GND +24V2_FUSE A6 A6 A9 A6 1 1
3.3V 3 3 3 6 B5 B5 3.3V2_LED
Upper paper gauge sensor 2 GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
4
5 Relay
5
4
B6
B7
B6
B7
GND
CAS2_QUANT1
3.3V2_LED A7 A7 A8 A7 8 1 3 3 3.3V
3.3V 3 3 6 3 B8 B8 3.3V2_LED MPF_WSIZE A8 A8 A7 A8 7 2 2 2 Vout MP paper width sensor
Lower paper gauge sensor 2 GND 2 2 7 2 B9 B9 GND GND A9 A9 A6 A9 6 3 1 1 GND
Vout 1 1 8 1 B10 B10 CAS2_QUANT2
MPF_TRAY A10 A10 A5 A10 5 4 2 2
CAS_OP 2 2 1 6 B11 B11 CAS2_LSIZE3 GND A11 A11 A4 A11 4 Relay 5 1 1 MP tray sensor
Cassette sensor 2 GND 1 1 2 5 B12 B12 GND
LED_3.3V2 A12 A12 A3 A12 3 6 3 3 3.3V
CN-3 4 4 3 Relay 4 B13 B13 CAS2_LSIZE3 GND A13 A13 A2 A13 2 7 2 2 GND MP paper length sensor
Paper length sensor 2 GND 3 3 4 3 B14 B14 GND MPF_LSIZE A14 A14 A1 A14 1 8 1 1 Vout MP tray
CN-2 2 2 5 2 B15 B15 CAS2_LSIZE2
CN-1 1 1 6 1 B16 B16 CAS2_LSIZE1
YC8
MPFLIFT_OUT1 1 1 12 1 2 1
YC6 MPFLIFT_OUT2 2 2 11 2 1 Relay 2 MP lift motor
GND 3 3 1 5 A1 A1 GND
Registration sensor Vout 2 2 2 4 A2 A2 REGIST_SENS
MPFLIFT_HP 3 3 10 3 2 2
3.3V 1 1 3
Relay
3 A3 A3 3.3V2
GND 4 4 9 4 1 1 MP position sensor
3 3 4 2 A4 A4 MIDCL N.C. 5 5 8 5
Middle clutch 2 2
N.C. 6 6 7 6
1 1 5 1 A5 A5 +24V2_F2 Relay
3.3V3 7 7 6 7 6 1 3 3 3.3V
1
2
12
11
GND
MPF_SET
8
9
8
9
5
4
8
9
5
4
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
MP paper sensor
3 10 Relay
3.3V2 10 10 3 10 3 4 3 3.3V
3.3V 3 3 4 9 A6 A6 3.3V2_LED MPF_FEED 11 11 2 11 2 5 2 Vout MP conveying sensor
Retard sensor 1 Vout 2 2 5
6
8
7
A7 A7 TDRS1_SENS GND 12 12 1 12 1 6 1 GND
GND 1 1 A8 A8 GND
Relay
3.3V 3 3 7 6 A9 A9 3.3V2_LED Coveying cover
Retard sensor 2 Vout
GND
2
1
2
1
8
9
5
4
A10
A11
A10
A11
TDRS2_SENS
GND
Cleaning solenoid
COM 1
Relay
2 11 2 11 11 +24V2_F2
FSR_RLSMOT_OUT1
2 2 Fuser pressure release motor
ACT 2 1 12 1 12 12 ID_SOL 8 8 3 1
9-28
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC10 YC2 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
ERASER_REM 1 1 5V_FUSE ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
Eraser K ERASER_GND 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
3 NC 24V2/5V0 4 3 24V2/5V0 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
4 NC ERASER1 3 Relay 4 ERASER1 DLP_TH or N.C. 4
Relay 3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0 T/C sensor K
EEP_SCL 6 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2 5 6 3.3V2 3.3V2 6 6 3 3 3.3V2
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2 8 7 3.3V2 EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB K GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
VIB_MOT 9 9
YC6 Developer PWB K 3.3V2 10 10
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC11 YC3 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
ERASER_REM 1 1 5V_FUSE ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
Eraser M ERASER_GND 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
3 NC 24V2/5V0 4 3 24V2/5V0 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
4 NC ERASER1 3
Relay 4 ERASER1 N.C. 4
Relay
3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0 T/C sensor M
EEP_SCL 6 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2 5 6 3.3V2 3.3V2 6 6 3 3 3.3V2
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2 8 7 3.3V2 EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB M GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
VIB_MOT 9 9
YC7 Developer PWB M 3.3V2 10 10
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC12 YC4 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
ERASER_REM 1 1 5V_FUSE ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
Eraser C ERASER_GND 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
3 NC 24V2/5V0 4 3 24V2/5V0 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
4 NC ERASER1 3 4 ERASER1 N.C. 4 3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0 T/C sensor C
EEP_SCL 6 Relay 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2 5 Relay 6 3.3V2 3.3V2 6 6 3 3 3.3V2
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2 8 7 3.3V2 EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB C GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
VIB_MOT 9 9
YC8 Developer PWB C 3.3V2 10 10
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC13 YC5 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
ERASER_REM 1 1 5V_FUSE ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
Eraser Y ERASER_GND 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
3 NC 24V2/5V0 4 3 24V2/5V0 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
4 NC ERASER1 3 4 ERASER1 N.C. 4 3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0
T/C sensor Y
EEP_SCL 6
Relay 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2 5
Relay 6 3.3V2 3.3V2 6 6 3 3 3.3V2
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2 8 7 3.3V2 EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB Y GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
VIB_MOT 9 9
YC9 Developer PWB Y 3.3V2 10 10
9-29
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-3
Transfer high-voltage
Feed image PWB (4/6)
PWBࠉ
YC1
+24V4 1 1
+24V3 2 2
YC35 +24V3 3 3
YC1 1 1 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 +24V2 4 4 YC6 TB1
PGND 13 13 1 13 2 2 GND +24V2 5 5 1 1 +24V2 LIVE 1 1 AC_LIVE
+24V2IL 12 12 2 12 GND 6 6 2 2 +24V2 Black Black
3 3 GND GND 7 7 3 3 +24V3 TB2 Inlet 1
4 4 GND GND 8 8 4 4 +24V3 NEUTRAL 1 1 AC_NEUTRAL
5 5 GND GND 9 9 5 5 GND White White
6 6 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 GND 10 10 6 6 GND
7 7 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 7 7 GND
8 8 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 8 8 GND
TB3
DH_LIVE 1 1 Blue 1 CH_LIVE
YC1 YC1
Relay
5V0 1 1 YC7 LIVE_IN 1 1 Yellow 2 COM Main Power Switch
GND 2 2 1 1 +24V4 LIVE_OUT 2 2 White 3 LIVE_OUT
GND 3 3 2 2 GND NEUTRAL_IN 3 3 Yellow 5 COM
YC34 GND 4 4 3 3 GND NEUTRAL_OUT 4 4 White 6 NEUTRAL_OUT
CL_CNT 11 11 3 11 1 1 CL_CNT +24V4 5 5 4 4 +24V4
T1_Y_CNT 10 10 4 10 2 2 T1_Y_CNT +24V4 6 6 5 5 +24V4
T1_C_CNT 9 9 5 9 3 3 T1_C_CNT 6 6 GND
T1_M_CNT 8 8 6 8 4 4 T1_M_CNT
T1_I_SENS 7 7 7 7 5 5 T1_I_SENS
T2_OFF__REM 6 6 8 6 6 6 T2_OFF_REM
T1_K_CNT 5 5 9 5 7 7 T1_K_CNT
Triac
SP_CNT 4 4 10 4 8 8 SP_CNT
T2_CNT 3 3 11 3 9 9 T2_CNT
T_REM 2 2 12 2 10 10 T_REM
SGND 1 1 13 1 11 11 SGND
YC2 YC1
LIVE 1 1 1 1 LIVE
NEUTRAL 2 2 2 2 NEUTRAL IH PWB (1/2)
YC2
PGND 1 1
PGND 2 2
+24V2IL 3 3
+24V2IL 4 4
Fuse
YC1 YC33 YC4
B_MAG_AC_CLK 1 1 18 18 B_MAG_AC_CLK CH_LIVE 1 1 1 1
B_Y_MAG_DC_CNT 2 2 17 17 B_Y_MAG_DC_CNT CH_LIVE 2 2 2 2 Cassette heater
M_Y_I_SENS 3 3 16 16 M_Y_I_SENS NC 3 3
M_C_I_SENS 4 4 15 15 M_C_I_SENS NC 4 4
M_K_I_SENS 5 5 14 14 M_K_I_SENS CH_NEUTRAL 5 5
M_M_I_SENS 6 6 13 13 M_M_I_SENS 1 2
M_Y_DC_CNT
B_CLR_MAG_AC_CNT
7
8
7
8
12
11
12
11
M_Y_DC_CNT
B_CLR_MAG_AC_CNT
CH_NEUTRAL 6 6 PF drawer
B_C_MAG_DC_CNT 9 9 10 10 B_C_MAG_DC_CNT (for Cassette heater)
M_M_DC_CNT
M_K_DC_CNT
10
11
10
11
9
8
9
8
M_M_DC_CNT
M_K_DC_CNT
Low power voltage PEB (2/2) 1 3
B_M_MAG_DC_CNT 12 12 7 7 B_M_MAG_DC_CNT
M_C_DC_CNT 13 13 6 6 M_C_DC_CNT YC5
B_K_MAG_DC_CNT 14 14 5 5 B_K_MAG_DC_CNT +24V2 1 1 1
B_K_MAG_AC_CNT 15 15 4 4 B_K_MAG_AC_CNT GND 2 2 2
PF drawer (PF power supply)
HV_REM 16 16 3 3 HV_REM
SGND 17 17 2 2 SGND
1 1 SGND
YC8
12 12 5V0
MAG(BK) 1 1 1
Developer (BK) 11 11 GND
MAG(C) 1 1 1
Developer (C) YC42
5V0 1 1 10 10 5V0
MAG(M) 1 1 1
Developer (M) GND 2 2 9 9 GND
Engine PWB (3/7) 5V0
GND
3
4
3
4
8
7
8
7
5V0
GND
MAG(Y) 1 1 1
Developer (Y) 5V0
GND
5
6
5
6
6
5
6
5
5V0
GND
5V0 7 7 4 4 5V0
GND 8 8 3 3 GND
5V0 9 9 2 2 5V0
GND 10 10 1 1 GND
9-30
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC2
3.3V2_LED 1 1 3 3 3.3V
GND 2 2 2 2 GND Front belt rotation sensor
Fuser PWB FSR_ROLL_F 3 3 1 1 Vout
3.3V2_LED 4 4 3 3 3.3V
YC22 YC1
GND 5 5 2 2 GND Fuser sensor
FSR_JAM_SENS 6 6 1 1 Vout
GND 1 1 1 1 1 1 GND
FUSER_SDA 2 2 2 2 2 2 EEP_SDA FSR_TH_EDGE 7 7
FUSER_SCL 3 3 3 3 3 3 EEP_SCL GND 8 8 Fuser thermistor 3 (edge)
+3.3V2 4 4 4 4 4 4 3.3V2
FSR_TH_PRESS 5 5 5 5 5 5 FSR_TH_PRESS 3.3V2_LED 9 9 3 3 3.3V
FSR_PRESS_SENS 6 6 6 6 6 6 FSR_PRESS_SENS GND 10 10 2 2 GND Fuser pressure release sensor
FSR_TH_EDGE 7 7 7 7 7 7 FSR_TH_EDGE FSR_PRESS_SENS 11 11 1 1 Vout
FSR_JAM_SENS 8 8 8 8 8 8 FSR_JAM_SENS
FSR_ROLL_F_SENS 9 9 9 9 9 9 FSR_ROLL_F FSR_TH_PRESS 12 12
10 10 10 10 NC GND 13 13 Fuser thermistor 4 (press)
11 11
+3.3V2_TH_CUT 10 10 12 12 3 1
+3.3V2 11 11 13 Relay 13
2
1
Relay 2
3
Fuser thermostat
GND 12 12 14 14 2 1
FSR_TH_MIDDLE 13 13 15 15 1 Relay 2 Fuser thermistor 1 (middle)
3.3V2_LED 14 14 16 16 3 3 3.3V
GND 15 15 17 17 2 2 GND Rear belt rotation sensor
FSR_ROLL_R_SENS 16 16 18 18 1 1 Vout
GND 17 17 19 19 2 1
FSR_TH_CENTRAL 18 18 20 20 1
Relay
2 Fuser thermistor 2 (center)
Fuser IH coil
YC2
VS 1 1
YC3
COIL_COM 1 1
FSR1
Fuser discharger needle 1 1 1 CHARGE
IH PWB (2/2)
YC4 YC29
GND 7 7 1 1 GND
3.3V2 6 6 2 2 3.3V2
IH_IGBT_CLK_HIGH 5 5 3 3 IH_IGBT_CLK_HI
IH_IGBT_CLK_LOW 4 4 4 4 IH_IGBT_CLK_LOW
IH_ERROR 3 3 5 5 IH_ERROR
IH_TXD 2 2 6 6 IH_TXD
IH_RXD 1 1 7 7 IH_RXD Engine PWB (4/7)
YC5
GND 3 3 8 8 GND
IH_RELAY 2 2 9 9 IH_RELAY
+24V2 1 1 10 10 +24V2
9-31
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC43
YC9 YC63 1 1 24V4
1 1 VGH GND 13 13 2 2 GND
2 2 VDD YC8 YC6 DP_WAKEUP_REQ 12 12 3 3 DP_WAKEUP_REQ
3 3 VGL GND 1 1 1 1 GND HLD_SCN_N(E_M) 11 11 4 4 HLD_SCN_N(E_M)
4 4 VCOM LCD_OFF 2 2 2 2 LCD_OFF ENG_POWOFF_N(E_M) 10 10 5 5 ENG_POWOFF_N(E_M)
5 5 VCOM LOCKN 3 3 3 3 LOCKN E2C_SDIR(E_M) 9 9 6 6 E2C_SDIR(E_M)
6 6 AGND GND 4 4 4 4 GND E2C_IR(E_M) 8 8 7 7 E2C_IR(E_M)
7 7 AVDD TX0N 5 5 5 5 TX0N E2C_SBSY(E_M) 7 7 8 8 E2C_SBSY(E_M)
8 8 GND TX0P 6 6 6 6 TX0P C2E_SCLK(M_E) 6 6 9 9 C2E_SCLK(M_E)
9 9 GND GND 7 7 7 7 GND C2E_SDAT(E_M) 5 5 10 10 C2E_SDAT(E_M)
10 10 V1 E2C_SDAT(E_M) 4 4 11 11 E2C_SDAT(E_M)
11 11 V2 HLD_ENG_N(M_E) 3 3 12 12 HLD_ENG_N(M_E)
12 12 V3 ENG_WAKEUP_REQ(M_E) 2 2 13 13 ENG_WAKEUP_REQ(M_E)
13 13 V4 JS_LED_REM 1 1 14 14 JS_LED_REM
14 14 V5 YC12
15 15 V6 2 2 B1 B1 POWER_ON
16 16 V7 Power switch 1 Relay 1 B2 B2 GND
17 17 HSD YC43 YC35
18 18 GND_LVDS GND 60 60 1 1 GND
19 19 RxIN3+ YC5 OS_SAD4P 59 59 2 2 OS_SAD4P
20 20 RxIN3- NC B15 B15 OS_SAD4N 58 58 3 3 OS_SAD4N
21 21 GND GND B14 B14 GND 57 57 4 4 GND
22 22 RxIN2+ JOB_LED B13 B13 B3 B3 JOB_LED OS_SACKP 56 56 5 5 OS_SACKP
23 23 RxIN2- GND B12 B12 B4 B4 GND OS_SACKN 55 55 6 6 OS_SACKN
24 24 GND GND B11 B11 B5 B5 GND GND 54 54 7 7 GND
25 25 RxIN1+ GND B10 B10 B6 B6 GND OS_SAD3P 53 53 8 8 OS_SAD3P
26 26 RxIN1- BEEP_POWERON B9 B9 B7 B7 BEEP_POWERON OS_SAD3N 52 52 9 9 OS_SAD3N
27 27 GND LED_MEMORY B8 B8 B8 B8 LED_MEMORY GND 51 51 10 10 GND
LCD 28 28 RxIN0+ LED_ATTENTION B7 B7 B9 B9 LED_ATTENTION OS_SAD2P 50 50 11 11 OS_SAD2P
29 29 RxIN0- LED_PROCESSING B6 B6 B10 B10 LED_PROCESSING OS_SAD2N 49 49 12 12 OS_SAD2N
30 30 GND AUDIO B5 B5 B11 B11 AUDIO GND 48 48 13 13 GND
31 31 RxINCK+ PNL_WKUP_REQ B4 B4 B12 B12 PNL_WKUP_REQ OS_SAD1P 47 47 14 14 OS_SAD1P
32 32 RxINCK- INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY B3 B3 B13 B13 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY OS_SAD1N 46 46 15 15 OS_SAD1N
33 33 GND NIRQ B2 B2 B14 B14 NIRQ GND 45 45 16 16 GND
34 34 VDD_LVDS I2C_SDA_NFC B1 B1 B15 B15 I2C_SDA_NFC SAT_2_HSYNC_A_P 44 44 17 17 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_P
35 35 V8 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_N 43 43 18 18 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_N
36 36 V9 Relay Relay SAT_2_HSYNC_B_P 42 42 19 19 SAT_2_HSYNC_B_P
37 37 V10 I2C_SCL_NFC A15 A15 A1 A1 PNL_WKUP_REQ SAT_2_HSYNC_B_N 41 41 20 20 SAT_2_HSYNC_B_N
38 38 V11 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY A14 A14 A2 A2 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY SAT_2_HSYNC_C_P 40 40 21 21 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_P
39 39 V12 FPRST A13 A13 A3 A3 FPRST SAT_2_HSYNC_C_N 39 39 22 22 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_N
40 40 V13 P2C_SDAT A12 A12 A4 A4 P2C_SDAT SAT_2_HSYNC_D_P 38 38 23 23 SAT_2_HSYNC_D_P
41 41 V14 C2P_SDAT A11 A11 A5 A5 C2P_SDAT SAT_2_HSYNC_D_N 37 37 24 24 SAT_2_HSYNC_D_N
42 42 AGND P2C_SDIR A10 A10 A6 A6 P2C_SDIR SAT_2_VSYNC_A_P 36 36 25 25 SAT_2_VSYNC_A_P
43 43 AVDD P2C_SBSY A9 A9 A7 A7 P2C_SBSY SAT_2_VSYNC_A_N 35 35 26 26 SAT_2_VSYNC_A_N
44 44 VDD C2P_SCK A8 A8 A8 A8 C2P_SCK SAT_2_VSYNC_B_P 34 34 27 27 SAT_2_VSYNC_B_P
45 45 MODE DISPLAY_POWERON A7 A7 A9